HomeMy WebLinkAbout328 E 7th St Technical - Building
,TECHNICAL
( h'D \'Y\ H u 1'\ +- E Y1j ,'", -een'~ ')
I Ihclu~5 S~ Sel{\im-- Cev\k AMI~\O~
Hve- Al~
~ '32-'3 ~, ~ S+
FIY"L- Svp ~sgl'o'1
5y;-\e.m sf~s. 1t- Ol-2LJ 3
r~e,s j ~~ ~
o nOv\~ DY ~ Ib-O Z
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 138,51 - FIRE ALARM
FILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire alarm systems.
B. Extend the existing fire alarm system as required. Provide new fire alarm devices as indicated.
C. Definitions:
1. F ACP: Fire alarm control panel.
2. LED: Light-emitting diode.
3. Defmitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section. .
D.
System Description:
1. Noncoded, addressable system; multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm
service only with interface to existing fire alarm system.
2. All work to fire alarm system shall be by a local (within 50 miles) contractor.
E.
Performance Requirements:
1. Comply with NFPA 72.
2. Premises protection
3. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
a. Manual stations.
b. Smoke detectors.
c. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.
4. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
a. Maintain the existing sequence of actions.
b. Add the new building as a new zone, modify existing graphic annuciator or replace
as required.Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously.
c. Identify alarm at the F ACP and remote annunciators.
d. De-energize electromagnetic door holders.
e. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
f. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
g. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
h. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire alarm
mode.
1. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was
initiated.
J. Record events in the system memory.
5.
Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:
FIRE ALARM
13851-1
'"
~
-\
~
3
o
...:J
.
~
~
t!-J
,
)-:>
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
a. Operation of a fire-protection system valve tamper.
6. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or
actions:
a. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and
notification-appliance circuits.
b. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-
initiating devices.
c. Loss of primary power at the FACP.
d. Ground or a single break in F ACP internal circuits.
e. Abnormal ac voltage at the FACP.
f. A break in standby battery circuitry.
g. Failure of battery charging.
h. Abnormal position of any switch at the F ACP or annunciator.
7. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble bell and annunciate at the
F ACP and remote annunciators. Record event.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of
operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually
and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard
descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
2. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.
3. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire types and
sizes.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for equipment
and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show wiring color
code.
5. Batteries: Size calculations.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
E. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for
submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to
authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated Contract
Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to make clarifications
or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction,
submit them to Architect for review.
FIRE ALARM
13851-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation
of units required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. F ACP and Equipment:
a. Match existing panel, field verify existing conditions prior to bid.
2. Wire and Cable:
a. Comtran Corporation.
b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company.
c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company.
d. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.
3. Audible and Visual Signals:
a. Amseco; a division of Kobishi America, Inc.
b. Commercial Products Group.
c. Gentex Corporation.
d. System Sensor; a GE-Honeywell Company.
2.2 EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. Compatibility with Existing Equipment: Fire alarm system and components shall operate as an
extension of an existing system.
2.3 FACP
A. General Description:
1. Existing, maintain 100% of existing functionality with new extension of system.
2. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed.
3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.
FIRE ALARM
13851-3
I-
I
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2.4
MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES
A.
Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in
contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation. Mounted on recessed
outlet box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type.
With integral addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-station status
(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the F ACP.
2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
2.5
SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A.
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0.0 I] percent/mm)
smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.
2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices In a single-
mounting assembly.
B. Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24- V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the operating
mechanism behind the bell. Bells shall produce a sound-pressure level of 94 dBA, measured 1 0
feet (3 m) from the bell. 10-inch (254-mm) size, unless otherwise indicated. Bells are
weatherproof where indicated.
C. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal white
polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in
minimum l-inch- l25-mm-) high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output: 110 candela.
2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
D. Connect to sprinkler system Flow and Tamper switches, also connect to PIV with is remote
from building. See civil and electrical site plan.
2.7 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with
NFPA 70, Article 760.
B. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system manufacturer.
FIRE ALARM
13851-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70 Article 760, Classification CI,
for power-limited fire alarm signal service. UL listed as Type FPL, and complying with
requirements in UL 1424 and in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.
C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600- V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded
insulation.
1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.
2. Line- Voltage Circuits: No. 12 A WG, minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire alarm system is operational before
making changes or connections.
1. Connect new equipment to the existing control panel in the existing part of the building.
2. Connect new equipment to the existing monitoring equipment at the Supervising Station.
3. Expand, modify, and supplement the existing monitoring equipment as necessary to
extend the existing monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall be
capable of merging with the existing configuration without degrading the performance of
either system.
B. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:
1. Locate in general areas indicated on the plans.
C. HV AC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet (1 m) from air-supply diffuser or return-air
opening.
D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they
extend the full width of the duct.
E. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.
Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism
concealed behind a grille.
F. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least
6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.
G. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
3.2 WIRlNG INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring according to the following:
1. NECA 1.
2. TIAlEIA 568-A.
FIRE ALARM 13851-5
I
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
3.3
3.4
3.5
12-19-2006
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 16 Section "Raceways
and Boxes."
1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system
shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any
other wire or cable.
C.
Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as
recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and
back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess.
Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with
the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring
diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type
terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
D.
Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
E.
Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power
wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory
circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits.
Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes
and covers red.
IDENTIFICA TION
A.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section"
Electrical Identification."
B.
Install instructions frame in a location visible from the F ACP.
c.
Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
GROUNDING
A.
Ground the F ACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from
main service ground to the FACP.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement using the
form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in NFPA 72.
Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built drawings
and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly located, damaged, or
nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning tests.
FIRE ALARM 13 851-6
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
4. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in NFPA 72.
a. Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced.
5. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including demonstration of
sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in NFPA 70.
3.6 DEMONSTRA TION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain the fire alarm system, appliances, and devices. Refer to Division 1
END OF SECTION 13851
FIRE ALARM
13851-7
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 13915 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building:
1. Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
B. See Division 10 Section "Fire-Protection Specialties" for cabinets and fire extinguishers.
C. See Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for alarm devices not specified in this Section.
D. Provide a new feeder to the existing fire riser in the kitchen area. Modify existing riser as
required.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and
that is connected to water supply. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are
opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose
connections are included if indicated.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig (1200 kPa).
B. Fire-suppression sprinkler system design shan be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses
through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
a. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1
b. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1
d. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard
3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: [0.10 gpm/sq.ft. over 1500 sq. ft. (4.1 Llmin. per sq.
m al'CI' 139 sq. m OJ' 4.1 mm/min. over 139 sq. m)] .
b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: [0.15 gpmlsq.ft. ovcr 1500 sq. ft. (6.1
overL/min. per sq. mover 139 sq. m or 6.1 mm/min. over 139 sq. m)] .
c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: [0.20 gpm/sq. ft. over 1500 sq. ft. (8.1
L/min. pel' sq. mover 139 sq. m)] .
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:
a. Office Spaces: 120 sq. ft. (ILl sq. m)]
b. Storage Areas: [130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. 111)]
c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: [130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. 111)]
d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: [130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. 111)]
e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping shall be capable of withstanding the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to NFP A 13 .
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations, if
applicable.
C. Field test reports and certificates.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing
fire-suppression systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume
engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test
reports by a qualified professional engineer.
B. NFP A Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and
testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
2. NFPA 13R, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and
Including Four Stories in Height."
3. NFPA 14, "Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant, and Hose Systems."
4. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."
5. NFPA 230, "Fire Protection of Storage."
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iran Pipe: A WWA CI5I, with mechanical-joint bell end and plain
end.
I. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: A WW A ClIO, ductile- or gray-iron standard
pattern.
2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: A WW A C Ill, ductile- or gray-iron gland, rubber gasket,
and steel bolts and nuts.
B. Push-an-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA CI5I, with push-an-joint bell end and plain end.
I. Push-an-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: A WW A C 11 0, ductile- or gray-iron standard
pattern.
C. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: A WWA CI5I, with factory- or field-formed, radius-cut-
grooved ends according to A WW A C606.
1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Victaulic Co. of America.
b. Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with 00 matching
ductile-iron-pipe 00
c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: A WW A C606, gasketed fitting matching ductile-
iron-pipe 00. Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching ductile-iran-pipe
and fitting grooves, rubber gasket with center leg, and steel bolts and nuts.
d. Grooved-End Transition Flange: UL 213, gasketed fitting with key for ductile-
iron-pipe dimensions. Include flange-type, ductile-iron housing with rubber gasket
listed for use with housing and steel bolts and nuts.
2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Threaded-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or
ASTM A 795. with factory- or field-formed threaded ends.
I. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME BI6.1.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME BI6.3.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12~ 19-2006
3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4.
4. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or
ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe Include ends matching joining method.
5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865.
B. Grooved-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or
ASTM A 795, with factory- or field-formed, square-cut-grooved ends.
1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Anvil International, Inc.
2) Central Sprinkler Corp.
3) Ductilic, Inc.
4) JDH Pacific, Inc.
5) National Fittings, Inc.
6) Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc.
7) Southwestern Pipe, Inc.
8) Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.
9) Victaulic Co. of America.
10) Ward Manufacturing.
b. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with 00
matching steel-pipe 00.
c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and A WW A C606, rigid pattern, unless
otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe 00. Include ductile-iron
housing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves,[ prelubricated] rubber
gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.
2.4 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig (] 200-kPa)
minimum working-pressure rating, and made of materials compatible with piping.
B. Outlet Specialty Fittings:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Anvil International, Inc.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
c. Ductilic, Inc.
d. JDH Pacific, Inc.
e. National Fittings, Inc.
f. Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc.
g. Southwestern Pipe, Inc.
h. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.
1. Victaulic Co. of America.
j. Ward Manufacturing.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2. Mechanical- T and -Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with gaskets, bolts and
nuts, and threaded, locking-lug, or grooved outlets.
3. Snap-On and Strapless Outlet Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing or casting with
gasket and threaded outlet.
C. Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded or locking-
lug inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Central Sprinkler Corp.
b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
c. Viking Corp.
d. Victaulic Co. of America.
D. Sprinkler Branch-Line Test Fittings: Brass body with threaded inlet, capped drain outlet, and
threaded outlet for sprinkler.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
b. Fire-End and Croker Corp.
c. Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.
E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fitting: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with threaded inlet and drain
outlet and sight glass.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AGF Manufacturing Co.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
c. G/J Innovations, Inc.
d. Triple R Specialty of Ajax, Inc.
F. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, adjustable with threaded inlet and outlet, and seals.
1. Manufacturers:
a. CECA, LLC.
b. Merit.
2.5 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VAL YES
A. Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig (1200 kPa) minimum pressure
rating.
B. Gate Valves with Wall Indicator Posts:
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-5
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1. Gate Valves: UL 262, cast-iron body, bronze mounted, with solid disc, nonrising stem,
operating nut, and flanged ends.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Grinnell Fire Protection.
b. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
c. NIBCO.
d. Stockham.
C. Butterfly Valves: UL 1091.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Global Safety Products, Inc.
2) Milwaukee Valve Company.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (ON 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body; wafer type or
with grooved ends.
a. ]Manufacturers:
1) Central Sprinkler Corp.
2) Global Safety Products, Inc.
3) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
4) Mueller Company.
5) NIBCO.
6) Pratt, Henry Company.
7) Victaulic Co. of America.
D. Check Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: UL 312, swing type, cast-iron body with flanged or
grooved ends.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AFAC Inc.
b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co.
c. Central Sprinkler Corp.
d. Clow Valve Co.
e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
g. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
h. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
\. Grinnell Fire Protection.
j. Hammond Valve.
k. Matco-Norca, Inc.
1. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
m. Mueller Company.
n. NIB CO.
o. Potter-Roemer; Fire Protection Div.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-6
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
p. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
q. Star Sprinkler Inc.
r. Stockham.
s. United Brass Works, Inc.
t. Venus Fire Protection, Ltd.
u. Victaulic Co. of America.
v. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
E. Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type.
1. NPS 2 (ON 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
2) Hammond Valve.
3) NIBCO.
4) United Brass Works, Inc.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (ON 65) and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Clow Valve Co.
2) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
3) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
4) Hammond Valve.
5) Milwaukee Valve Company.
6) Mueller Company.
7) NIBCO.
8) Red- White Valve Corp.
9) United Brass Works, Inc.
2.6 UNLISTED GENERAL-DUTY VAL YES
A. Check Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 4, Class 125 minimum, swing
type with bronze body, nonmetallic disc, and threaded ends.
B. Gate Valves NPS 2 (ON 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 minimum, with
bronze body, solid wedge, and threaded ends.
C. Globe Valves NPS 2 (ON 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125 minimum, with
bronze body, nonmetallic disc, and threaded ends.
2. 7 SPECIALTY VAL YES
A. Sprinkler System Control Valves: UL listed or FMG approved, cast- or ductile-iron body with
flanged or grooved ends, and I 75-psig (1200-kPa) minimum pressure rating.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-7
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1. Manufacturers:
a. AF AC Inc.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
c. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
e. Grinnell Fire Protection.
f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
g. Star Sprinkler Inc.
h. Venus Fire Protection, Ltd.
i. Victaulic Co. of America.
J. Viking Corp.
2. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with
bronze grooved seat with a-ring seals, single-hinge pin, and latch design. Include trim
sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages and fill-line
attachment with strainer.
a. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain
pip mg.
b. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.
B. Automatic Drain Valves: UL 1726, NPS 3/4 (DN 20), ball-check device with threaded ends.
I. Manufacturers:
a. AF AC Inc.
b. Grinnell Fire Protection.
2.8 SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig l1200-kPa) minimum pressure
rating.
B. Manufacturers:
1. AFAC Inc.
2. Central Sprinkler Corp.
3. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
4. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
5. Grinnell Fire Protection.
6. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
7. Star Sprinkler Inc.
8. Venus Fire Protection, Ltd.
9. Victaulic Co. of America.
10. Viking Corp.
C. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following:
1. UL 199, for nonresidential applications.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-8
1-
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2. UL 1626, for residential applications.
3. UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.
D. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch (12. 7-mm) orifice for "Ordinary"
temperature classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
E. Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows:
1. Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.
2. Flush ceiling sprinklers, including escutcheon.
3. Pendent sprinklers.
4. Quick-response sprinklers.
5. Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.
6. Sidewall sprinklers.
7. Upright sprinklers.
F. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated, bronze, and painted.
G. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.
H. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
1. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and
pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground
applications, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICA TrONS
A. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Threaded-end, black standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or
malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
B. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Plain-end, black standard-weight steel pipe; locking-lug
fittings; and twist-locked joints.
C. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Threaded-end, black, standard-weight steel pIpe; cast- or
malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-9
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
D. NPS 2 lON 50) and Larger: Grooved-end, black, standard-weight steel pIpe; grooved-end
fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:
1. Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where
required by NFPA 13.
a. Shutoff Duty: Use butterfly or gate valves.
2. Unlisted General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FMG-approved
valves are not required by NFP A 13 .
a. Shutoff Duty: Use butterfly or gate valves.
b. Throttling Duty: Use globe valves.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division IS Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread pipe
smaller than NPS 8 (DN 200) with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by
authorities having jurisdiction and threads are checked by a ring gage and comply with
ASME B 1.20.1.
C. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain-end piping into locking-lug fitting and rotate retainer lug one-
quarter turn.
D. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure. Include use of specific equipment,
pressure-sealing tool, and accessories.
E. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts.
1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Radius-cut-groove ends of piping. Use grooved-end fittings and
grooved-end-pipe couplings. .
2. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings and
rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Dry-Pipe Systems: Use fittings and gaskets listed for dry-pipe service.
3.5 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTION
A. Connect fire-suppression piping to building's interior water distribution plpmg. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for interior piping.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-10
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated
at connection to water distribution piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties"
for backflow preventers.
3.6 PIPING IN STAL LA nON
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating
from approved working plans.
C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions
in pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (ON 50) and smaller. Unions are not
required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints.
E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2
tDN 65) and larger connections.
F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,
sized and located according to NFPA 13.
G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
H. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes
when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
1. Install drain valves on standpipes.
J. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves.
Drain to floor drain or outside building.
K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
L. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFP A 13 for hanger materials.
1. Install standpipe system piping according to NFP A 14.
2. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
M. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake
damage.
N. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each
standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 tON 8) and with soft
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-11
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
3.7
3.8
12-19-2006
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to
permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing.
O.
Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim,
controls, and specialties according to NFP A 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water
supply except from fire department connections. Install permanent identification signs
indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
c.
Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of
check valves in potable-water supply sources.
D.
Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including bypass
check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.
SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
A.
Drawings indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not indicated, use the
following sprinkler types:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers
2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Recessed sprinklers.
3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
4. Sprinkler Finishes:
a. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces
exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax
coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
b. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.
c. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.
d. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
e. Residential Sprinklers: Dull chrome.
3.9 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling
panels and tiles.
B. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Use dry-
type sprinklers with water supply from heated space.
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-12
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
3.10
3.11
3.12
12-19-2006
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department connections, and
accessories.
D.
Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 16.
E.
Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
F.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
G.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and plpmg according to requirements m
NFP A 13 and in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
3. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
4. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 13915
FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13915-13
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Sleeves.
5. Escutcheons.
6. Grout.
7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
8. Concrete bases.
9. Supports and anchorages.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to A WS 01.1, "Structural
Welding CodenSteel."
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed A WS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.3
A.
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
JOINING MATERIALS
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME BI6.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, lI8-inch (3.2-
mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
Brazing Filler Metals: A WS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAgl, unless otherwise indicated.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with A WS D1 0.12.
Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) mInImum
working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
\. 1 035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F
( 1 07 deg C).
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225
deg F (107 deg C).
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
C. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (O.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
2.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated
finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
2.7 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
3.2
12-19-2006
M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for I-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for I-inch (25-mm)
annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
P.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.
Q.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
R.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to A WS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with A WS A5.8.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-5
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to A WS 010.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.3
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (ON 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-6
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (t 00 mm)
larger in both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa ), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete].
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with A WS D 1. 1.
3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
3.8
A.
B.
e.
D.
E.
F.
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
GROUTING
Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
A void air entrapment during placement of grout.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-7
- ----------l
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
3.9 Record Drawings and O&M Manuals
A. Keep record drawings on site and update daily. Record location w/demensions of all
underground or concealed work.
B. Submit record drawings and O&M Manual (3 copies minimum) at the end of the project.
1. Include all special warranty information
2. Include copy of permits.
END OF SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15050-8
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15055 - MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed motors.
B. See Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for mounting motors and
vibration isolation and seismic-control devices.
C. See individual Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements
for motor-driven equipment.
1.2 SUBMlTT ALS
A. Product Data for Field-Installed Motors: For each type and size of motor, provide nameplate
data and ratings; shipping, installed, and operating weights; enclosure type and mounting
arrangements; size, type, and location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground lug
locations; and information on coatings or finishes.
B. Shop Drawings for Field-Installed Motors: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and
details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the
following:
1. Each installed unit's type and details.
2. Nameplate legends.
3. Diagrams of power, signal, and control wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for
each type of motor and for each control scheme.
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
MOTORS
15055-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices and features that comply
with the following:
1. Compatible with the following:
a. Magnetic controllers.
2. Matched to torque and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Matched to ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
A. Motor requirements apply to factory-installed motors except as follows:
1. Different ratings, performance, or characteristics for motor are specified in another
Section.
2. Motorized-equipment manufacturer requires ratings, performance, or characteristics,
other than those specified in this Section, to meet performance specified.
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Three phase.
Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to
which motor is connected.
Service Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of] 05 deg F (40 deg C) and at altitude of 3300
feet (1 005 m) above sea level.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
G. Enclosure: Open dripproof.
2.3 POL YPHASE MOTORS
MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Premium, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
15055-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
C. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Multispeed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.
D. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
1. Enclosure: rolled steel for motors smaller than 7.5 hp.
1. Finish: Gray enamel.
2.4 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: One of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor
application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: For motors 1/20 hp and smaller only.
C. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
D. Bearings: Ball type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on
motor shaft; sealed, prelubricated-sleeve type for other single-phase motors.
E. Source Quality Control for Field-Installed Motors: Perform the following tests on each motor
according to NEMA MG 1:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Measure winding resistance.
Read no-load current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
Measure locked rotor current at rated frequency.
Perform high-potential test.
MOTORS
15055-3
,----
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD-INSTALLED MOTOR INSTALLATION
A. Anchor each motor assembly to base, adjustable rails, or other support, arranged and sized
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and align with load
transfer link.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR FIELD-INSTALLED MOTORS
A. Prepare for acceptance tests.
1. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys, and belts. Tension belts according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
2. Verify bearing lubrication.
3. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment, and speed at
motor design load.
4. Test interlocks and control and safety features for proper operation.
5. Verify that current and voltage for each phase comply with nameplate rating and
NEMA MG 1 tolerances.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Perform electrical tests and visual and mechanical inspections.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION 15055
MOTORS
15055-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Equipment supports.
B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
C. See Division 13 Section "Fire-Suppression Piping" for fire protection piping.
D. See Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for vibration isolation
devices.
E. See Division 15 Section(s) Metal Ducts for duct hangers and supports.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval
from authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Equipment supports.
C. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. ]Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
3. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
4. Grinnell Corp.
5. GS Metals Corp.
6. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and V-bolts.
2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels
and other components.
B. Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3. GS Metals Corp.
4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
5. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
6. Tolco Inc.
7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Description: 100-psig- (690-kPa-) minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in
sheet metal shield.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
3. PHS Industries, Inc.
4. Pipe Shields, Inc.
5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate.
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW RamsetJRed Head.
c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
d. MKT Fastening, LLC.
e. Powers Fasteners.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials where used.
1. Manufacturers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. Empire Industries, Inc.
c. Hilti, Inc.
d. ITW RamsetJRed Head.
e. MKT Fastening, LLC.
f. Powers Fasteners.
2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel
shapes.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: ~OOO-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (ON 15 to DN 750).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (ON 20 to ON 600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4
inches (100 mm) of insulation.
3. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (ON 15 to ON 200).
4. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (ON 15 to
ON 750).
5. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (ON 100
to ON 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
6. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 (ON 50 to
ON 1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur
but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20 (ON 20 to ON 500).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (ON 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy
loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
1. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-5
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 Ib (340 kg).
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 Ib (680 kg).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 Ib (1360 kg).
8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pIpe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
M. Comply with MFMA-I02 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-6
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INST ALLA TION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/ A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to A WS D1.1.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
D. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install
fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
G. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
H. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)
and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is
placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.
K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-7
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match 00 of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME 831.1 for power piping and
ASME 831.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (ON 8 to ON 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch
(1.22 mm) thick.
5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with A WS 01.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-8
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-P A 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05
mm).
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 15060
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15060-9
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15071 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Elastomeric isolation pads and mounts.
2. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
3. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.
4. Elastomeric hangers.
5. Spring hangers.
6. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
7. Thrust limits.
8. Pipe riser resilient supports.
9. Resilient pipe guides.
10. Seismic snubbers.
11. Restraining cables.
B. Definitions:
1. Av: Effective peak velocity related acceleration coefficient.
2. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development for the State of California.
OSHPD assigns a unique anchorage preapproval "R" number to each seismic restraint it
tests. The number describes a specific device applied as tested.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Zone 3.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include load deflection curves for each vibration isolation device indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion
and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring
deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been
examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and
rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment,
and cantilever loads.
MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
15071-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
4. Seismic-Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of seismic restraints and
snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of
penetration of anchors.
5. Details for Interlocking Snubbers: Include load deflection curves up to 1/2-inch (13-l11m)
deflection in X, y, and z planes.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis performed
according to OSHPD and shall bear anchorage preapproval "R" number, from OSHPD or
another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-
restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on
calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing
are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-
restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer. Testing and
calculations must include both shear and tensile loads and 1 test or analysis at 45 deg rees to the
weakest mode.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to A WS 01.1, "Structural Welding
Code--Steel. "
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 VIBRA TION ISOLA TORS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.
2. Mason Industries, Inc.
B. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: OiI- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in
single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized steel baseplates of
sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match
requirements of supported equipment.
1. Material: Standard neoprene.
2. Durometer Rating: 30.
3. Number of Layers: 1
MECHANICAL VIERA nON AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
15071-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
C. Elastomeric Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene
isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with
baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
1. Durometer Rating: 30.
D. Restrained Elastomeric Mounts All-directional elastomeric mountings with seismic restraint.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron housing containing two separate and opposing, molded,
bridge-bearing neoprene elements that prevent central threaded sleeve and attachment
bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation.
E. Spring Isolators Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffuess.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-)
thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor
load to 100 psig (690 kPa).
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw
to fasten and level equipment.
F. Restrained Spring Isolators Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind
loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-)
thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment
mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffuess.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
G. Elastomeric Hangers Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene
isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-
code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
H. Spring Hangers Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in
compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 deg rees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
15071-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
r. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger
with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 deg rees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
J. Thrust Limits Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert In
compression and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to
equipment.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of
30 deg rees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of l/4-inch (6-mm)
movement at start and stop.
K. Pipe Riser Resilient Support All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes
separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick, 60-durometer neoprene. Include steel
and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design
support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig (3.45 MPa) and for equal
resistance in all directions.
L. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-
inch- (13-mm-) thick, 60-durometer neoprene. Factory set guide height with a shear pin to
allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and
reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet
location requirements.
MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
15071-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.
2. Mason Industries, Inc.
3. Unistrut Diversified Products Co.; Wayne Manufacturing Division.
B. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: I-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene
complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 40, plus or minus 5, with a flat
washer face.
C. Seismic Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor
bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.
1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or
female-wedge type.
2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: I-piece, molded, bridge-bearing neoprene
complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 40, plus or minus 5.
D. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable
engagement.
E. Anchor Bolts: Seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor
bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as specified in Division 7 Section
"Roof Accessories ."
B. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on either side of equipment.
C. Install seismic snubbers on isolated equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to
vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.
D. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor
locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of
adjacent equipment or building structure.
E. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps to
hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping
to trapeze. Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods.
F. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.
MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
15071-5
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.3
A. Tests and Inspections:
I. Inspect isolator seismic-restraint clearance.
2. Test isolator deflection.
3. Inspect minimum snubber clearances.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
B.
Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.
C.
Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-111m)
movement during start and stop.
D.
Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.
.E.
Adjust active height of spring isolators.
F.
Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
G.
Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
H.
Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to resist
seismic forces.
END OF SECTION 15071
MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
15071-6
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:
1. Equipment nameplates.
2. Equipment markers.
3. Equipment signs.
4. Access panel and door markers.
5. Pipe markers.
6. Valve tags.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.!, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification
devices for piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on
equipment.
1. Data:
a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.
b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
c. Labels of tested compliances.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.
B. Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent
adhesive.
1. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15075-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2. Data:
a. Name and plan number.
b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,
and speed.
3. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (64 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2
by 6 inches ( 115 by 150 mm) for equipment.
C. Equipment Signs: ASTM 0 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-res in-laminate
engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore,
unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for
mechanical fastening.
1. Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures.
2. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match
equipment identification.
3. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
D. Access Panel and Door Markers: I /16-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, engraved laminated plastic, with
abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide lI8-inch (3.2-mm)
center hole for attachment.
1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service,
and showing direction of flow.
1. Colors: Comply with ASME AI3.1, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pipes with 00, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 fnches (150 mm): Full-band pipe
markers extending 360 deg rees around pipe at each location.
3. Pipes with 00, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Either full-band or
strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
4. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or
as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.
C. Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor
barrier.
D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive
back.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15075-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
E. Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick with pressure-
sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.
1. Width for Markers on Pipes with 00, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150
mm): 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum.
2. Width for Markers on Pipes with 00, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) or Larger:
1-1/2 inches (38 mm) minimum.
2.3 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-rom) numbers, with numbering scheme. Provide 5/32-inch (4-
mm) hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.032-inch- 10.8-mm-) thick brass.
2. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more than
single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's
option.
3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not
easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the
following general categories of equipment:
1. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
2. Packaged HV AC central-station and zone-type units.
B. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical
equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be omitted if
both are indicated.
1. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 111m) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830
mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
2. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate
safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify
units.
3. Locate markers where accessible and visible. Include markers for the following general
categories of equipment:
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15075-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units
such as gas outlets.
b. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
c. Packaged HV AC central-station and zone-type units.
C. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.
1. Identify mechanical equipment with equipment markers in the following color codes:
a. Black: For equipment and components.
2. Letter Size: Minimum t/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch \l3 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches l] 830
mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
3. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate
safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify
units.
4. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units
such as gas outlets.
b. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and
similar equipment.
c. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
d. Packaged HV AC central-station and zone-type units.
e. Tanks and pressure vessels.
D. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.
3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow
indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1. Pipes with 00, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (] 50 mm): Self-adhesive pipe
markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch (] 9 mm) wide,
lapped at least ]-1/2 inches (38 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.
2. Pipes with 00, Including Insulation, 6 Inches ( 150 mm) and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe
markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches (38 tnm) wide,
lapped at least 3 inches (75 111m) at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.
B. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior
nonconcealed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15075-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
plpmg.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (IS m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25
feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.
3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets;
convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HV AC terminal devices and similar
roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 1 W', square., brass tags
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by
other work.
B. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
END OF SECTION 15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICA nON
15075-5
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes mechanical insulation for duct, equipment, and pipe, including the
following:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Flexible elastomeric.
b. Mineral fiber.
2. Fire-rated insulation systems.
3. Insulating cements.
4. Adhesives.
5. Mastics.
6. Sealants.
7. Factory-applied jackets.
8. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
9. Field-applied jackets.
10. Tapes.
11. Securements.
12. Comer angles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control inspection reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 INSULA TION MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Products:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul- Tube 180.
G. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type II with factory-applied vinyl
jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets"
Article.
1. Products:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Coming; All-Service Duct Wrap.
MECHANICAL INSULA DON
15080-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
H. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Products:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied
ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
2.3 INSULATING CEMENTS
A.
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement:
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
Comply with
1. Products:
a. InsuJco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.
c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
2.4 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division ofITW; CP-82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division ofITW; CP-82.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
MECHANICAL INSULA nON
15080-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
I. Products:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.
b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
c. P.I.e. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear.
e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.
2.5 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates: Comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division ofITW; CP-35.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.
d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.
f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at
43-mil (J .09-mm) dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C).
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644,59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
5. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division ofITW; CP-76-8.
b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.
c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C).
5. Color: Aluminum.
B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C).
5. Color: White.
2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
2. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm).
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch ll.O N/mm) in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch (7.2 N/mrn) in width.
6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
2. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mOl).
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
MECHANICAL INSULA nON
15080-5
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
5. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width.
6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
2.10 SECUREMENTS
A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005;
Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 lnm) thick, [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] wide with
wing seal.
B. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
1. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2
inches (50 mm) square.
2. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel fully annealed, 0.1 06-inch- (2.6-mm-)
diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
3. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging
insulation, hangers, and substrates.
C. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (O.4I-mm-)
thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.
1. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
D. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from O.016-inch- (0.4 J-
mm-) thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place
but not less than 1-1/2 inches 08 mm) in diameter.
E. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel
or Monel.
F. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel.
2.11 CORNER ANGLES
A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick, minimum I by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), PVC
according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-6
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.2 COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including
fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation with tightly butted joints free of voids and gaps. Vapor barriers shall be
continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier system.
C. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system
schedules.
D. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
F. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
G. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
K. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in
insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-7
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
3.3
12-19-2006
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
L. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
M. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both
edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
N.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
O.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
P.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal
patches similar to butt joints.
PENETRA nONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush
with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
c.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper
sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 11ll11).
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-8
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
]. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems."
3.4 DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pms.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-
discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation
end joints, and 16 inches (400 rom) o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins 16
inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation
joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross
bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching
staples, I inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied
jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-
barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F ( 10 deg C)
at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic
applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and
over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to
2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 111m).
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end
joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches (50 rom)
o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-9
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
3.5
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch- t 150-m 111-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on
alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
PIPE INSULATION INST ALLA nON
A.
Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Secure single-layer insulation with bands at 12-inch t300-mm) intervals and tighten bands
without deforming insulation materials.
C.
Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches (75 mm).
Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
Secure outer layer with bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
D.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of insulating cement and coat with a mastic.
Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient
services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and
well-shaped contour.
F.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and
polyolefin, install fitted PYC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions.
Terminate ends with PYC end caps. Tape PYC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PYC
tape.
G.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size
and color of pipe labels.
H.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands
without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections
in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches t 150 mm) o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal
tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic.
5. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
1. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-10
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of same insulation material and
thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least
I inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.
5. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
J. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
2. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
K. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
4. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
5. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
L. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing
sealant.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15080-11
1_____ -
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
M. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over
adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover
and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating
cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a
smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLA nON
A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with I-I/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-)
wide joint strips at end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-retarder mastic.
3.7 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and
supports to maintain a continuous UL-listed fire rating.
B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.
C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are
specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
3.8 FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket
as specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
MECHANICAL INSULA nON
15080-12
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1. Apply two > finish coats of interior, flat, latex-emulsion size over a primer that is
compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render
fabric mildew proof.
B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and
insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be
limited to onelocation(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule,
General" Article.
2. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent
of inspection shall be limited to three locations. for each pipe service defined in the
"Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work.
C. Install new insulation and jackets to replace insulation and jackets removed for inspection.
Repeat inspection procedures after new materials are installed.
END OF SECTION 15080
MECHANICAL INSULA nON
15080-13
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system heat pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and
compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and
may be connected to ducts.
1.2 SUB.MITT ALS
A. Product Data: For each unit indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet
velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical
characteristics.
B. Operation and maintenance data.
C. Refrigerant piping and unit layout shop drawing.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: As scheduled or Per WSEC which ever is greater.
C. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials and workmanship within five
years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corp.
2. Trane Co. (The); Unitary Products Group.
2.2 EVAPORATOR-FAN UNIT
2.3
A. Concealed Unit Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing,
and insulation on back of panel.
1. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
2. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
B. Floor-Mounting, Unit Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends.
1. Discharge Grille: Steel with surface-mounted frame.
2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber, duct liner.
3. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
C.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
D.
Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, electric-resistance heating elements with refractory
ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-
reset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent
protection.
E.
Evaporator Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to
motor.
F.
Fan Motor: Multispeed.
G.
Filters: I inch (25 111m) thick, in fiberboard frames.
AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER UNIT
A.
Casing steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep
holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and
gage ports on exterior of casing.
B.
Compressor: Hermetically sealed reciprocating type with crankcase heater and mounted on
vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have therma1- and current-sensitive overload
devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
1. Refrigerant Charge: Puron.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D. Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.
E. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
F.
G.
H.
2.4
A.
B.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F (7 deg C).
Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
ACCESSORIES
Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INST ALLA TION
A.
Carfully review the notes on the drawing regarding installation, including brazing requirements.
B.
Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
c.
Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- (I OO-mm-) thick,
reinforced concrete base; 4 inches (100 mm) larger on each side than unit. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.
D.
Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static
deflection of I inch (25 mm). Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic
Controls ."
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to
allow access to unit.
B.
Connect supply and return water coil with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange on the supply
connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return connection.
C.
Connect supply and return condenser connections with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange
on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return
connection.
D.
Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components,
and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
END OF SECTION 15738
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution
systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 2500 Pa).
Metal ducts include the following:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Duct liner.
a. Soundline the 30' of supply and return duct work closest to each AHU unit.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
B. NUSIG: National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and -
distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of
duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for
layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original
design results without increasing system total pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Drawn to 1/4 inch equals I foot (1 :50) scale. Show fabrication and installation
details for metal ducts.
1. Provide shop drawings for mechanical room, AHU-l and AHU-2 connections, and Built-
up mixing box.
METAL DUCTS
15815-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,
and attachments to other work.
3. Fittings.
4. Reinforcement and spacing.
5. Seam and joint construction.
6. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels.
7. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration
isolation, and seismic restraints.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to
dampers and other operating devices.
4. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUF ACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
METAL DUCTS
15815-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G60 (ZI80) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces
exposed to view.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches 1900
mm) or less; 3/8-inch (I O-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
2.3 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAlMA AH124.
1. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group.
b. Johns Manville International, Inc.
c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
d. Owens Coming.
2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent
erosion of glass fibers.
a. Thickness: [1 inch (25 mm.
b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F (0.037 at 24 deg C) mean
temperature.
c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-
developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A orNFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.
e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner
when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in
duct.
1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- (23-kg-) tensile, dead-load
test perpendicular to duct wall.
2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without
projecting more than 118 inch (3 mm) into airstream.
3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard
classification of duct liner system.
2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
METAL DUCTS
15815-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.5
A.
12-19-2006
B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches (50 mm) wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.
C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable,
airtight seal.
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when
cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFP A requirements for Class 1 ducts.
Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized
butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of75 percent solids.
Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches (J 00 mm) thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted
with zinc-chromate primer.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/ A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are
electrolytically separated from ducts.
METAL DUCTS
15815-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT F ABRICA nON
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity
class required for pressure class.
2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's
"HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using
manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint
reinforcement.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using comer, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches (750 mm) wide and up to 2-inch wg (500-Pa) pressure
class.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
D.
Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches (480 mm)
and larger and 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) of
nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined.
2.7
APPLICA nON OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A.
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct
liner is prohibited.
B.
Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.
c.
Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D.
Fold and compress liner in comers of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
E.
Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at comers of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
METAL DUCTS
15815-5
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm ( 12.7 mis).
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from comers and at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm) from transverse joints and at
intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either
channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the
following locations:
1. Fan discharges.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500
fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.
1. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for
outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer
shell without compressing insulation.
1. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3i32-inch (2A-mm) diameter, with an overall open
area of 23 percent.
J. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane
assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means
are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with boits, screws, rivets, or welds.
2.8 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION
A. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a
circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
B. Round, Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to
SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
C. Duct Joints:
1. Ducts up to 20 Inches (500 mm) in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling,
sealed before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.
2. Ducts 21 to 72 Inches (535 to 1830 mm) in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged
joint consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with
gasket.
3. Ducts Larger Than 72 Inches (1830 nun) in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints
per SMACNA "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2.
4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM
rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer's
tolerances.
a. Manufacturers:
1)
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
METAL DUCTS
15815-6
Hunt Engineering 12-19-2006
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
D. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HV AC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for
longitudinal-seam straight ducts.
E. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess
material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.
F. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die-
formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow
construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with
SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg (minus 500 to plus 500 Pa):
a. Ducts 3 to 36 Inches (75 to 915 mm) in Diameter: 0.034 inch (0.85 mm).
b. Ducts 37 to 50 Inches (940 to 1270 mm) in Diameter: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
c. Ducts 52 to 60 Inches (1320 to 1525 mm) in Diameter: 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
d. Ducts 62 to 84 Inches (J 575 to 2130 mm) in Diameter: 0.064 inch (1.6 mm).
3. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material-
handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit
using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.
4. Round Elbows 8 Inches (200 mm) and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed elbows
for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only.
Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with
gored construction.
5. Round Elbows 9 through 14 Inches (225 through 355 mm) in Diameter: Fabricate gored
or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered
elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or nonstandard diameter
elbows with gored construction.
6. Round Elbows Larger Than 14 Inches (355 mm) in Diameter and All Flat-Oval Elbows:
Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.
7. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches (200 mm) in Diameter and All Pressures
0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick with 2-piece welded construction.
8. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
9. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal-seam flat-oval duct specified
above.
10. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches (355 mm) in Diameter and Pressures through
lO-Inch wg (2500 Pa): 0.022 inch (0.55 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS
A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:
1. Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg (500 Pa.
METAL DUCTS
15815-7
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): I-inch wg (250 Pa.
3. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): [I-inch wg (250 Pa.
3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
C. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure
couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches (300 mm), with a
minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.
E. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
G. Install ducts with a clearance of I inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
H. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions
unless specifically indicated.
I. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts,
and similar finished work.
J. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward
to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
L. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts
or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings
on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 rnm).
M. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke
dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and
installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop
Systems. "
N. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equipment,
seismic force required by applicable building codes. Refer to SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint
Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems
METAL DUCTS
15815-8
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
3.3
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
12-19-2006
O.
Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow
SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction."
P.
Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches (600 mm) upstream of
registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible
galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division
9 painting Sections.
SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A.
Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.
1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg (500 Pa), seal transverse joints.
B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
HANGING AND SUPPORTING
Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches (600 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200
mm) of each branch intersection.
Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m) and at each floor.
Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure (proof-test) load.
Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section
"Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
END OF SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTS
15815-9
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Combination fIre and smoke dampers.
4. Turning vanes.
5. Duct-mounting access doors.
6. Flexible connectors.
7. Flexible ducts.
8. Duct accessory hardware.
B. See Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for duct-mounting fIre and smoke detectors.
C. See Division 15 Section "HV AC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric and pneumatic
damper actuators.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Volume dampers.
3. Combination fIre and smoke dampers.
4. Turning vanes.
5. Duct-mounting access doors.
6. Flexible connectors.
7. Flexible ducts.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of fIeld assembly, components, and location and size of each fIeld
connection.
1. Special fIttings.
2. Manual-volume damper installations.
3. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fIre- and smoke-damper installations,
including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G60 (Z 180) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces
exposed to view.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480lA 480M.
D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper HI4; with mill finish
for concealed ducts and standard, I-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), alloy 6063, temper T6.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch 16-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900
mm) or less; 3/8-inch (IO-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Greenheck.
2. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
3. Prefco Products, Inc.
4. Ruskin Company.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
5. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with blades of maximum 6-inch
(ISO-mm) width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel
ba1\ bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static
pressure.
C. Frame: 0.052-inch-I.3-mm- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded comers and mounting
flange.
D. Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.
E. Blade Seals: Felt.
F. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
H. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
2.4 VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
2. MET ALAIRE, Inc.
3. Nailor Industries Inc.
4. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
5. Ruskin Company.
6. Vent Products Company, Inc.
B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class.
C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, para1\el- or opposed-blade design as
indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or
vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch (1.62
mm) thick, with mitered and welded comers; frames with flanges where indicated for
attaching to walls and flange1ess frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze.
5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
D. Jackshaft: l-inch- (25-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing
assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
E. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/3:2-inch- (:2.4-
mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut. Include center hole
to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
F. Retain one of three options below for temperature-rated links to suit application requirements.
Second option is standard.
2.5 COMBINA TION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
2. CESCO Products.
3. Greenheck.
4. Nailor Industries Inc.
5. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
6. Ruskin Company.
B. General Description: Labeled according to UL 5558. Combination fire and smoke dampers
shall be labeled according to UL 555 for 1-1I2-hour rating.
C. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 dcg F (74 dcg Crated.
D. Frame and Blades: O.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel.
E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel; length
to suit wall or floor application.
F. Damper Motors: Modulating and two-position action.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
2. Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains.
3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.
Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or
adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway
torque rating of 150 in. x Ibf (17 N x m).
4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed
to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal
operation at minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C).
5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m), size motor for
running torque rating of 150 in. x Ibf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x
lbf \34 N x m).
6. Electrical Connection: lIS V, single phase, 60 Hz.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2.6 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HV AC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.
8. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, [single] [double ]-vane,
curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch (19 mm) o.c.; support with bars
perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct
mounting.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Duro Dyne Corp.
c. MET ALAIRE, Inc.
d. Ward Industries, Inc.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces
and fibrous-glass fill.
2.7 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS
A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
8. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where
indicated. Include I-by-I-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
1. Manufacturers:
a. American Warming and Ventilating.
b. CESCO Products.
c. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
e. Greenheck.
f. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
g. Nailor Industries Inc.
h. Ventfabrics, Inc.
i. Ward Industries, Inc.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:
a. Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: Secure with two sash locks.
b. Up to 18 Inches {450 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and J -inch {25-mm) thickness. Include cam latches.
1. Manufacturers:
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-5
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin-in notched frame.
D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
E. Insulation: l-inch- (25-mm-) thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Corp.
3. Ventfabrics, Inc.
4. Ward Industries, Inc.
B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181, Class 1.
C. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).
2. Tensile Strength: 480 Ibf/inch (84 N/mOl) in the warp and 360 Ibf/inch (63 N/mm) in the
filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. Hart & Cooley, Inc.
3. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
B. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 1 a-inch wg t2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 mfs).
3. Temperature Range: Minus) 0 to plus 160 deg F OVlinus 23 to plus 7 J deg C).
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band
with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 through) 8 inches (75 to 450 mOl) to suit duct size.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-6
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to
suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HV AC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAlMA AH 116, "Fibrous
Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories
in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts,
and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.
D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths
from branch takeoff.
F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved
written instructions.
H. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and
terminal units as follows:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Downstream from volume dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links.
4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum
50-foot (15-rn) spacing.
5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.
I. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm).
2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mrn).
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-7
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm).
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm).
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 111m).
6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches l635 by 430 111m).
1. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
K. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
L. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and higher, cover flexible
connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
M. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of
flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
N. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch
(1500-mm) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
O. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
P. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing."
END OF SECTION 15820
DUCT ACCESSORIES
15820-8
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment for HV AC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" for fire and smoke detectors mounted in HV AC
systems and equipment.
2. Division 15 Section "Sequence of Operation" for requirements that relate to this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.
B. PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.
B. Control system includes the following:
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate
dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for
materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.
1. Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control
devices.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wmng. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
3. Written description of sequence of operation.
4. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.
5. Schedule of valves including leakage and flow characteristics.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Include the following:
1. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and
devices.
2. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration
tolerances.
3. Calibration records and list of set points.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control
units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual installation and
operating sequences.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is a certified installer of the automatic
control system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this
Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing automatic temperature-
control systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-
service performance.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems."
E. Year-2000 Compliant: Computer hardware and software shall be capable of accurately
processing, providing, and receiving date data from, into, and between the twentieth and
twenty-first centuries, including leap-year calculations.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to
be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to unit manufacturer.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
15900-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of thennostats, , and other exposed control sensors with plans and room
details before installation.
B. Coordinate equipment with Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm" to achieve compatibility with
equipment that interfaces with that system.
C. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units and operator workstation.
D. Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility with
starter coils and annunciation devices.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and fonnwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
B. Maintenance Materials: One thennostat adjusting key.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Electric, Electronic, and DDC Systems:
a. CSI Control Systems International, Inc.
b. Honeywell, Inc.; Home & Building Control.
c. Alerton.
d. KMC Controls/Kreuter Manufacturing Company.
e. Landis & Staefa, Inc.
f. Siebe Environmental Controls; Barber-Coleman/Robertshaw Products.
g. Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group.
2.2 SENSORS
A. Electronic Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as
required.
B. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indication: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to
10- V dc, feedback signal.
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
15900-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2.3 THERMOSTATS
A. Electric solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor.
1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling.
2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point.
3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day.
4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days.
5. Short-cycle protection.
6. Programming based on every day of week.
7. Selection features include deg For deg C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard disable,
remote sensor, fan on-auto.
8. Battery replacement without program loss.
9. Thermostat display features include the following:
a. Time of day.
b. Actual room temperature.
c. Programmed temperature.
d. Programmed time.
e. Duration of timed override.
f. Day of week.
g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."
10. 100% fully modulating economizer operator and related damper control.
B. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch
type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater.
C. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
1. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed.
2. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.
3. Thermometer: Exposed.
4. Orientation: Vertical.
D. Room thermostat accessories include the following:
1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls.
2. Thermostat Guards: Locking; heavy-duty, transparent plastic; mounted on separate base.
3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.
4. Set-Point Adjustment: l/2-inch- diameter, adjustment knob.
5. Override of time clock push button that provides approximately 2 hours of "occupied"
mode operation.
2.4 ACTUATORS
A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating
action or two-position action.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed
and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
15900-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary
switches, or feedback potentiometer.
B. Electronic Damper Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke
cycles at rated torque.
1. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper.
b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper.
c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-pounds/sq. ft of damper.
d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper.
e. Dampers with 2 to 3 Inches wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to
2500 FPM: Multiply the minimum full-stroke cycles above by 1.5.
2. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
3. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
4. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual
gear release on non-spring-return actuators.
5. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10- V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10- V dc position feedback
signal.
6. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.
7. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.
2.5 DAMPERS
A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel-blade design; 0.1084-inch minimum, galvanized-steel frames
with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.0635-inch galvanized steel
with maximum blade width of 8 inches.
I. Blades shall be secured to l/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated
hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and
brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at
each end of every blade.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
3. For standard applications, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging.
4. For low-leakage applications, use parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable seal
blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft.
of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 inches wg when damper is being held by
torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.
2.6 CONTROL CABLE
A. Electronic and Fiber-Optic Cable for Control Wiring: As specified in Division 16 Section
"Control/Signal Transmission Media."
HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
15900-5
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. VerifY that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation.
B. VerifY that duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices and wiring and pneumatic piping are
installed before proceeding with installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3
A. Install equipment level and plumb.
B. VerifY location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and
room details before installation. Locate all 60 inches above the floor.
1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
C.
Install automatic dampers according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."
D.
Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor
temperatures.
E.
Install labels and nameplates to identifY control components according to Division 15 Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
F.
Install labels and nameplates to identifY control components according to Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Identification."
G.
Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 15
Section "Refrigerant Piping."
H.
Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 15 Sections specifYing air ducts.
I.
Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal
Transmission Media."
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A.
Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."
B.
Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
C.
Install signal and communication cable according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal
Transmission Media."
1. Install exposed cable in raceway.
2. Install concealed cable in raceway.
3. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where
several cables follow a common path.
HV AC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
15900-6
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
4. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against
abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
5. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control
system, except local individual room control cables.
D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions.
Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.
E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is
in hand position.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections. Report results in writing.
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment, and retest.
3. Calibration test electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating
operation with compatible signal generator.
B.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
C.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
1. Start, test, and adjust control systems.
2. Demonstrate compliance with requirements, including calibration and testing, and control
sequences.
3. Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of operation
specified.
3.6 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE
A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to
three Project site visits, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components and to
assist Owner's personnel in making program changes and in adjusting sensors and controls to
suit actual conditions.
HV AC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
15900-7
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
END OF SECTION 15900
HV AC INSTRUMENT A nON AND CONTROLS
15900-8
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15940 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control sequences for HV AC systems, subsystems, and equipment.
B. See Division 15 Section "HV AC Instrumentation and Controls" for control equipment and
devices and for submittal requirements.
1.2 AIR-HANDLING-UNIT CONTROL SEQUENCES
A. Start and Stop Supply Fan(s):
I. Enable: High-Temperature Protection:
a. Input Device: Duct-mounted thermostat, located in supply air.
b. Output Device: Hard wired through motor starter;.
c. Action: Allow start if duct temperature is below 130 deg F ( 150 deg C).
2. Initiate: Occupied Time Schedule:
a. Input Device: time clock function of electronic t-stat..
b. Output Device: Binary output to motor starter.
c. Action: Energize fanes).
d. Outside air damper stays closed unit set point temperature is reached.
3. Initiate: Unoccupied Time Schedule:
a. Input Device: Room electronic thermostat
b. Output Device: Binary output to motor starter.
c. Action: Energize fanes).
d. Outside air dampers stay close and building warm up cycle is initiated until set
back temperature is reached, then unit shuts back down.
4. Display: Supply-fan on-off indication.
B. Mixed-Air Control:
1. Minimum Position:
a. Input Device: T-Stat time schedule.
b. Output Device: Receiver controller analog output to modulating damper
actuator( s).
c. Action: Open outdoor-air dampers to minimum position.
2. Heating Reset:
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
15940-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
a. Input Device: Room thermostat.
b. Output Device: Receiver controller to modulating damper actuator(s).
c. Action: Set outdoor-air dampers to minimum position.
3. Mixed-Air Temperature:
a. Input Device: Duct-mounted temperature sensor.
b. Output Device: Receiver controller to modulating damper actuator(s).
c. Action: Modulate outdoor-, return-, and relief-air dampers to maintain aIr
temperature set point of 55 deg F (13 deg C).
d. Provide temperature reset to adjust set point in heating or cooling mode to
maximize economizer savings.
4. Cooling Reset:
a. Input Device: Outdoor- and return-air, duct-mounted electronic temperature
sensors.
b. Output Device: Receiver controller to damper actuator(s).
c. Action: Set outdoor-air dampers to minimum position when outdoor-air
temperature exceeds return-air temperature.
5. Unoccupied Time Schedule:
a. Input Device: Time clock.
b. Output Device: Receiver controller or to modulating damper actuator(s).
c. Action: Position outdoor- and relief-air dampers closed and return-air dampers
open.
6. Display:
a. Mixed-air-temperature indication.
b. Mixed-air-temperature set point.
c. Mixed-air damper position.
C. Filters: provide analog gauges only
1. Differential Pressure:
a. Input Device: Differential-pressure switches.
b. Output Device: [
c. Action: Signal alarm on low- and high-pressure conditions.
D. Coordination of Air-Handling Unit Sequences: Ensure that preheat, mixed-air, heating-coil, and
cooling-coil controls have common inputs and do not overlap in function.
1.3 VENTI LA nON SEQUENCES
A. Exhaust Fan: Room thermostat, for the AHU that is supplying air to specific exhaust fan shall
provide signal to the exhaust fan to run during the occupied times.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
15940-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1.4 Unit and Cabinet heaters
A. Provide local, line voltage thermostats.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 15940
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
15940-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1. Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
2. HV AC equipment quantitative-performance settings.
3. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
4. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2
copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation"
Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.
B. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm.
C. Warranties specified in this Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified byNEBB.
B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HV AC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HV AC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities.
B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards
for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating
that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails
to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:
B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the
Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:
1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required
by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing
devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HV AC systems and equipment.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record
Documents."
D. Examine design data, including HV AC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HV AC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data
to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or
unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system
effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HV AC equipment when installed under
conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the
factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201,
"Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design,"
Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine HV AC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
1. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J. Examine HV AC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,
belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
K. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe
penetrations and other holes are sealed.
L. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
M. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes,
and variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
5. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
6. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
7. Controller set points are set at indicated values.
8. Interlocked systems are operating.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
9. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.
N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2 PREPARA TION
3.3
3.4
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems and this Section.
B.
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.
Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
C.
Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-
control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
D.
Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.
K.
3.5
A.
12-19-2006
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
Check for airflow blockages.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
I. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical
connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the ma.'<:imum required
brake horsepower.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-5
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper
operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers,
and nameplate data.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic
temperature-control system.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-6
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive
eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature
settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.8 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
G.
H.
I.
1.
K.
3.9
A.
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and
correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input
changes.
Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates
on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
TOLERANCES
Set HV AC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3.10 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in
three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-7
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other infonnation relative to equipment perfonnance, but do not include Shop Drawings
and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to fonn titles and entries, include the following data in the
final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of TAB finn.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB finn who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final perfonnance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for tenninal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated
values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump perfonnance fonns including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, retum-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect perfonnance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-8
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
3.11 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak
summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15950-9
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-
tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components.
2. Electrical identification.
3. Concrete equipment bases.
4. Electrical demolition.
5. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
6. Touchup painting.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for in-
tended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINA nON
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and ar-
range in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations
that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural
components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in
the building.
C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by fin-
ished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors."
D. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installa-
tion of identification devices with completion of finished surface.
E. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings
and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- (14-1010-) di-
ameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs.
D. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Comply with Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for slot-
ted channel framing.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
E. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-
clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-
type hangers.
F. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
G. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have
number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body con-
structed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
H. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
1. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
J. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.
2.2 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
2.3 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INST ALLA TION
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, ar-
range and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other build-
ing systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system
components.
Dry Locations: Steel materials.
Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at
least four; minimum of200-lb (90-kg) design load.
3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide
V-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for se-
curing hanger rods and conduits.
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.
D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent
minimum in the future.
E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.
F. Install ]/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indi-
cated.
G. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be
used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-l/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving
lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to
slotted channel and angle supports.
H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried
entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
J. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Sup-
port sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are
used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an ap-
proved fastener not more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the box.
K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panel boards, disconnect switches, control en-
closures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are
mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
L.. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled
holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated
gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erec-
tion of concrete and masonry walls.
M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise in-
dicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indi-
cated:
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.
2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry
units.
3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with
lock washers may be used in existing concrete.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
a. Field Welding: Comply with A WS Dl.l.
7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe
straps, or other items.
8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its
proof-test load.
3.4 FIRES TOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to
achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation require-
ments are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger, in
both directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage
recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise indi-
cated. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.6 DEMOLITION
A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or dis-
turbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal
capacity, quality, and functionality.
B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be de-
molished, in their entirety.
C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in
place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch
surface to match existing finish.
D. Remove demolished material from Project site.
E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relo-
cation.
3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to
permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-5
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed
surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and
refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
I. Raceways.
2. Building wire and connectors.
3. Supporting devices for electrical components.
4. Electrical identification.
5. Concrete bases.
6. Electrical demolition.
7. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
8. Touchup painting.
3.9 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Divi-
sion 9 Section "Painting."
1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to
suit the degree of damage at each location.
2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing
and application of successive coats.
3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufac-
turer.
3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes,
and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.11 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record drawings shall be keep on site and updated daily.
B. Record drawings and 3 sets of O&M manuals shall be submitted at the completion of the pro-
ject
1. Include all special warranties and copies of permits.
END OF SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050-6
1----
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.
2. Warning labels and signs.
3. Equipment identification labels.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A'13.1.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation
and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145.
Use consistent designations throughout Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUN1CA TION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION
MATERIALS
A. Marker Tape: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
2.2 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise
indicated.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16075-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners,
with colors, legend, and size required for application. l/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in comers
for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 111m).
D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 [NCHES
(915 mm)."
2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor and Cable Identification: Use marker tape to identify
field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data wiring
connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
cable pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by
manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
B. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply
with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply baked-enamel warning signs. Identify system voltage with
white letters on an black background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
1. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise
indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar
equipment in finished spaces.
C. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-111111-)
high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are required,
use labels 2 inches (50 111m) high.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16075-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, drilled for
screw attachment.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and legend to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panel boards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
b. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
c. Transformers.
d. Disconnect switches.
e. Enclosed circuit breakers.
f. Push-button stations.
g. Contactors.
INSTALLATION
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to
the location and substrate.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed
below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.
1. Color shall be factory applied.
2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
END OF SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16075-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and
terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. A vail able Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
2. General Cable Corporation.
3. Senator Wire & Cable Company.
4. Southwire Company.
B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable
construction, and ratings.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16120-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
C. Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5 solid conductor for No.1 0 A WG
and smaller, stranded for No.8 A WG and larger.
D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN- THWN, complying with NEMA WC 5.
E. Multiconductor Cable: shall not be used on this project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
B.
CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS
Service Entrance, feeders and branch circuits: Type THHN- THWN, single conductors 10
raceway.
Fire Alarm Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
INSTALLATION
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
F. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems."
G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification. "
H. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 111m) of slack.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform megger test electrical test and visual.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16120-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16120-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B. See Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping materials and
installation at penetrations through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated elements.
C. See Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, anchors, and
identification products.
D. See Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box
service fittings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wlreways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, fittings,
boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Alflex Inc.
3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
4. Electri-Flex Co.
5. Grinnell co.rryco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div.
6. L TV Steel Tubular Products Company.
7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
8. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
9. Wheatland Tube Co.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.
D. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.
1. Fittings: Set-screw type.
E. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
G. Fittings: NEMA FB I; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.
2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Manufacturers:
1. American International.
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
3. Arnco Corp.
4. Cantex Inc.
5. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
6. Condux International.
7. ElecSYS, Inc.
8. Electri-Flex Co.
9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
11. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
12. Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
13. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
14. Carlton
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC.
C. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
12-19-2006
16130-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
D. LFNC: UL 1660.
2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company.
3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
4. Hoffman.
5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division.
10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
E. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.
F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
G. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.
I. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and
removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in
front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include
metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet
where required for freestanding equipment.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard prime-
coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard gray
paint applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
E.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
A. Outdoors:
1. Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC.
2. Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC.
3. Underground, Single Run: RNC.
4. Underground, Grouped: RNC.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors:
1. Exposed: EMT.
2. Concealed: EMT.
3. Embedded in masonary walls RNC schedule 40.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows:
a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size tDN 21).
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise
indicated.
Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete.
INST ALLA TION
Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 111m) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-
water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
MethodsElectrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."
Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved
portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in same plane and keep
straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Install concealed raceways with a minImum of bends in shortest practical distance,
considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Raceways shall not be Embedded in Slabs.
I. Raceways routed under slabs shall have 2" clear from top of conduit to bottom of slab.
J. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and
follow surface contours as much as possible.
1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports.
2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows
can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.
K. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.
1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
L. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.
M. Terminations:
1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter
squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside
and one outside box.
2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly
into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used,
align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are
exposed.
N. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb t90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end
of pull wire.
O. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-lnch Trade Size (DN 53) and Smaller: In addition
to above requirements, install raceways in m1Lximum lengths of 150 feet (45 m) and with a
maximum of two 90-deg ree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes
where necessary to comply with these requirements.
P. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding
equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with
finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used
6 inches (150 111m) above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with
floor for future equipment connections.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130-5
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
R.
S.
T.
U.
3.3
A.
12-19-2006
Q. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 48 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed
and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground
conductor across flexible connections.
Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box
supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.
Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
Set floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each comer.
PROTECTION
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16130-6
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters.
2. Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches.
3. Device wall plates.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
wall plates.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Wiring Devices:
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
b. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
c. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
WIRING DEVICES
16140-1
Hunt Engineering 12-19-2006
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-
596G, and UL 498. Nylon face and Federal Spec Listed.
B. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, non-feed-through type, Heavy-Duty grade, with integral
NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL 943.
Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-l11m-) deep outlet box without an adapter.
2.3 SWITCHES
A. Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20. Federal Spec
listed.
B. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on/off switches and
audible frequency and EMIIRFI filters.
1. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching to suit
connections.
2. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjustable
slider; single pole with soft tap or other quiet switch; EMIIRFI filter to eliminate
interference; and 5-inch ((30-mm) wire connecting leads.
2.4 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- (I-mm-) thick, satin-finished stainless steel.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material for Wet Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in "wet locations."
2.5 FINISHES
A. Color:
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless
otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.
WIRING DEVICES
16140-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
8. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multigang wall plates.
C. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.
D. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and
furnishings.
3.2 IDENTIFICA TION
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot,
stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and
durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements.
2. Test GFCI operation with local fault simulations according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
16140-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
A.
A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit
breakers:
1. Fusible switches.
2. Nonfusible switches.
3. Enclosures.
SUB MITT ALS
Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, , accessory, and component indicated.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
Field quality-control test reports.
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUF ACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16410-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
3. Square D/Group Schneider.
B. Fusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to
accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
C. Nonfusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with
capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
D. Fuses
1. Provide Bussman Fuses.
2. Provide RK-5 Dual Element.
2.3 ENCLOSURES
A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
INST ALLA nON
Comply with applicable portions ofNECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation
of enclosed switches and circuit breakers.
Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height,
unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Seismic
Controls for Electrical Work Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Division 16 Section Electrical Identification."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance testing as follows:
1. Inspect mechanical and electrical connections.
2. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification.
3 . Verify rating of installed fuses.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16410-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
END OF SECTION 16410
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16410-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit
panel boards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, accessory, and
component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features,
performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Field quality-control test reports.
4. Operation and maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
C. Comply with NFP A 70.
PANELBOARDS
16442-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Panel boards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories:
a. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div.
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
c. Square D.
2.2 MANUF ACTURED UNITS
A. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
1. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within
hinged trim cover.
B. Phase and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity
C. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material.
1. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
D. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with main
service disconnect switches.
E. Panelboard Short-Circuit Rating:
1. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Omit for fused-switch
panelboards.
B. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker.
C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without
disturbing adjacent units.
PANELBOARDS
16442-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
B. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; all metal construction of
latch, keyed alike.
2.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip
ratings, and number of poles.
a. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
b. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and
refrigerating equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Seismic
Controls for Electrical WorkElectrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."
C. Mount top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panel boards with fronts
uniformly flush with wall finish.
E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers.
1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G. Stub four ] -inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or
space designated to be ceiling space in the future
H. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
I. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic
nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
PANELBOARDS
16442-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
J. Ground equipment according to Division 16
K. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
END OF SECTION 16442
P ANELBOARDS
16442-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
2. Emergency lighting units.
3. Exit signs.
4. Lighting fixture supports.
5. Building mounted exterior lighting fixtures
B. See details on drawings for control systems employing low-voltage control.
C. See details on drawing for control system for exterior lighting control.
D. See Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent
lamps.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions,
weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures,
signed by product manufacturer.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
A. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that
introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified. Prior to bid a request for prior approval of an equal fixture may
be submitted, if approved it will be listed in the addendum.
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5A.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER IS specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5B.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.
H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
I. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
I. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a. Lens Thickness: At least [0.125 inch (3.175 mm)] minimum unless different
thickness is indicated.
b. UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-2
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2.3 BALLASTS
A. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11; rapid-start type,
unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall
be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-Ievel control is indicated.
I. Sound Rating: A.
2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.
3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
6. BF: 0.85 or higher.
7. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.
B. Intemal- Type Emergency Fluorescent Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter
unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with balIast. Comply with
UL 924.
I. Emergency Connection: Operate I fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100
lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to
fixture balIast.
2. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or
entering ceiling space.
a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power
and demonstrates unit operability.
b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer
relay.
C. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type, with solid-state igniter/starter. Igniter-
starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case
temperature of 90 deg C.
1. Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory
installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, balIasts, and mogul sockets up to
150 W.
a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130- V ac.
b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS.
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 dcg F (Minus 40 dcg C).
3. Open-circuit operation shall not reduce average lamp life.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-3
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12- 1 9-2006
2.4 EXIT SIGNS
A. Internally Lighted Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and
lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
I. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
2.5 LAMPS
A. Low-Mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching
procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to
NEMALL I.
B. T8 Rapid-Start Fluorescent Lamps: GE or Sylvania 32w SPX 50..
C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature
3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).
2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).
3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).
4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).
5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).
6. 55 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).
D. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900 K,
and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.
2.6 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints" for channel- and
angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: II2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling
canopy. Finish same as fixture.
C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-l11m) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount
a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D. Wires: ASTM A 64I1A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm)
E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-0101) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-4
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
P ART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each
fixture.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports.
C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.
E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate
compliance with standards.
END OF SECTION 16511
INTERIOR LIGHTING
16511-5
-,
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
SECTION 16715 - VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
P ART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following items for wiring systems used as signal pathways for voice
and high-speed data transmission:
1. Unshielded twisted-pair cabling.
2. Workstation outlets.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each component specified.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following:
a. Workstation outlets, jacks, and jack assemblies.
b. Patch cords.
c. Patch panels.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling installer must have on staff personnel certified by BlCSI.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and Cabling Administration
Drawings by an RCDD.
2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of a Registered
Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at
Project site.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain all products except cables through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
16715-1
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
1.4 COORDINA nON
A. Coordinate layout and installation of voice and data communication cabling with Owner's
telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance
arrangement with local exchange carrier.
1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange
carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of
equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute to other participants.
3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames and cross-connect and patch
panels in equipment rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize arrangement
and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match
components and interconnections for optimum future performance.
B.
Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare conductor pairs in cables,
positions in cross-connect and patch panels, and terminal strips to accommodate 25 percent
future increase in the number of workstations shown on Drawings. This expansion requirement
does not apply to horizontal cable from workstation outlet to first terminal board.
MOUNTING ELEMENTS
A.
Backboards: 3/4-inch (19-mm), interior-grade, fire-retardant-treated plywood.
UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR CABLING
A.
Cable Manufacturers:
1. A vaya Inc.
2. Belden Inc.; Electronics Division.
3. CommScope Properties, LLC.
4. HelixlHiTemp Cables, Inc.
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
16715-2
iU-
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
B. Terminal and Connector Component and Distribution Rack Manufacturers:
1. A vaya Inc.
2. Lucent Technologies; Global Service Provider.
C. IOO-Ohm UTP: Comply with UL 444.
D. Backbone Copper Cable:
1. No. 24 A WG, 25 pair.
2. Comply with ICEA S-80-576 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6.
3. NFPA 70, type CMR complying with UL 1666.
4. Cable Jacket Color: Gray.
E. Horizontal Copper Cable:
1. No. 24 A WG, 100 ohm, four pair.
2. Comply with TIAlEIA-568-B.2, Category 6.
3. NFPA 70, type CMP.
4. Cable Jacket Color: Blue.
F. Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIAlEIA-568-B.2, IDC type, using modules
designed for punch-down caps or tools.
1. IDC Terminal Block Modules: Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks
where indicated.
2. IDC Connecting Hardware: Consistent throughout Project.
3. Cross-Connect Panel: connect to existing.
G. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, RJ-45 receptacle units with integral IDC-
type terminals.
H. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 48-inch (l200-mm) lengths; terminated with
RJ-45 plug at each end.
2.5 WORKSTA TION OUTLETS
A. Jacks: IOO-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, modular, RJ-45. Comply with
TIA/EIA-568-B.I.
B. Workstation Outlets: Multi jack-connector assemblies mounted in single.
1. Faceplate: High-impact plastic; color as selected by Architect.
2. Mounting: Flush, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Legend: Machine-printed, adhesive tape label identifying the circuit.
2.6 BACKBOARDS
A. existing
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
16715-3
._~
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
2.7 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Materials: Comply with NFPA 70, TIA/EIA-607, and UL 467.
2.8 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Brady Worldwide, Inc.
2. HellermannTyton.
3. Kroy LLC.
4. Panduit Corp.
B. Comply with TIAlEIA-606-A and with applicable requirements in Division 16 Section
"Electrical Identification."
C. Cable Labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers, machine printed
with alphanumeric cable designations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION STANDARDS
A. Comply with BlCSI TCI, TIAlEIA-568-B.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2, TIAIEIA-568-B.3, and
TIAlEIA-569-A.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables.
1. Verify proposed routes of pathways. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for
compliance with space allocations, clearances, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Verify that cabling can be
installed complying with ENII clearance requirements.
2. Prepare wall penetrations and verify that penetrations of rated fire walls are made using
products labeled for type of wall penetrated.
3. Identify plan to support cables and raceways in suspended ceilings. Verify weight of
individual types and sizes of cables. Verify that load capacity of cable support structures
is adequate for each pathway.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 APPLICA TION OF MEDIA
A. Horizontal Cable for Data Service: Use UTP Category 6 cable for runs between wiring closets
and workstation outlets.
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
16715-4
,-
n~
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceway. Use UL-Iisted plenum cable in environmental air
spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.
Cable trays are specified in Division 16 Section "Cable Trays." Raceways and boxes are
specified in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."
C. Cable Installation:
1. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural
members and follow surface contours where possible.
2. Make splices, taps, and terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-
connect and patch panels.
3. Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's written recommended pulling tensions. Do
not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable
between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged
during installation and replace it with new cable.
4. Cold- Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat
lamps shall not be used for heating.
5. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more
than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, frames, and terminals.
6. Install UTP cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with
Category 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed
and linked signal paths, end to end.
a. Do not untwist more than 1/2 inch (12 mOl) of Category 6 cables at connector
terminations.
D. Wiring within Wiring Closets and Enclosures:
1. Mount patch panels, terminal strips, and other connecting hardware on existing IDF
2. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
3. Train conductors to terminal points with no excess.
4. Use lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent
bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.
E. Conduit:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for maximum length of conduit and bends between pull
points, and for pull-box sizing.
2. Use manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius ells whenever possible.
3. In telecommunications rooms, position conduit ends adjacent to a comer on backboard
(in case of a single piece of plywood) or in the comer of room (where multiple sheets of
plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room). Use cable trays to route cables if
conduits cannot be located in these positions. Secure conduits to backboard when
entering room from overhead. Extend conduits ] to 3 inches (25 to 76 mm) in finished
floor.
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICA nON CABLING
16715-5
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" and with TIA/EIA 607.
B. Grounding Points:
1. Locate grounding terminals in each equipment room, wiring closet, rack, and cabinet.
2. Telecommunications Grounding Busbars: Mount on wall of telecommunications
entrance facility, equipment room, and closet, with standoff insulators.
C. Bonding Conductors:
1. Where a panelboard for telecommunications is located in same room or space as a
grounding busbar, bond to equipment ground bus of electrical panel board.
2. Extend from telecommunications entrance facility to grounding bus bars.
3. Extend from grounding busbars to ground terminals in equipment racks and cabinets.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. In addition to requirements in this Article, comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and with applicable
requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
B. Carefully review and match the existing facility numbering system.
C. Cable and Wire Identification:
1. Label each cable within 4 inches (100 mm) of each termination and tap, where it is
accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.
2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at
device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within
panel or cabinet.
3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at
intervals not exceeding IS feet (4.5 01).
4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
a. All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered,
and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a
building-mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular
device as shown.
b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
5. Within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector
and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar
jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different
color for jacks and plugs of each service.
6. At Workstations: Label cables within outlet boxes.
D. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List
incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with
rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive
schedules for Project.
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
16715-6
Hunt Engineering
Addition to Senior Services and Community Center
12-19-2006
E. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cable administration-point
labeling. Identity labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets,
backbone pathways and cables terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas
and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding
conductors. Follow convention of TIAlEIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings,
in software and format selected by Owner.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field tests and inspections according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and prepare test reports.
B. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified
requirements.
C. Retest and inspect cabling to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with
specified requirements.
3.8 DEMONSTRA nON
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including
changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and
keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new
workstation outlets. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 16715
VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING
16715-7
Table of Contents
12-20-06
MEP Specs
Senior Center Port Angeles
!Division...... Section Title............................................................................. ........................................... Page~
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13851 ... ... .... FIRE ALARM............................................................. ............. .......... ............... .................. 7
13915 .......... FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING ................................................. ........................................... 13
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050.......... BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ....... ........................................... 8
15055 .......... MOTORS................................................................................. ........................................... 4
15060.......... HANGERS AND SUPPORTS.................................................. ........................................... 9
15071 .......... MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS... ........................................... 6
15075 .......... MECHANICAL IDENTIFICA TION........................................ ........................................... 5
15080.......... MECHANICAL INSULATION ............................................... ........................................... 13
15738 .......... SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS ..................... ........................................... 4
15815 ......... . METAL DUCTS ... ..................................... ..... ......................... ....... .................................... 9
15820 .......... DUCT ACCESSORIES ............................................................ .......... .................... ....... ...... 8
15900.......... HV AC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS .................. ........................................... 8
15940 .......... SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ................................................ ........................................... 3
15950.......... TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING ........................ ........................................... 9
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050.......... BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.......... ........................................... 6
16075 .......... ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION .......................................... ........................................... 3
16120.......... CONDUCTORS AND CABLES .............................................. ........................................... 3
16130 .......... RACEWAYS AND BOXES .................................................... ........................................... 6
16140 .. ........ WIRING DEVICES.................. ............................................... ........................................... 3
16410.......... ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS .......... ........................................... 3
16442 .......... P ANELBOARDS .................. ................................................... ............ ......................... ...... 4
16511 .......... INTERIOR LIGHTING............................................................ ........................................... 5
16715.......... VOICE AND DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING ............ ........................................... 7
TECHNICAL
"
SBY\\OV- Cen~
~2'6 E l~ S+
tt- 01 - \2'6 3
p,re- Sfhh\<ler 5Js~
R rujJJ \7-- 2-(0- () 7
~)2_ ?~e,S
. .
Sheet \ of l"'.:>
Sprinkler Systems Design
Date 10/05/07
Job: PASCRA01,
PROJECT INFORMATION
Job_ PORT ANGELES SENIOR CENTER 2nd FLR. ADDN.
328 EAST 7TH STREET, PORT ANGELES, WA.
WET SYSTEM
,
RA #1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Occupancy_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ LIGHT HAZARD/SENIOR CENTER
Density_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 0.10 gpm/sq.ft.
Area of Operation_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1346 square feet
Area per Sprinkler _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 100 SF MAX.
Number of Sprinklers Calculated: 19 heads
Authority having Jurisdiction_ _ NFPA-13
Hose
100.0 gpm Outside Hose
System type_ _ Wet
Water Supply _ 85.00 psi Static, 75.00 psi Residual @ 3374.0 gpm
'Sprinklers _ _ TYCO 1/2" QR UPRIGHT K=5.6
~
------------------------------------------------------------------------
CALCULATION SUMMARY
Demand_ _ _ _ _ 56.16 psi @ 357.1 gpm @ B.O.R.
67.07 psi @ 457.1 gpm @ Supply
84.75 psi available @ 457.1 gpm
Demand is below curve by 17.6B psi
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:
1"-2" THREADED PIPE IS BLACK SCH. 40.WELDED MAINS ARE DYNAFLOW. 1,500 SF
REMOTE AREA IS REDUCED 30% FOR QR SPRINKLERS UNDER 16'MAX. CEILINGS P/NFPA
13,11.2.3.2.3. RA INCREASED 30% FOR 6 IN 12 ROOF PITCH P/NFPA 13,11.2.3.2.4.
FP CONTRACTOR: KNIGHT FIRE PROTECTION, 2509 W. 19TH STREET, PORT ANGELES,WA.
PROGRAM: 'HydroCalc' by Micro Space Systems
P.O. Box 5069, Glacier, WA 98244-5069
(509) 682-7043
-PASCRA01 10/05/07 0:06am
Sheet 2./r~
l-
S
N
~
Pressure
.c.
~
(PS I )
tJ\
S
CD
~
w
s
0'1
~
....t
S
I-
~alI
~
~
N
~
~
~
-W
~ . - . - . - .
CJ: ........ ... .. .. .. .. ... . . .. . .. . . . . ... . . . '" ... . . . . ... . . . . .." . . . ... . . . .... .... . ... . . . . .. . . . ..... . . . . ... . . . . .. ","' . . ... . . . . ... . . ... . ... . . . . ..
~
UI
~ . - . -
CJ: ................:..................... '":"''' .. .. ....... .. .. .. -: .. .. ""''' .. .. ....... ":- ...... .. .. ....... .. .. '":-" .. .. ...... .. .. ""':'" .. .....
~ : : : : : :
.. .. .. .. .. ...
.. ... .. ... .. ...
.. ... .. ... .. ...
.. ... .. ... ..
.. .. .. .. ..
.. .. .. ... ..
.. ... .. .. ..
. ... .. .. ..
.. ... .. ... ..
.. ... .. ... ..
.. ... .. ...
.. ... .. .. .. .. .. ...
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. : .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..... .. .. ~ ... .. .. .. ..... .. .. .. .. ... ~ .. .. .. ... .. .. .. ...... .:. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .:.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ~.. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ~ .. ... .. .. .. .. ... . .. .. .. ~ .. .. .. ..
.. ... .. .. .. .. .. ...
.. ... .. .. .. ... .. ...
.. .. .. ... .. ... .. ...
.. .. .. ....... .. .. ""''' : .. ...... .. .. ....... .. .:..... .. .. ....... .. .. .. -:. .. . ....... .. .. ...... .:- ....... .. .. ..... .. .. .:-.. .. .. ...... .. .. .......::. .. ....... .. .. ....... .. .:....... .. .. ...... .. .. ..::
.. .. .. ... .. ... .. ...
.. ... .. .. .. ... ..
.. ... .. .. .. .. ..
.. ... .. ... .. ... ..
.. .. .. .. .. .. ..
.. ... .. .. .. .. ..
.c.
(SI .. ... .. ... .. : ..
CJ: ........ ... .. .. .. .. ..... . .. .. ..... .. .. .. ... .. .. ..", ... .. .. .. . . . - . . ., . - - ... . . . . . . ... . . - . - . . . . . ... - . . ... . . . . "". . .... - . - .. . . ~ .
~
"'I
-
o
E
.. ...... ~..... ..... .:... ..... ......
. -
. -
. -
. -
. -
. -
. -
. -
. -
. -
. -
. -
. -
. -
0'1
~ . - . - .
CSl .... -. . . . -. : . . -. . . . -. . ': -. . . . -. . . . -: . . . -. . . . -. ':' ... , . . -, . . ':-' . . ..
CSl : : : : :
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. ... . . .
. .. . ... .
. . . ... .
. . . ... ..
. . .. ...
. . . ...
. .... . .
. . . .
. . . .
. ... . .
-..3
-~
~~
""CI~
:z:
-
- . -
. . . ... . . .... .. - ..... . . .... . .-.... . . .... .. . ..- . . . "". . . . - - ..- . _. . . .
- . -
. .-... .-... ...- -. ...... ..... ..... ..... ....
- , -
- . -
- . -
. . -
- . -
. . -
- . -
- . .
- . -
- . -
- . -
- . -
- . -
- . -
- . -
- . -
- . -
- . -
. . . ...... . . ... . . . - -. . ... . . ... . ""..... . . ... . . ... . . ..... . . ....
CD
~ -
~ ,... -. . . . -. . . . -. . . ... . .:-.. . . . -. , , . -- . . ...
~
. .
. ... _ ... .... . . ... . . u.. . . .... . . .. _. . . _. . . ... . ........ . . ... . . ... . . ... . . ....
...0
~ . -
~ .... -. . . . -. : . . -. . . . -. . ':' -. .
~ : :
. -
. -
I-
CSl
~
~
CSl
. -
. ... . ... .
... -. --... .-. -. --.... ....... ..... ..... ....... ..... .-... ..... ..... ..... ...... ..... .-.
. ... . . - .
. . . . . .
. . . . . ...
. .. . ... . ..
. . . .. . ...
. ... . ... . ...
. .. . . . ..
. .. . ... . .
. .. . ... . ..
.. ... . ... . ...
. .. . . . ...
. - .. .. .. ..
. ... . .. . .
. .. . . . ..
. ... - ... . ...
. ... . ... . .
. . . ... . .
- . . . . .
. . . . . ...
. . . .... . ....
. .. . . . ..
. - . . . -
. .. . - . .
. - . ... . ..
- .. . . . .
. .. . "" . ...
Static = 85.00 psi, Residual = 75.00 psi at a flow of 3374.0 gpm.
Demand at BOR = 56.16 psi with 357.1 gpm flowing.
System demand = 67.07 psi with 457.1 gpm flowing.
Pressure available = 84.75 psi when 457.1 gpm is flowing.
Demand is below curve by 17.68 psi. (20.9%)
U)
S
J:
~
t+
ftI
"$
I>
c
~
...
....
~
tr'
...
....
...
t+
Ie
n
s:
"$
c
ftI
^
Z
I-
.
CD
tJ\
~
"$
~
"'lS
:T'
.....
Sprinkler Systems Design
Description of Fitting abbreviations
Code Description
T Tee
E Ninety degree elbow
VT Victaulic tee
VE Victaulic ninety degree elbow
ALV Alarm valve: Grinnell F200, F2001
BKF Backflow preventor
BV Butterfly valve
GV Gate valve
UE Underground ASCA ninety degree elbow
UT3 Underground ASCA tee: flow in bull, out one run only
Description of Other abbreviations
Code Description
Sheet :3/I,?
-----------------------------------------------------------------
AO Arm-over
BL Branch Line
RN Riser Nipple
CM Cross Main
PT Total pressure
PE Pressure loss due to elevation changes
PF Pressure loss due to friction
^.S Raised to the power of .5 (Square Root)
A Actual pipe length
F Fitting equivalent pipe length
T Total pipe length
PASCRA01 10/05/07 0:08am Sheet 4/1?
Sprinkler Systems Design
Sprinkler Systems Hydraulic Flow Calculations
PORT ANGELES SENIOR CENTER 2nd FLR. ADDN. WET SYSTEM RA #1
328 EAST 7TH STREET, PORT ANGELES, WA.
Raw data previous to any calculations
No. Code Diam Length Kfac1 Kfac2 Press Elev Hose HW Vel Fittings
9 A01 1.049 2.0 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32 1T
11 BL1 1.752 0.5 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
12 BL1 1.752 7.5 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
13 BL1 1.752 8.0 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
14 BL1 1.752 8.0 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
15 BL1 1.752 3.5 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32 1VT
16 RNl 1.752 2.1 BL1 A01 0.00 2.08 0.0 120 32 1VT
17 CMA 2.227 5.5 RN1 0.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
21 BL2 1.752 6.0 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
22 BL2 1.752 8.0 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
23 BL2 1.752 8.0 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
24 BL2 1.752 7.8 5.6 7.00 4.83 0.0 120 32 2VT
25 CMA 2.227 2.0 BL2 0.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
30 BL3 1.049 7.5 5.6 7.00 -5.00 0.0 120 32 2E
31 BL3 1.752 6.0 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
32 BL3 1.752 8.0 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
33 BL3 1.752 8.0 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
34 BL3 1.752 7.8 5.6 7.00 4.83 0.0 120 32 2VT
35 CMA 2.227 6.8 BL3 0.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
41 BL4 1.752 6.0 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
42 BL4 1.752 8.0 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
43 BL4 1.752 8.0 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
44 BL4 1.752 4.4 5.6 7.00 1.42 0.0 120 32 2VT
45 CMA 2.227 0.7 BL4 0.00 0.00 0.0 120 32 1VT
51 BL5 1.049 14.0 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32
52 BL5 1.049 6.0 5.6 7.00 0.00 0.0 120 32 1T
55 CMB 2.227 9.7 BL5 0.00 -2.83 0.0 120 32 5VE,lVT
65 BU1 2.731 35.0 CMA CMB 0.00 -0.75 0.0 120 32 2VE,lVT
66 BU1 3.260 12.1 0.00 12.12 0.0 120 32 1VE
67 BU1 4.260 91.5 0.00 2.37 0.0 120 32 4VE
99 RI1 4.260 6.2 BU1 0.00 6.25 0.0 120 32 1BV,lALV
101 UG1 4.100 13.0 RI1 0.00 1.00 0.0 140 32 2UE
102 UG2 4.070 180.0 UG1 -5.0 0.00 0.00 0.0 150 32 1GV,lBKF,lUT3
103 UG3 11.200 10.0 UG2 0.00 0.00 100.0 150 32
PASCRAOl 10/05/07 0:08am
Sheet S II?
Sprinkler Systems Design
Sprinkler Systems Hydraulic Flow Calculations
PORT ANGELES SENIOR CENTER 2nd FLR. ADDN. WET SYSTEM
328 EAST 7TH STREET, PORT ANGELES, WA.
Discharge
Node ( gpm)
RA #1
Node Detail
Pressure Outlet
(psi) K-Value Source
Elevation
(ft) Comments
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
21
22
23
24
25
30
31
32
33
34
35
41
42
43
44
45
51
52
55
65
66
67
99
101
102
103
104
14.8
14.8
14.8
15.0
15.4
16.0
93.1
14.8
14.9
15.1
15.4
16.0
14.8
15.0
15.4
16.1
14.8
14.9
15.1
15.4
14.8
15.9
100.0
7.00
7.00
7.00
7.17
7.55
8.20
9.91
13.31
7.00
7.04
7.21
7.59
13.63
8.18
7.01
7.15
7.55
8.23
13.94
7.00
7.04
7.21
7.59
16.11
7.00
8.05
11.21
23.01
39.94
47.21
51.97
56.16
57.26
67.07
67.07
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif::z:: 5.60
K=29.57
BLl + AOl
23.07
23.07
23.07
23.07
23.07
23.07
23.07
20.99
25.82
25.82
25.82
25.82
20.99
20.82
25.82
25.82
25.82
25.82
20.99
22.41
22.41
22.41
22.41
20.99
18.16
18.16
18.16
20.99
21.74
9.62
7.25
1.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Ori-f= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Orif= 5.60
Hose
UG2
PASCRAOl 10/05/07 0:08am
Sprinkler Systems Design
Sprinkler Systems Hydraulic Flow Calculations
PORT ANGELES SENIOR CENTER 2nd FLR. ADDN. WET SYSTEM
328 EAST 7TH STREET, PORT ANGELES, WA.
Actual
Pipe Diam Len
No. (inch) (Ft)
Total
Len
(Ft)
Pipe Detail
Elev
Head
(Ft)
Fric Fric
Flow Loss Loss Vel Nodes
(Gpm) (Psi/Ft) (Psi) (Fps) Beg End
Sheet f., II?
RA #1
Press
@ Beg
(Psi)
Press
@ End
(Psi)
================================================================================
9 1.05
Fit=
11 1.75
12 1.75
13 1.75
14 1.75
15
1.75
Fit=
1.75
Fit=
2.23
16
17
21 1.75
22 1.75
23 1.75
24 1.75
Fit=
25 2.23
30 1.05
Fit=
31 1.75
32 1.75
33 1.75
34 1.75
Fit=
35 2.23
41 1.75
42 1.75
43 1.75
44 1.75
2.0 7.0
5.0 1T
0.5 0.5
7.5 7.5
8.0 8.0
8.0 8.0
3.5
10.0
2.1
10.0
5.5
6.0
8.0
8.0
13.5
lVT
12.1
lVT
5.5
6.0
8.0
8.0
7.8 27.7
19.9 2VT
2.0 2.0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.08
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
14.8 0.0747 0.52 5.5 9 16
14.8 0.0061 0.00 2.0 11 12
29.6 0.0222 0.17 3.9 12 13
44.6 0.0473 0.38 5.9 13 14
60.0 0.0817 0.65 8.0 14 15
76.1 0.1267
1.71 10.1
15
16
93.1 0.1841
2.22 12.4
16
17
94.1 0.0584
0.32 7.8
17
25
14.8 0.0061 0.04 2.0 21 22
29.7 0.0222 0.18 3.9 22 23
4.83 60.2 0.0821 2.27 8.0 24 25
44.7 0.0474 0.38 6.0 23 24
0.00 158.4 0.1530 0.31 13.0 25 35
7.5 11.5 -5.00
4.0 2E
6.0 6.0 0.00
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
7.8 27.7
19.9 2VT
6.8 6.8
4.4
6.0
8.0
8.0
6.0
8.0
8.0
24.3
0.00
0.00
16.0 0.0863 0.99 5.9 30 31
30.9 0.0239 0.14 4.1 31 32
45.8 0.0496 0.40 6.1 32 33
61.2 0.0848 0.68 8.1 33 34
4.83 77.3 0.1305 3.62 10.3 34 35
0.00 235.7 0.3192 2.17 19.4 35 45
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.42
14.8 0.0061 0.04 2.0 41 42
29.7 0.0222 0.18 3.9 42 43
44.7 0.0474 0.38 6.0 43 44
60.2 0.0821 2.00 8.0 44 45
7.00
7.00
7.00
7.17
7.55
8.20
9.91
13.31
7.00
7.04
7.21
7.59
13.63
8.18
7.01
7.15
7.55
8.23
13.94
7.00
7.04
7.21
7.59
9.91
7.00
7.17
7.55
8.20
9.91
13.31
13.63
7.04
7.21
7.59
13.63
13.94
7.01
7.15
7.55
8.23
13.94
16.11
7.04
7.21
7.59
16.11
Fit=
45 2.23
Fit=
19.9 2VT
0.7 12.9
12.2 1VT
0.00 311.3 0.5342 6.90 25.6 45 65
7/1-"
16.11
23.01
PASCRA01 10/05/07 0:08am Sheet e>!I;
Sprinkler Systems Design
Sprinkler Systems Hydraulic Flow Calculations
PORT ANGELES SENIOR CENTER 2nd FLR. ADDN. WET SYSTEM RA #1
328 EAST 7TH STREET, PORT ANGELES, WA.
Pipe Detail
Actual Total Elev Fric Fric Press Press
Pipe Diam Len Len Head Flow Loss Loss Vel Nodes @ Beg @ End
No. ( inch) (Ft) (Ft) (Ft) (Gpm) (Psi/Ft) (Psi) (Fps) Beg End (Psi) (Psi)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
51 1.05 14.0 14.0 0.00 14.8 0.0747 1.05 5.5 51 52 7.00 8.05
52 1.05 6.0 11.0 0.00 30.7 0.2875 3.16 11.4 52 55 8.05 11.2:).
Fit= 5.0 1T
55 2.23 9.7 47.1 -2.83 30.7 0.0074 0.35 2.5 55 65 11.21 23.01
Fit= 37.4 5VE 1VT
65 2.73 35.0 67.7 -0.75 357.1 0.2550 17.26 19.6 65 66 23.01 39.94
Fit= 32.7 2VE 1VT
66 3.26 12.1 18.8 12.12 357.1 0.1076 2.03 13.7 66 67 39.94 47.21
Fit= 6.7 1VE
67 4.26 91.5 127.3 2.37 357.1 0.0293 3.72 8.0 67 99 47.21 51.97
Fit= 35.8 4VE
99 4.26 6.2 51.0 6.25 357.1 0.0292 1.49 8.0 99 101 51.97 56.16
Fit= 44.8 1BV 1ALV
101 4.10 13.0 25.0 1.00 357.1 0.0265 0.66 8.7 101 102 56.16 57.26
Fit= 12.0 2UE
102 4.07 180.0 199.1 0.00 357.1 0.0242 9.81 8.8 102 103 57.26 67.07
Fit;;, 19.1 1GV 1BKF 1UT3
103 11.20 10.0 10.0 0.00 457.1 0.0003 0.00 1.5 103 104 67.07 67.07
PASCRA01 10/05/07 0:08am
Sheet "II"?
Sprinkler Systems Design
Sprinkler Systems Hydraulic Flow Calculations
PORT ANGELES SENIOR CENTER 2nd FLR. ADDN. WET SYSTEM RA #1
328 EAST 7TH STREET, PORT ANGELES, WA.
Pipe Flow Dia Fitting Length Fr Loss Press Hyd Vel
No ( gpm) ( inch) and Dev (ft) (psi/ft) (psi) Ref (fps) Notes
Arm-over 1 C = 120
----------- A 2.0 PT 7.00 9
-----------
14.8=5.60(7.00)^.5 F 5.0 PE 0.00
9 14.8 1.05 1T T 7.0 0.07470 PF 0.52 5.50
PT 7.52 16 Bl Jct
K-factor for arm-over 1 = 14.8/(7.52)^.5 = 5.40
PASCRAOl 10/05/07 0:08am
Sheet 1,0/17
Sprinkler Systems Design
Sprinkler Systems Hydraulic Flow Calculations
PORT ANGELES SENIOR CENTER 2nd FLR. ADDN. WET SYSTEM
328 EAST 7TH STREET, PORT ANGELES, WA.
Pipe Flow Dia Fitting
No (gpm) (inch) and Dev
Branchline No. 1
----------------
----------------
14.8=5.60{7.00)^.5
11 14.8 1.75
14.8=5.60{7.00)^.5
12 29.6 1.75
15.0=5.60(7.17)^.5
13 44.6 1.75
15.4=5.60(7.55)^.5
14 60.0 1.75
16.0=5.60(8.20)^.5
15 76.1 1.75
Length Fr Loss
(ft) (psi/ft)
A
F
T
A
F
T
A
F
T
A
F
T
A
F
IVT T
0.5
0.0
0.5
7.5
0.0
7.5
8.0
0.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
8.0
3.5
10.0
13.5
PT
PE
0.00614 PF
PT
PE
0.02216 PF
PT
PE
0.04726 PF
PT
PE
0.08174 PF
PT
PE
0.12668 PF
PT
Press
(psi)
7.00
0.00
0.00
7.00
0.00
0.17
7.17
0.00
0.38
7.55
0.00
0.65
8.20
0.00
1.71
9.91
RA #1
Hyd Vel
Ref (fps)
K-factor for branchline no. 1 = 76.1/(9.91)^.5 = 24.18
Riser Nipple (Top of RN =Branchline 1
======= K=29.57=24.17+5.40 A 2.1
93.1=29.57(9.91)^.5 F 10.0
16 93.1 1.75 IVT T 12.1
+ AOl)
PT
PE
0.18410 PF
PT
9.91
0.90
2.22
13.03
Branchline No. 2
K-factor for riser nipple = 93.1/(13.03)^.5 = 25.79
----------------
----------------
14.8=5.60(7.00)^.5
21 14.8 1.75
14.9=5.60(7.04)^.5
22 29.7 1.75
15.1=5.60(7.21)^.5
23 44.7 1.75
15.4=5.60(7.59)^.5
24 60.2 1.75
A
F
T
A
F
T
A
F
T
A
F
2VT T
6.0
0.0
6.0
8.0
0.0
8.0
8.0
0.0
8.0
7.8
19.9
27.7
PT
PE
0.00614 PF
PT
PE
0.02221 PF
PT
PE
0.04742 PF
PT
PE
0.08207 PF
PT
7.00
0.00
0.04
7.04
0.00
0.18
7.21
0.00
0.38
7.59
2.09
2.27
11.96
Notes
C = 120
11 End head
1.97
12
3.94
13
5.94
14
7.99
15
10.12
16 Riser Nipple Jct
16
C = 120
BLl + AOl
(EL= 2.08 ft)
12.39
Cross main Jct
17
21
C = 120
End head
1.97
22
3.95
23
5.95
24
25
(EL= 4.83 ft)
8.00
Cross main Jct
K-factor for branchline no. 2 = 60.2/(11.96)^.5 = 17.41
PASCRAOl 10/05/07 0:08am
Sheet ~l /1;
Sprinkler Systems Design
Sprinkler Systems Hydraulic Flow Calculations
PORT ANGELES SENIOR CENTER 2nd FLR. ADDN. WET SYSTEM RA #1
328 EAST 7TH STREET, PORT ANGELES, WA.
Pipe Flow Dia Fitting Length Fr Loss Press Hyd Vel
No ( gpm) ( inch) and Dev (ft) (psi/ft) (psi) Ref ( fps ) Notes
Branchline No. 3 (Beginning pressure increased due to Hyd Ref pt 31 ) C = 120
---------------- A 7.5 PT 8.18 30 End head
----------------
16.0=5.60(8.18)^.5 F 4.0 PE -2.17 (EL= -5.00 ft)
30 16.0 1.05 2E T 11.5 0.08631 PF 0.99 5.95
A 6.0 PT 7.01 31
14.8=5.60(7.01)^.5 F 0.0 PE 0.00
31 30.9 1.75 T 6.0 0.02386 PF 0.14 4.11
A 8.0 PT 7.15 32
15.0=5.60(7.15)^.5 F 0.0 PE 0.00
32 45.8 1.75 T 8.0 0.04962 PF 0.40 6.10
A 8.0 PT 7.55 33
15.4=5.60(7.55)^.5 F 0.0 PE 0.00
33 61.2 1.75 T 8.0 0.08478 PF 0.68 8.15
A 7.8 PT 8.23 34
16.1=5.60(8.23)^.5 F 19.9 PE 2.09 (EL= 4.83 ft)
34 77.3 1.75 2VT T 27.7 0.13048 PF 3.62 10.28
PT 13.94 35 Cross
K-factor for branchline no. 3 = 77.3/(13.94)^.5 = 20.71
Branchline No. 4 C = 120
---------------- A 6.0 PT 7.00 41 End head
----------------
14.8=5.60(7.00)^.5 F 0.0 PE 0.00
41 14.8 1.75 T 6.0 0.00614 PF 0.04 1.97
A 8.0 PT 7.04 42
14.9=5.60(7.04)^.5 F 0.0 PE 0.00
42 29.7 1.75 T 8.0 0.02221 PF 0.18 3.95
A 8.0 PT 7.21 43
15.1=5.60(7.21)^.5 F 0.0 PE 0.00
43 44.7 1.75 T 8.0 0.04742 PF 0.38 5.95
A 4.4 PT 7.59 44
15.4=5.60(7.59)^.5 F 19.9 PE 0.61 (EL= 1.42 ft)
44 60.2 1. 75 2VT T 24.3 0.08207 PF 2.00 8.00
PT 10.20 45 Cross main Jct
K-factor for branchline no. 4 = 60.2/(10.20)^.5 = 18.85
Branchline No. 5 C = 120
---------------- A 14.0 PT 7.00 51 End head
----------------
14.8=5.60(7.00)^.5 F 0.0 PE 0.00
51 14.8 1.05 T 14.0 0.07470 PF 1.05 5.50
A 6.0 PT 8.05 52
15.9=5.60(8.05)^.5 F 5.0 PE 0.00
52 30.7 1.05 1T T 11.0 0.28754 PF 3.16 11. 40
PT 11.21 55 Cross main Jct
K-factor for branchline no. 5 = 30.7/(11.21)^.5 = 9.17
PASCRAOl 10/05/07 0:08am
Sheet l')..../'~
Sprinkler Systems Design
Sprinkler Systems Hydraulic Flow Calculations
PORT ANGELES SENIOR CENTER 2nd FLR. ADDN. WET SYSTEM
328 EAST 7TH STREET, PORT ANGELES, WA.
Pipe Flow Dia Fitting
No (gpm) (inch) and Dev
Length Fr Loss
(ft) (psi/ft)
Cross main A
17
A
F
T
A
F
T
A
F
T
A
75.6=18.85(16.11)^.5 F
311.3 2.23 IVT T
------------
------------
94.1=25.79(13.31)^.5
94.1 2.23
25
64.3=17.41(13.63)^.5
158.4 2.23
35
77.3=20.71(13.94)^.5
235.7 2.23
45
5.5
0.0
5.5
2.0
0.0
2.0
6.8
0.0
6.8
0.7
12.2
12.9
PT
PE
0.05841 PF
PT
PE
0.15300 PF
PT
PE
0.31920 PF
PT
PE
0.53418 PF
PT
Press
(psi)
13.31
0.00
0.32
13.63
0.00
0.31
13.94
0.00
2.17
16.11
0.00
6.90
23.01
RA #1
Hyd Vel
Ref (fps)
K-factor for Cross main A = 311.3/(23.01)^.5 = 64.90
Cross main B
============ A
30.7=9.17(11.21)^.5 F
55 30.7 2.23 5VE IVT T
9.7 PT
37.4 PE
47.1 0.00735 PF
PT
11.21 55
-1.23
0.35
10.33 65
K-factor for Cross main B = 30.7/(10.33)^.5 = 9.55
Notes
17
C = 120
RN#16
7.75
25
BL2
13.05
35
BL3
19.41
45
BL4
25.64
65
Bulk Jct
C = 120
BL5
(EL= -2.83 ft)
2.53
Bulk Jct
PASCRA01 10/05/07 0:08am
Sheet I? f\'?
Sprinkler Systems Design
Sprinkler Systems Hydraulic Flow Calculations
PORT ANGELES SENIOR CENTER 2nd FLR. ADDN. WET SYSTEM
328 EAST 7TH STREET, PORT ANGELES, WA.
Pipe Flow Dia Fitting
No (gpm) (inch) and Dev
Bulk
======= K=74.45=64.90+9.55 A
357.1=74.45(23.01)^.5 F
65 357.1 2.73 2VE 1VT T
A
F
66 357.1 3.26 1VE T
A
F
67 357.1 4.26 4VE T
Riser
-----
-----
A
F
1BV 1ALV T
99 357.1
4.26
Under ground
------------
------------
A
F
2UE T
101 357.1 4.10
Under ground
------------
------------
A
F
1GV 1BKF T
1UT3
102 357.1 4.07
Under ground
------------
------------
100.0 gpm = Hose
103 457.1 11.20
Length Fr Loss
(ft) (psi/ft)
35.0
32.7
67.7
12.1
6.7
18.8
91.5
35.8
127.3
PT
PE
0.25496 PF
PT
PE
0.10764 PF
PT
PE
0.02925 PF
PT
Press
(psi)
RA #1
Hyd Vel
Ref (fps)
Notes
23.01
-0.32
17.26
39.94
5.25
2.03
47.21
1.03
3.72
51.96
51.97 99
2.71
1.49
56.16 101
65
C = 120
CMA+CMB
(EL= -0.75 ft)
19.56
66
(EL= 12.12 ft)
13.73
67
(EL= 2.37 ft)
8.04
99
Top of Riser
6.2 PT
44.8 PE
51.0 0.02925 PF
PT
13.0 PT
12.0 PE
25.0 0.02650 PF
PT
180.0 PT
19.1 PE
199.1 0.02417 PF
PT
A
F
T
10.0 PT
0.0 PE
10.0 0.00028 PF
PT
C = 120
Top of Riser
(EL= 6.25 ft)
8.04
B.O.R.
56.16 101
0.43 (EL=
0.66 8.68
57.26 102
C = 140
B.O.R.
1.00 ft)
57.26 102
0.00
9.81
67.07 103
C = 150
B.O.R.
8.81 1BKF = 5.00#
C = 150
B.O.R.
67.07 103
0.00
0.00 1.49
67.07 104
Available flow at 67.07 psi is 4626.1 gpm which is 4169.0 gpm from curve.
Supply Jct
Supply pressure available with 457.1 gpm flowing is 84.75 psi,
thus system requirement is 17.68 psi below supply curve. (20.9%)
1:QCD / Fire & Building
/ Products
Technical Services: Tel: (800) 381-9312/ Fax: (800) 791-5500
~
~
-oem
Customer Service/Sales:
Tel: (414) 570-5000/ (800) 558-5236
Fax: (414) 570-5010/ (800) 877-1295
Series TY-FRS - 2.8, 4.2, 5.6, and 8.0 K-factor
Upright, Pendent, and Recessed Pendent Sprinklers
Quick Response, Standard Coverage
General
Description
The Series TY-FRS, 2.8, 4.2, 5.6, and
8.0 K-factor, Upright and Pendent
Sprinklers described in this data sheet
are quick response - standard cover-
age, decorative 3 mm glass bulb type
spray sprinklers designed for use in
light or ordinary hazard, commercial
occupancies such as banks, hotels,
shopping malls, etc.
The recessed version of the Series
TY-FRS Pendent Sprinkler, where ap-
plicable, is intended for use in areas
with a finished ceiling. It uses either a
two-piece Style 10 (1/2 inch NPT) or
Style 40 (3/4 inch NPT) Recessed Es-
cutcheon with 1/2 inch (12,7 mm) of
recessed adjustment or up to 3/4 inch
(19,1 mm) of total adjustment from the
flush pendent position, or a two-piece
Style 20 (1/2 inch NPT) or Style 30 (3/4
inch NPT) Recessed Escutcheon with
1/4 inch (6,4 mm) of recessed adjust-
ment or up to 1/2 inch (12,7 mm) of
total adjustment from the flush pen-
dent position. The adjustment provided
by the Recessed Escutcheon reduces
the accuracy to which the fixed pipe
drops to the sprinklers must be cut.
Corrosion resistant coatings, where
applicable, are utilized to extend the
life of copper alloy sprinklers beyond
that which would otherwise be ob-
tained when exposed to corrosive at-
IMPORTANT
Always refer to Technical Data
Sheet TFP700 for the "INSTALLER
WARNING" that provides cautions
with respect to handling and instal-
lation of sprinkler systems and com-
ponents. Improper handling and in-
stallation can permanently damage
a sprinkler system or its compo-
nents and cause the sprinkler to fail
to operate in a fire situation or cause
it to operate prematurely.
Page 1 of 8
mospheres. Although corrosion resis-
tant coated sprinklers have passed the
standard corrosion tests of the appli-
cable approval agencies, the testing is
not representative of all possible cor-
rosive atmospheres. Consequently, it
is recommended that the end user be
consulted with respect to the suitability
of these coatings for any given corro-
sive environment. The effects of ambi-
ent temperature, concentration of
chemicals, and gas/chemical velocity,
should be considered, as a minimum,
along with the corrosive nature of the
chemical to which the sprinklers will be
exposed.
An intermediate level versions of the
Series TY-FRS Pendent Sprinklers are
detailed in Technical Data Sheet
TFP356, and Sprinkler Guards are de-
tailed in Technical Data Sheet TFP780
WARNINGS
The Series TY-FRB Sprinklers de-
scribed herein must be installed and
maintained in compliance with this
document, as well as with the applica-
ble standards of the National Fire Pro-
tection Association, in addition to the
standards of any other authorities hav-
ing jurisdiction. Failure to do so may
impair the performance of these de-
vices.
The owner is responsible for maintain-
ing their fire protection system and de-
vices in proper operating condition.
The installing contractor or sprinkler
manufacturer should be contacted
with any questions.
Model/Sprinkler
Identification
Numbers
TY1131 -
TY1231 -
TY2131 -
TY2231 -
TY3131 -
Upright 2.8K,1/2"NPT
Pendent 2.8K,1/2"NPT
Upright 4.2K,1/2"NPT
Pendent 4.2K,1/2"NPT
Upright 5.6K,1/2"NPT
JULY, 2004
TY3231 -
TY4131 -
TY4231 -
Pendent 5.6K, 1/2"NPT
Upright 8.0K,3/4"NPT
Pendent 8.0K,3/4"NPT
Technical
Data
Approvals
UL and C-UL Listed.
FM, LPCS, and NYC Approved.
(Refer to Table A for complete approval
information including corrosion resis-
tant status.)
Maximum Working Pressure
175 psi (12,1 bar)
Discharge Coefficient
K = 2.8 GPM/pSP/2 (40,3 LPM/bar1/2)
K = 4.2 GPM/pSP/2 (60.5 LPM/bar1/2)
K = 5.6 GPM/psi1/2 (80,6 LPM/bar1/2)
K = 8.0 GPM/psi1/2 (115,2 LPM/bar1/2)
Temperature Ratings
Refer to Table A and S
TFP171
Page 2 of 8
TFP171
ESCUTCHEON
PLATE SEATING
SURFACE
7/16" (11,1 mm)
** NOMINAL
1/2" MAKE-IN
NPT !
STYLE 10 or 20
RECESSED
ESCUTCHEON
SSU*
DEFLECTOR
/
6
5
2-1/4"
(57,2 mm)
3
SSP DEFLECTOR *
PENDENT
WRENCH
FLATS
2-7/8" (73,0 mm) DIA. J
RECESSED PENDENT
7/16"
(11,1 mm)
NOMINAL
MAKE-IN
) I 2-3/16"
-1 (55,6 mm)
112.NP~
4
2
7
UPRIGHT
CROSS SECTION
1 - Frame
2 - Button
3 - Sealing
Assembly
4 - Bulb
5 - Compression
Screw
6 - Deflector
7 - Bushing
* Temperature rating is indicated on deflector or adjacent to
orifice seat on frame.
**Pipe thread connections per ISO 7/1 can be provided on
special request.
FIGURE 1
QUICK RESPONSE SERIES TY-FRB UPRIGHT (TY1131) AND PENDENT (TY1231) SPRINKLERS
2.8 K-FACTOR, 1/2 INCH NPT
ESCUTCHEON
PLATE SEATING
SURFACE
7/16" (11,1 mm)
NOMINAL
MAKE-IN
~
STYLE 10 or 20
RECESSED
ESCUTCHEON
SSU*
DEFLECTOR
2-3116"
(55,6 mm)
5
SSP DEFLECTOR *
PENDENT
WRENCH
FLATS
2-7/8" (73,0 mm) DIA. J
RECESSED PENDENT
7/16"
(11,1 mm)
NOMINAL
MAKE-IN
J I 2-3/16"
-1 (55,6 mm)
112.NPT~
6*
4
2
3
UPRIGHT
CROSS SECTION
1 - Frame
2 - Button
3 - Sealing
Assembly
4 - Bulb
5 - Compression
Screw
6 - Deflector
* Temperature rating is indicated on deflector or adjacent to
orifice seat on frame.
** Pipe thread connections per ISO 7/1 can be provided on
special request.
FIGURE 2
QUICK RESPONSE SERIES TY-FRB UPRIGHT (TY2131) AND PENDENT (TY2231) SPRINKLERS
4.2 K-FACTOR, 1/2 INCH NPT
Finishes
Sprinkler: Refer to Table A and B
Recessed Escutcheon: White Coated,
Chrome Plated, or Brass Plated
Bulb. . . . . . . . .
Compression Screw
Deflector. . . . .
Bushing (K=2.8) ..
. . . .. Glass
. . . . . Bronze
Copper/Bronze
. . . . . Bronze
Operation
-""
(ij
E
Ql
"0
ctl
.=
"0
Ql
Q;
iii
'0,
Ql
II:
C
o
a..
:;)
o
+-
Physical Characteristics
Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . Bronze
Button. . . . . . . . . Brass/Copper
Sealing Assembly . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .. Beryllium Nickel w/Teflont
The glass Bulb contains a fluid which
expands when exposed to heat. When
the rated temperature is reached, the
fluid expands sufficiently to shatter the
glass Bulb, allowing the sprinkler to
activate and water to flow.
TFP171
Page 3 of 8
ESCUTCHEON
PLATE SEATING
SURFACE
7/16" (11,1 mm)
"** NOMINAL
1/2 MAKE-IN
NPT ~
STYLE 10 or 20
RECESSED
ESCUTCHEON
SSU*
DEFLECTOR
2-3/16"
(55,6 mm)
5
SSP DEFLECTOR *
PENDENT
WRENCH
FLATS
2-7/8" (73,0 mm) DIA. -J
RECESSED PENDENT
7/16"
(11,1 mm)
NOMINAL
MAKE-IN
, \ 2-3/16"
--1 (55,6 mm)
l~.NP~
6*
4
2
3
UPRIGHT
CROSS SECTION
1 - Frame
2 - Button
3 . Sealing
Assembly
4 - Bulb
5 - Compression
Screw
6 - Deflector
* Temperature rating is indicated on deflector or adjacent to
orifice seat on frame.
** Pipe thread connections per ISO 7/1 can be provided on
special request.
FIGURE 3
QUICK RESPONSE SERIES TY-FRS UPRIGHT (TY3131) AND PENDENT (TY3231) SPRINKLERS
5.6 K-FACTOR, 1/2 INCH NPT
ESCUTCHEON
PLATE SEATING
SURFACE
1/2" (12,7 mm)
314" ** NOMINAL
NPT MAKE-IN
--1
STYLE 30 or 40
RECESSED
ESCUTCHEON
ssu*
DEFLECTOR
6*
5
4
2
SSP DEFLECTOR *
PENDENT
WRENCH
FLATS
2-7/8" (73,0 mm) DIA. --1
RECESSED PENDENT
3
CROSS SECTION
1 - Frame
2 - Button
3 - Sealing
Assembly
4 - Bulb
5 - Compression
Screw
6 - Deflector
* Temperature rating is indicated on deflector or adjacent to
orifice seat on frame.
**Pipe thread connections per ISO 7/1 can be provided on
special request.
FIGURE 4
QUICK RESPONSE SERIES TY-FRS UPRIGHT (TY4131) AND PENDENT (TY4231) SPRINKLERS
8.0 K-FACTOR, 3/4 INCH NPT
Design
Criteria
Listing is based on the requirements of
NFPA 13, and FM Approval is based
on the requirements of FM's Loss Pre-
vention Data Sheets ). Only the Style
10, 20, 30, or 40 Recessed Escutch-
eon, as applicable, is to be used for
recessed pendent installations.
Installation
The Series TY-FRS Pendent and Up-
right Sprinklers are intended for fire
protection systems designed in ac-
cordance with the standard installation
rules recognized by the applicable
Listing or Approval agency (e.g., UL
The Series TY-FRS Sprinklers must be
installed in accordance with the fol/ow-
ing instructions:
NOTES
Do not install any bulb type sprinkler if
the bulb is cracked or there is a loss of
liquid from the bulb. With the sprinkler
Page 4 of 8
SPRINKLER FINISH (See Note 7)
K TYPE TEMP. BULB NATURAL I CHROME IF WHITE'"
LIQUID BRASS PLATED POLYESTER
135OF/57OC Orange
PENDENT 155OF/68OC Red
(TY1231 ) 1,2,3,5
and 175OF/79OC Yellow
UPRIGHT 200oF/93OC Green
2.8 (TY1131) 286OF/141OC
Blue
1/2'
NPT 135OF/57"C Orange
RECESSED 155OF/68OC Red
PENDENT
(TY1231 )* 175OF/79OC Yellow
Figure 5 200oF/93OC Green 1,2,5
135OF/57OC Orange
RECESSED 155OF/68OC Red
PENDENT
(TY1231 ).. 175OF/79OC Yellow
Figure 6 200oF/93OC Green
135OF/57OC Orange
PENDENT 155OF/68OC Red
(TY2231 )
and 175OF/79OC Yellow
UPRIGHT 200oF/93OC Green
4.2 (TY2131) 286OF/141OC Blue
1/2' 1,2
NPT 135OF/57OC Orange
RECESSED 155OF/68OC Red
PENDENT
(TY2231 )* 175OF/79OC Yellow
Figure 7 200oF/93OC Green
135OF/57"C Orange
RECESSED 155OF/68OC Red
PENDENT
(TY2231 ).. 175OF/79OC Yellow
Figure 8 200oF/93OC Green
NOTES:
1. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) as Quick Response Sprinklers.
2. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Canada (C-UL) as Quick Response
Sprinklers.
3. Approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM) as Quick Response Sprin-
klers.
5. Approved by the City of New York under MEA 354-01-E.
7. Where Polyester Coated Sprinklers are noted to be UL and C-UL Listed, the sprin-
klers are UL and C-UL Listed as Corrosion Resistant Sprinklers.
. Installed with Style 10 (1/2' NPT) or Style 40 (3/4' NPT) 3/4" Total Adjustment
Recessed Escutcheon, as applicable.
.. Installed with Style 20 (1/2' NPT) or Style 30 (3/4' NPT) 1/2" Total Adjustment
Recessed Escutcheon, as applicable.
... Frame and Deflector only. Listings and approvals apply to color (Special Order).
N/A: Not Available
TABLE A
LABORA TORY LISTINGS AND APPROVALS
2.8 AND 4.2 K-FACTOR SPRINKLERS
held horizontally, a small air bubble
should be present. The diameter of the
air bubble is approximately 1/16 inch
(1,6 mm) for the 1350F/57"C to 3/32
inch (2,4 mm) for the 2860F/1410C
temperature ratings.
A leak tight 1/2 inch NPT sprinkler joint
should be obtained with a torque ot 7
to 14 tUbs. (9,5 to 19,0 Nm). A maxi-
mum of 21 ft. Ibs. (28,S Nm) ot torque
may be used to install sprinklers with
1/2 NPT connections. A leak tight 3/4
TFP171
inch NPT sprinkler joint should be ob-
tained with a torque ot 10 to 20 tUbs.
(13.4 to 26,8 Nm). A maximum of 30
ft.lbs. (40, 7 Nm) of torque is to be used
to install sprinklers with 3/4 NPT con-
nections. Higher levels ot torque may
distort the sprinkler inlet and cause
leakage or impairment of the sprinkler.
Do not attempt to make-up tor insuffi-
cient adjustment in the escutcheon
plate by under- or over-tightening the
sprinkler. Readjust the position ot the
sprinkler fitting to suit.
The Series TY-FRB Pendent and Up-
right Sprinklers must be installed in
accordance with the following instruc-
tions.
Step 1. Pendent sprinklers are to be
installed in the pendent position, and
upright sprinklers are to be installed in
the upright position.
Step 2. With pipe thread sealant ap-
plied to the pipe threads, hand tighten
the sprinkler into the sprinkler fitting.
Step 3. Tighten the sprinkler into the
sprinkler fitting using only the W-Type
6 Sprinkler Wrench (Ref. Figure 13).
With reference to Figures 1, 2, 3, and
4, the W-Type 6 Sprinkler Wrench is to
be applied to the sprinkler wrench
flats.
The Series TV-FRB Recessed Pen-
dent Sprinklers must be installed in
accordance with the following instruc-
tions.
Step A. After installing the Style 10.
20, 30, or 40 Mounting Plate, as appli-
cable, over the sprinkler threads and
with pipe thread sealant applied to the
pipe threads, hand tighten the sprin-
kler into the sprinkler fitting.
Step B. Tighten the sprinkler into the
sprinkler fitting using only the W- Type
7 Recessed Sprinkler Wrench (Ref.
Figure 14). With reference to Figure 1,
2, 3, and 4, the W-Type 7 Recessed
Sprinkler Wrench is to be applied to
the sprinkler wrench flats.
Step C. After the ceiling has been in-
. stalled or the finish coat has been ap-
plied, slide on the Style 10, 20, 30, or
40 Closure over the Series TV-FRS
Sprinkler and push the Closure over
the Mounting Plate until its flange
comes in contact with the ceiling.
TFP171
Page 5 of 8
SPRINKLER FINISH (See Note 8)
K TYPE TEMP. BULB NATURAL I CHROME WHITE'" LEAD
L1aUID BRASS PLATED POL VESTER COATED
135OF/57"C Orange
PENDENT 155OF/68OC Red
(TY3231 ) 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 1,2,3,5
and 175OF179OC Yellow
UPRIGHT 200oF/93OC Green
5.6 (TY3131) 286OF/141OC Blue
1/2"
NPT 135OF/57OC Orange
RECESSED 155OF/68OC Red
PENDENT 1,2,4,5 N/A
(TY3231 )' 175OF179OC Yellow
Figure 9 200oF/93OC Green
135OF/57OC Orange
RECESSED 155OF/68OC Red
PENDENT 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 1,2,4,5 N/A
(TY3231 ).. 175OF179OC Yellow
Figure 10 200oF/93OC Green
135OF/57OC Orange
PENDENT 155OF/68OC Red
(TY4231) 1,2,5
and 175OF179OC Yellow 1,2,3,4,5,6,7
UPRIGHT 200oF/93OC Green
8.0 (TY4131) 286OF/141OC Blue
3/4"
NPT 135OF/57OC Green
RECESSED 155OF/68OC Orange
PENDENT 1,2,4,5 N/A
(TY4231)' 175OFI79OC Red
Figure 11 200oF/93OC Yellow
135OF/57OC Orange
RECESSED 155OF/68OC Red
PENDENT 1,2,3,4,5 N/A
(TY 4231)" 175OF179OC Yellow
Figure 12 200oF/93OC Green
NOTES:
1. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) as Quick Response Sprinklers.
2. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Canada (C-UL) as Quick Response Sprinklers.
3. Approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM) as Quick Response Sprinklers.
4. Approved by the Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB Ref. No. 007k104) as Quick Response Sprinklers; however, the
LPCB does not rate the thermal sensitivity of recessed sprinklers.
5. Approved by the City of New York under MEA 354.01-E.
6. VdS Approved (For details contact Tyco Fire & Building Products, Enschede, Netherlands, Tel. 31-53-428-4444/Fax 31-53-428-3377).
7. Approved by the Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB Ref. No. 094a/06) as Quick Response Sprinklers.
8. Where Polyester Coated and Lead Coated Sprinklers are noted to be UL and C-UL Listed, the sprinklers are UL and C-UL Listed as
Corrosion Resistant Sprinklers. Where Lead Coated Sprinklers are noted to be FM Approved, the sprinklers are FM.Approved as a
Corrosion Resistant Sprinklers.
, Installed with Style 10 (1/2" NPT) or Style 40 (3/4" NPT) 3/4" Total Adjustment Recessed Escutcheon, as applicable.
.. Installed with Style 20 (1/2" NPT) or Style 30 (3/4" NPT) 1/2" Total Adjustment Recessed Escutcheon, as applicable.
... Frame and Deflector only. Listings and approvals apply to color (Special Order).
N/A: Not Available
TABLE B
LABORATORY LISTINGS AND APPROVALS
5.6 AND 8.0 K-FACTOR SPRINKLERS
Page 6 of 8
5/8",1/4'
(15,9",6,4 mm)
2-7/8' OIA. ;l
(73,0 mm)
2-1/4' OIA. -j
(57,2 mm) r I
CLOSURE
SERIES
TY-FRB
314' (19,1 mm)
1/4' (6,4 mm)
MOUNTING
PLATE
1/8'
=rm)
~
1-5/16' (33,3 mm)!-
13/16' (20,6 mm)
FIGURE 5
SERIES TY-FRB RECESSED PENDENT
WITH TWO-PIECE 3/4 INCH TOTAL ADJUSTMENT
STYLE 10 RECESSED ESCUTCHEON
2,8 K-FACTOR, 1/2 INCH NPT
5/8",114'
(15,9",6,4 mm)
2-7/8' OIA. ;l
(73,0 mm)
2-1/4' OIA. -j
(57,2 mm) r I
CLOSURE
3/4' (19,1 mm)
1/4' (6,4 mm)
1-1/4' (31,8 mm)
314' (19,1 mm)
FIGURE 7
SERIES TY-FRB RECESSED PENDENT
WITH TWO-PIECE 3/4 INCH TOTAL ADJUSTMENT
STYLE 10 RECESSED ESCUTCHEON
4.2 K-FACTOR, 1/2 INCH NPT
Care and
Maintenance
The Series TY-FRS Sprinklers must be
maintained and serviced in accord-
ance with the following instructions:
NOTES
Before closing a fire protection system
main control valve for maintenance
work on the fire protection system that
it controls, permission to shut down the
affected fire protection system must be
obtained from the proper authorities
and all personnel who may be affected
by this action must be notified.
Absence of an escutcheon, which is
1/2",1/8'
(12,h3,2 mm)
1
CLOSURE
TFP171
2-7/8' OIA. ;l
(73,0 mm)
2-1/4' OIA. -j
(57,2 mm) r I
1/2' (12,7 mm)
1/4' (6,4 mm)
MOUNTING
PLATE
SERIES
TY-FRB
1-5/16' (33,3 mm)
1-1/16' (27,0 mm)
FIGURE 6
SERIES TY-FRB RECESSED PENDENT
WITH TWO-PIECE 1/2 INCH TOTAL ADJUSTMENT
STYLE 20 RECESSED ESCUTCHEON
2.8 K-FACTOR, 1/2 INCH NPT
1/2",1/8'
(12,h3,2 mm)
1
CLOSURE
2-7/8' OIA. ;l
(73,0 mm)
2-1/4' D1A. -j
(57,2 mm) r I
1/2' (12,7 mm)
1/4' (6,4 mm)
MOUNTING
PLATE
SERIES
TY-FRB
1-1/4' (31,8 mm)
l' (25,4 mm)
FIGURE 8
SERIES TY-FRB RECESSED PENDENT
WITH TWO-PIECE 1/2 INCH TOTAL ADJUSTMENT
STYLE 20 RECESSED ESCUTCHEON
4.2 K-FACTOR, 1/2 INCH NPT
used to cover a clearance hole, may
delay the time to sprinkler operation in
a fire situation.
Sprinklers that are found to be leaking
or exhibiting visible signs of corrosion
must be replaced.
Automatic sprinklers must never be
painted, plated, coated or otherwise
altered after leaving the factory. Modi-
fied sprinklers must be replaced.
Sprinklers that have been exposed to
corrosive products of combustion, but
have not operated, should be replaced
if they cannot be completely cleaned
by wiping the sprinkler with a cloth or
by brushing it with a soft bristle brush.
Care must be exercised to avoid dam-
age to the sprinklers - before, during,
and after installation. Sprinklers dam-
aged by dropping, striking, wrench
twisVslippage, or the like, must be re-
placed. Also, replace any sprinkler that
has a cracked bulb or that has lost
liquid from its bulb. (Ref. Installation
Section).
Frequent visual inspections are rec-
ommended to be initially performed for
corrosion resistant coated sprinklers,
after the installation has been com-
pleted, to verify the integrity of the cor-
rosion resistant coating. Thereafter,
annual inspections per NFPA 25
should suffice; however, instead of in-
specting from the floor level, a random
sampling of close-up visual inspec-
tions should be made, so as to better
determine the exact sprinkler condi-
TFP171
5/8;01/4'
(15,9;06,4 mm)
2-7/8' DIA. ;l
(73,0 mm)
2-1/4' DIA. -j
(57,2 mm) r I
CLOSURE
3/4' (19,1 mm)
1/4' (6,4 mm)
1-1/4' (31,8 mm)
3/4" (19,1 mm)
FIGURE 9
SERIES TY-FRB RECESSED PENDENT
WITH TWO-PIECE 3/4 INCH TOTAL ADJUSTMENT
STYLE 10 RECESSED ESCUTCHEON
5,6 K-FACTOR, 1/2 INCH NPT
5/8;01/4'
(15,9;06,4 mm)
2-7/8' DIA'1l
(73,0 mm)
2-1/4' DIA. ---j
(57,2 mm) -J I
3/4' (19,1 mm)
1/4' (6,4 mm)
CLOSURE
SERIES
TV-FRS
1-5/16" (33,3 mm)
13/16" (20,6 mm)
FIGURE 11
SERIES TY-FRB RECESSED PENDENT
WITH TWO-PIECE 3/4 INCH TOTAL ADJUSTMENT
STYLE 40 RECESSED ESCUTCHEON
8,0 K-FACTOR, 3/4 INCH NPT
tion and the long term integrity of the
corrosion resistant coating, as it may
be affected by the corrosive conditions
present.
The owner is responsible for the in-
spection, testing, and maintenance of
their fire protection system and de-
vices in compliance with this docu-
ment, as well as with the applicable
standards of the National Fire Protec-
tion Association (e.g., NFPA 25), in
addition to the standards of any other
authorities having jurisdiction, The in-
stalling contractor or sprinkler manu-
facturer should be contacted relative to
any questions.
It is recommended that automatic
sprinkler systems be inspected,
tested, and maintained by a qualified
Inspection Service in accordance with
WRENCH RECESS
(END "S" USED FOR
3/4" NPT MODELS)
Page 7 of 8
1/2;01/8"
(12,7;03,2 mm)
2-7/8' DIA. ;1
(73,0 mm)
2-1/4' DIA. -j
(57,2 mm) r I
1/2" (12,7 mm)
1/4" (6,4 mm)
MOUNTING
PLATE
\
MOUNTING
SURFACE
CLOSURE
SERIES
TV-FRS
1-1/4' (31,8 mm)
l' (25,4 mm)
FIGURE 10
SERIES TY-FRB RECESSED PENDENT
WITH TWO-PIECE 1/2 INCH TOTAL ADJUSTMENT
STYLE 20 RECESSED ESCUTCHEON
5.6 K-FACTOR, 1/2 INCH NPT
1/2",1/8'
(12,7;03,2 mm)
1/2" (12,7 mm)
1/4' (6,4 mm)
MOUNTING
PLATE
1 \
MOUNTING
SURFACE
CLOSURE
SERIES
TY-FRS
1-5/16' (33,3 mm)
1-1/16" (27,0 mm)
FIGURE 12
SERIES TY-FRB RECESSED PENDENT
WITH TWO-PIECE 1/2 INCH TOTAL ADJUSTMENT
STYLE 30 RECESSED ESCUTCHEON
8,0 K-FACTOR, 3/4 INCH NPT
WRENCH
RECESS
~D
WRENCH RECESS
(END "A" USED FOR
1/2" NPT MODELS)
PUSH WRENCH
IN TO ENSURE
ENGAGEMENT
WITH SPRINKLER
WRENCHING AREA
FIGURE 13
W- TYPE 6 SPRINKLER
WRENCH
FIGURE 14
W- TYPE 7 RECESSED
SPRINKLER WRENCH
local requirements and/or national
codes.
Page 8 of 8
PIN 57 - XXX - X - XXX
I I
~ MODEUSIN
330 2.8K UPRIGHT (1/2"NPT) TYl131
331 2.8K PENDENT (1/2"NPT) TY1231
340 4.2K UPRIGHT (1/2"NPT) TY2131
341 4.2K PENDENT (1/2"NPT) TY2231
370 5.6K UPRIGHT (1/2"NPT) TY3131
371 5.6K PENDENT (1/2"NPT) TY3231
390 8.0K UPRIGHT (3/4"NPT) TY4131
391 8.0K PENDENT (3/4"NPT) TY4231
TEMPERATURE
RATING
SPRINKLER
135 135OF/57OC
NATURAL BRASS 155 155OF/68OC
WHITE POLYESTER 175 175OF/79OC
WHITE (RAL9010)" 200 200oF/93OC
CHROME PLATED 286 286OF/141OC
4
3
9
7 LEAD COATED
TFP171
. Eastern Hemisphere sales only.
TABLE C
PART NUMBER SELECTION
SERIES TY-FRB PENDENT AND UPRIGHT SPRINKLERS
Limited
Warranty
Products manufactured by Tyco Fire
Products are warranted solely to the
original Buyer for ten (10) years
against defects in material and work-
manship when paid for and properly
installed and maintained under normal
use and service. This warranty will ex-
pire ten (10) years from date of ship-
ment by Tyco Fire Products. No war-
ranty is given for products or
components manufactured by compa-
nies not affiliated by ownership with
Tyco Fire Products or for products and
components which have been subject
to misuse, improper installation, corro-
sion, or which have not been installed,
maintained, modified or repaired in ac-
. cordance with applicable Standards of
the National Fire Protection Associa-
tion, and/or the standards of any other
Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Mate-
rials found by Tyco Fire Products to be
defective shall be either repaired or
replaced, at Tyco Fire Products' sole
option. Tyco Fire Products neither as-
sumes, nor authorizes any person to
assume for it, any other obligation in
connection with the sale of products or
parts of products. Tyco Fire Products
shall not be responsible for sprinkler
system design errors or inaccurate or
incomplete information supplied by
Buyer or Buyer's representatives.
IN NO EVENT SHALL TYCO FIRE
PRODUCTS BE LIABLE, IN CON-
TRACT, TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR
UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THE-
ORY, FOR INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO LABOR CHARGES, RE-
GARDLESS OF WHETHER TYCO
FIRE PRODUCTS WAS INFORMED
ABOUT THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES, AND IN NO EVENT
SHALL TYCO FIRE PRODUCTS' LI-
ABILITY EXCEED AN AMOUNT
EQUAL TO THE SALES PRICE.
THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS
MADE IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED. INCLUDING WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
EJlSE...
Ordering
Procedure
(,YWt/:~Qt:~!)l;1n local distributor for avail-
ab lllt\t)ndicate the
fulr'product
name. Refer to
the Price List for
complete listing
of Part Numbers.
Sprinkler Assemblies with NPT
Thread Connections:
Specify: (Specify Model/SIN), Quick
Response, (specify K-factor), (specify
temperature rating), Series TY-FRB
(specify Pendent or Upright) Sprinkler
with (specify type of finish or coating),
PIN (specify from Table C).
Recessed Escutcheon:
Specify: Style (specify) Recessed Es-
cutcheon with (specify finish), PIN
(specify).
1/2' (15 mm)
Style 10
Chrome Plated....... ..... PIN 56-701-9-010
White Coated.... ......... PIN 56-701-4-010
White RAl9010... ......... PIN 56-701-3-010
Brass Plated.... ... ....... PIN 56-701-2-010
1/2" (15 mm)
Style 20
Chrome Plated... ....... .. PIN 56-705-9-010
White Coated... .......... PIN 56-705-4-010
White RAl9010' . . ......... PIN 56-705-3-010
Brass Plated..... ......... PIN 56-705-2-010
3/4" (20 mm)
Style 30
Chrome Plated. . . . . . . . . . .. PIN 56-705-9-011
White Coated. . . . . . . . . . . .. PIN 56-705-4-011
White RAl9010. . . . . . . . . . .. PIN 56-705-3-011
Brass Plated. . . . . . . . . . . . .. PIN 56-705-2-011
3/4" (20 mm)
Style 40
Chrome Plated... ......... PIN 56-700-9-010
White Coated.... .. ....... PIN 56-700-4-010
White RAl9010. . . . . . . . . . .. PIN 56-700-3-010
Brass Plated. ... . ......... PIN 56-700-2-010
. Eastern Hemisphere sales only.
Sprinkler Wrench:
Specify: W-Type 6 Sprinkler Wrench,
PIN 56-000-6-387.
Specify: W-Type 7 Sprinkler Wrench,
PIN 56-850-4-001.
TYCO FIRE PRODUCTS, 451 North Cannon Avenue, Lansdale, Pennsylvania 19446
TECHNICAL
"
SeD \or ~~ Mctt'n'oV)
~ 2-2> C lfh S+
tt- 01-- 243
\'V\
LvvlbeX)
~
5 VV\1~
I) '~~15
_ J ~ 7 f~ ~5
~'MW oLf-lbrOg
- __ I
----------------
I
\At
~
ft\
~
3
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
Port Angeles Senior Services
and Community Center Addition
for
the City of Port Angeles
~
,
~
\A
f\l{
Lindberg & Smith Architects ~,
319 S. Peabody, Suite B , I
Port Angeles, W A 98362
,
~
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 - BIDDING INFORMATION
Section 00010 - Pre-Bid Information
00020 - Invitation to Bid
00100 - Instructions to Bidders
AlA Document A 701
00120 - Supplementary Instructions to Bidders
Overtime Codes
Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates
00300 - Bid Forms
00400 - Supplements to Bid Forms
00430 - Statement of Proposed Subcontractors & Major Material Suppliers
00500 - Form of Agreement
AlA Document Al 0 1
00700 - General Conditions
AlA Document A201
00800 - Supplementary Conditions
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01100 - Summary
01250 - Contract Modification Procedures
Request for Information Form
AlA Document G701 - Change Order
01290 - Payment Procedures
AlA Document G702 - Application and Certification for Payment
AlA Document G703 - Continuation Sheet
AlA Document G706 - Payment of Debts and Claims
AlA Document G706A - Release of Liens
AlA Document G707 - Consent of Surety
Retainage Percentage Form
Retainage Bond Form
01310 - Project Management and Coordination
01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
o 1600 - Product Requirements
Substitution Request Form
01700 - Execution Requirements
01770 - Closeout Procedures
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
Section 02230 - Site Clearing
02300 - Earthwork
02751 - Cement Concrete Pavement
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
DIVISION 5 - METALS
Section 05120 - Structural Steel
05500 - Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TC-I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry
06200 - Finish Carpentry
06402 - Interior Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07115 - Bituminous Dampproofing
07190 - Water Repellents
07210 - Building Insulation
07540 - Metal Roofing
07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
07920 - Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS
Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames
08211 - Flush Wood Doors
08550 - Steel Windows
08800 - Glazing
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
09511 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings
09651 - Resilient Floor Tile
09680 - Carpet
09912 - Painting
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALITIES
Section 10520 - Fire-Protection Specialties
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
16075 - Electrical Identification
16120 - Conductors and Cables
16130 - Raceways and Boxes
16140 - Wiring Devices
16410 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
16442 - Panelboards
16461 - Dry-type Transformers (600 V and Less)
16511 - Interior Lighting
16715 - Voice and Data Communication Cabling
16722 - Intercommunication Equipment
16785 - Master Antenna Television System
APPENDIX
A-
Geotechnical Investigation and Evaluation
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TC-2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
DIVISION OO-BIDDING INFORMATION
SECTION 00 010 - PRE-BID INFORMATION
SECTIONOO 020 - INVITATION TO BID
Notice is hereby giVS~' of Port Angeles and Lindberg & Smith Architects, Inc, P.S., will re 've seale
bids until 12:00 noo --------------- the office of the Port Angeles Public Works Department, locate at ----------,
Port Angeles, Washin Id bids will be publicly opened at 12:00 noon and read aloud at the 'strict Boar
Room. The Bid will include, but not limited to the following:
A general contract which includes, but is not limited to, selective demolition, site work, general construction,
mechanical, and electrical work as required for completion of the work shown on the drawings and in the project
manual for construction of a two-story addition to the existing senior services building.
Bidding documents for the work are those prepared by Lindberg & Smith Architects, Inc., P.S., 319 South Peabody,
Suite B, Port Angeles, Washington.
Bona fide Bidders may obtain two sets ONLY at the office of the Architect, upon refundable deposit of a check
made payable to the Architect in the amount of $200.00 per set; return of deposit to be in accordance with industry
standards. Bid sets will be mailed upon request and after receipt of a $20.00 shipping and handling fee.
Deposit for documents will be refunded to bona fide bidders upon return of the documents in good condition to the
Architect's office WITHIN 10 DAYS AFTER RECEIPT OF BIDS. There will be no refund for the return of
additional sets, parts of sets, or sets not in good condition. Plan holders who do not submit a bona fide bid and do
not return the documents on or before the day and prior to the time set for opening bids will forfeit the full amount of
their deposits.
Should a bidder wish additional sets, or parts of sets, he may obtain them by paying the cost of reproduction thereof,
plus handling and mailing costs, with no refund for the additional sets or parts thereof. Payment MUST be made
when print(s) is obtained.
Bidding documents will also be available for examination during the bidding period at the office of the Architect, as
well as the following Plan Centers:
Oregon Contractor Plan Center
14625 SE 82nd Drive
Portland, OR
Construction Data News
800 S. Michigan
Seattle, W A
Associated Subcontractors
3312 South Union Ave.
Tacoma, W A
Construction Data News
4803 Pacific HWY East
Tacoma, W A
Daily Journal of Commerce
P.O. Box 10127
Portland, OR
Construction Market Data Builders Exchange
10504 N.E. 37th Circle 2607 Wetmore Ave.
Kirkland, W A Everett, W A
Bids shall be marked on the outside of a sealed envelope: "BID OPENING - Music Building for Stevens Middle
School"
The Owners reserve the right to reject any or all bids received, to award bids based on long term cost analyses, and
to waive informalities in the bidding.
END OF SECTION 00 010
Bidding Information
00-1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. Contents:
a. See accompanying American Institute of Architects, A.l.A. Document A 701, Instructions to
Bidders, 1997 Edition, Pages 1 through 6.
b. See accompanying American Institute of Architects, A.l.A. Document A-20 1, General Conditions
of the Contract for Construction.
b. Modifications to the Standard AlA Document are contained in Section 00 120 "Supplementary
Instructions to Bidders".
Bidding Information
00-2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
00 120 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
I. Add the following to the 1997 Edition of the Instructions to Bidders, AlA Document No. A 70 I:
a. Article 3, Bidding Documents:
I) Paragraph 3.3, Substitutions
a) Add to Paragraph 3.3.3 as follows:
Should any proposed product substitution require any re-design work,
by the Architect or his consultants, to accommodate the substitute
product, costs for such re-design work shall be included in the Bid
amount and shall be paid to the Architect at his usual rates for the time
expended in the required re-design work.
2) Paragraph 3.4 Addenda:
a) In Paragraph 3.4.3, first sentence, change words "four days" to read "three days".
3) Paragraph 3.18 Indemnification
a) Add 3.18.4 Indemnification
The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the District, its
officers, officials, employees and volunteers harmless from any and all
claims, injuries, damages, losses or suits including attorney fees, arising
out of or in connection with the performance of this Agreement, except
for injuries and damages caused by the sole negligence of the District.
4) Paragraph 3.18 Indemnification
a) Add 3.18.5 Waiver of Title 51 Immunity
Should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this Agreement
is subject to RCW 4.24.115, then, in the event of liability for damages arising out of
bodily injury to persons or damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or damages to
property caused by or resulting from the concurrent negligence of the Contractor and the
District, its officers, officials, employees, and volunteers, the Contractor's liability
hereunder shall be only to the extent of the Contractor's negligence. It is further
specifically and expressly understood that the indemnification provided herein constitutes
the Contractor's waiver of immunity under Industrial Insurance. Title 51 RCW, solely for
the purposes of this indemnification. This waiver has been mutually negotiated by the
parties. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this
Agreement.
b. Article 4, Bidding Procedures
1) Paragraph 4.2.1
a) Delete subparagraph 4.2.1 and substitute the following:
Each bid submitted by the Contractor, shall be accompanied by bid
security in the form ofa bid bond payable to the Port Angeles School District No. 121,
for an amount equal to at least five percent of the base bides) plus additive alternates,
pledging that the Bidder will enter into Contract with the District on the terms stated in
the Bid and will, within seven (7) days following acceptance of the proposal by the
District, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of
all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or
fail to furnish such bonds, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the District
as liquidated damages, not as a penalty.
c. Article 5, Consideration of Bids:
I) Paragraph 5.2 Rejection of Bids
a) Add to paragraph 5.2 as follows:
The Owner at his discretion may determine that a bidder is not responsible and
reject his proposal for any of the following reasons.
a) More than one proposal on the same project from a bidder under the same or
different names.
Bidding Information
00-3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
b) Evidence of collusion with any other bidder, or bidders.
c) If a bidder is not qualified for the work involved or to the extent of his bid.
d) Unsatisfactory performance record judged from the standpoint of conduct of
work, workmanship, or progress as shown by past or current work for the Owner.
e) Uncompleted work, whether for the Owner or otherwise, which might hinder or
prevent the prompt completion of the work bid upon.
f) Failure to payor settle bills for labor or materials on any former or current
contracts.
g) Any other inability, financial or otherwise, to perform the work.
h) A bidder is not licensed and authorized to do business in the State of
Washington.
i) For any other reasons deemed proper as determined from a pre-award survey of
bidder's capability to perform.
2) Paragraph 5.3 Acceptance of Bid (award)
a) Add 5.3.3. The Owner shall have the right to determine the lowest responsible
Bidder.
d. Article 7, Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond:
1) Paragraph 7.1, Bond Requirements
a) Add to Subparagraph 7.1.1:
Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond will be
required by the Owner prior to execution of the Agreement, in the
amounts and in form as set forth in Section 22 of the General
Conditions. Costs therefore shall be included in the Base Bid.
e. Article 8, Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor:
1) The Form of Agreement shall be AlA Document A 10 1, 1997 Edition.
END OF SECTION 00 120
Bidding Information
00-4
IU
I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
00 300 BID FORMS
~geleS School.District 121
Clition
Port Angeles, W A
Having carefully examined the Project Manual and the Drawings, as well as the premises and conditions affecting
the work, the Undersigned states he has the means to complete the work and proposes to furnish all labor and
materials and to perform all work required by and in strict accordance with the above-named documents for the
following sums:
I. Base Bid:
a. For the Base Bid as defined in the Project Manual, the following sum of:
Dollars
-0
($ ).
b I'-~d.. ~/hAlI.""" J2.~I:l~e-}\'N(.o tr7 A- .5~~ TedD ,nnn.
2. Sales Tax:
a. None of the above bid prices shall include State Sales Tax.
b.
3.
4. Contract & Bond:
a. If the Undersigned is notified of the acceptance of this bid within 30 days after the time set for
opening bids, he agrees to execute a contract for the above sums, and to furnish performance,
payment and maintenance bonds as required by the Project Manual.
5. Bid Guarantee:
a. The Undersigned further agrees that the check or bid bond accompanying this bid shall be left in
escrow with the Owner, that its amount of penal sum is the measure of damages which the Owner
will sustain by the failure of the Undersigned to execute said agreement and bonds; and that if the
Undersigned fails to deliver the said documents within 7 days after written notice of the award of
the contract to him, then the check shall become the property of the Owner or the bid shall remain
in full effect. Bid guarantee shall be 5% of Base bid plus Additive Alternates.
If this bid is not accepted within 30 days after the time set for opening bids, or if the Undersigned
delivers said contract and bonds, then the check shall be returned or the bid bond shall become
void.
Bidding Information
00-5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
6. Addenda:
a. Receipt of Addenda numbered is hereby acknowledged, and all costs of the
work therefore have been included in the Form of Proposal.
7. Prevailing Wage Rate Schedule:
a. The Contractor stipulated and agrees that he has reviewed the applicable prevailing wage rate
schedule and has made appropriate provisions in the submitted bids for payment of these
prevailing wage rates.
Contractors Initials
Bidder:
Street Address:
City, State, Zip:
Telephone: (
)
By:
State of Washington Contractor's License No.:
Contractor's License Expiration Date:
Give State of Incorporation:
Contractor's V.B.!. No.:
END OF SECTION 00 300
Bidding Information
00-6
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
00 400 SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS
00430 STATEMENT OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS & MAJOR MATERIAL SUPPLIERS
Each bidder must provide a list of sub contractors as required below. The list must be provided with this proposal or
within the time requirements as specified in Invitations to Bid. Each Bidder must supply a list identifying every
subcontractor whose subcontract amount will be more than ten percent (10%) of the contract price and description of
the Work. Those categories of work which are expected to be more than ten percent (10%) of the contract price, and
for which the Contractor is to do the work itself must be noted. Failure to comply with this requirement shall render
the bid void; and the owner shall not accept the bid.
NAME & ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION OF WORKlMA TERIAL
END OF SECTION 00 400
Bidding Information
00-7
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
00500 FORM OF AGREEMENT
1. Contents:
a. See accompanying sample American Institute of Architects, AlA Document A 10 I, "Standard form
of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor", 1997 Edition, Pages I through 5.
b. This Document is for sample use only. Refer to Section 00 100, "Instructions to Bidders."
END OF SECTION 00 500
Bidding Information
00-8
.11
]
:]
]
]
J
J
J
J
J
J
1997 Edition -Electronic Format
AlA Document A 101-1991
. .
Standard Form of Agreement. Between Owner and Contractor
where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM
AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year of
(In Words. indicate day, monUJ and year)
BETWEEN the Owner:
(Name, address and other informat.ion)
and the Contractor:
(Name, address and other information)
The Project is: .
(Name and location)
The Architect is:
(Name, address and other information)
The Owner and Contractor agree as follows.
ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General,
Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to .
execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications
issued aft~r execution of this Agreement; these fqrm the Contract, and are as fully a part of the
Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the
entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,
representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract
Documents, other than Modifications, appears in Article 8.
J
.J
J
J
I
';'J
ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT.
The Contractor shall fully execute the W o~k described in the Contract Documents, except to
the extent specifically ilidicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others.
ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a
different date is Stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed
issued by the Owner.
(hlsert the date of commencement if it differs /ivm the dille of this Agreement OJ; if applicable, state that. the dat.e wiD
be fixed in a notice t.o proceed) . , .
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEOUENCq. CONSULTATION WITH
AN ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFI0TION.Au,r.f!ENnCATION OF
THIS ELECTRON/CAll YDRAFTED .AlA
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401. ..' '. .
AlA Document AlOI-7997, G~n~ral
Conditions of the Contract for .
Cohstrudion, is adopted. in this do~ument
by reference. Do not USe with -Other
general conditions 'unless this apeument is
moc/ified.
. This document has been approved and
e~orsed by The Associated General
Contradors of America.
.~
":;... . - e.:':
...... ...
-
01997 AIAlIi)
AlA DOCUMENT A10l-i997
OWNER~ONTRACTOR AGREEMENT
If, prior to the commencement of the Work. the Owner requires time to file mortgages,
I d th th' h 11 The American Institute of Architects
mechanic s liens an 0 er security interests, e Owner s time requirement s a be as follows:
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
J
!
0:)'
(9 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, (!:) 1997 by The American InstItute ot
Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or su.bstantial quotation of its provisions without written
permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal
prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US copyright laws and will subject the
violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with pennission of the AlA and
can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted
below. User Document: 97a10l.aia.- 10/28/2003. AlA License Number 1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
1
J
.r-
3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement.
:r
i
i
3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than
days from the date of commencement, or as follows:
(IBsert 11wnber of ca!eJ1dar days. Altematively, a ca!elldar date may be used when coordiJJated with the date of
commeJ1cement. Unless stated elsewbere j11 tile Contract Documents, insert any requirements for earlier Substantial,
Completion of certain portions of the Work) -' - -_ -- .
,0-
l
.~ ~.'
:1...:."
f
ARTICLE 4 CONTRAcT SUM
4.1 The OWner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the
Contractor's performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be Dollars ($ ), subject to
additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents.
, subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. .
(Insert provisions, if any, for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete on time or for bonus payments for THIS DOCUM.ENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
early completion of the Work) CONSEQUENCES. CONSuLTAriq"fWITH.
AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH -
RESPEa TO ITS. COMPLETIOl'{OR .,', _.
MODIFICA TlON. AUTHENTlCI)r'b~ ot_
THIS ELEITRONlCAU Y DRAFTED All'. --
DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT D40T.
f .
I
(
.f .
1
-i
All'. Document A201-T997, General -
Conditions of the Contract for
~.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described Construdion, is adopted in this document
m the ~ontract D.ocum~nts. and. are hereby accepted by th: .Owner: by reference. Do not use withother
(State the numbers or other identj5calJon. of accepted alternates. If declSlons on otiler alternates are to J:e made by the general conditions urJess this docUment is
Owner subsequeJ1t to the execution of tins Agreement, attacb a schedule of such Otiler alternates showmg the amount d'F:ed
for each and the date when that amount expires) mo II .
1
,
L
4.3
Unit prices, if any, are as follows:
This document has been approved and,
endorsed by The Asso~iated dlmerai _ - .
Contractors of America.
-,.
, .
'.-
ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS
5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor
and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments
on account of the Contract Sum to theContraetor as provided below and elsewhere in the
Contract Documents.
5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month
ending on the last day of the month, or as follows:
5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than.
the day of ~ month, the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not later than the day of ~
the month. If ~ Application for Payment is received by the. Architect after the application ~ate .
fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than days after the Architect ~
receives the Application for Payment. ~
...."!I:., ,_
.....~ ......
5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values ............-
submitted py the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of -
values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work. The
schedule of values sh~ll be prepare~ in suc~ form and supported.by such data to subs~antiate its ~;7...7 ~;~UMENT A10l-1997 .
accuracy as the .Arch1tec~ m.ay requITe. ThiS s7hedul~, u~ess objected to by the Architect, shall OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT-
be used as a basiS for reVlewmg the Contractor s Applications for Payment.. . .
The AmeriCan Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
~~
: I
_~J
5.1.5 Appli,cations for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion
of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment.
I
,~ .:J
@ 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, @ 1997 by The American Institute ot
Architects. Reproductjon of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written
permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal
prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US copyright laws and will subject the
violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and
can be reproduced in accordance with your Ikense without violation until the date of expiration as noted
below. User Document: 97a101.aia - 10/28/2003. AlA License Number 1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
2
\
."J!
I
I
~JJ
I
.-f
-1
J
:ij
-~
dij
-~
]j.
~~
J
]
J
J
J
Y
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress
payment shall be computed as follows: .
.1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Worle as
deterinined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Worle by
the share of the Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the scht;dule of
values, less retainage of percent ( %). Pending final determination of cost to the
Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute shall be included as provided
in Subparagraph 7.3.8 of AIA Document .A20l-l997.
... THiS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTAtiON WITH .
delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed AN ATtORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
location agreed upqn in writing), less retainage.of percent ( %); MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICAnON OF
THIS ELECTRON/~ Y DRAFTED AlA
.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT D401.
.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a AlA Document A201-1997, General
Certificate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5 of AIA DocUment .A20l-1997. Conditions of the Contract for
Construdion, is adopted in this document
5.1.7. The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Subparagraph 5-1.6 by reference. Do not use with other .
'shall be further modified under the following circumstances: general conditions urless this document is
modified.
.1
Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total
payments to the full amount of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect
shall detemiine for incomplete Work, retainage applicable to such worle and unsettled
claims; and
(Suf?paragraph !J.BS of AlA Documellt A20H.9.97 requires release of apphCable retallJage upon Subsl3ntial
ComplefioJl of Work widJ C(}llsent of surety; if any.)
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
Contradors of America.
.2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault
of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph
9.10.3 of AIA Document ~oH997.
5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows:
(Ilit is intended, prior to SubstalJtial Colllpleti(}lJ of the eJltire Work, to reduce or limit the retainage resulting fivm
the percentages i1Jserted in Clauses 5.L6.1 and 5J.6.2 above, fwd this is lJOt explained elsewhere in dle ColJtract
Doannebts, insert bere provisions for such reductiOlJ or limitation.)
5.1.9 Except with the Owner's prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance
payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at
the site.
-~
... ,"
~~ - .....
...... . - ......
.. or....-a ...
-
5.2 FINAL PAYMENT
5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be
made by the Owner to the Contractor when:
.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's
responsibility to correct Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of AlA Document
. .A2.0l-1997, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final
payment; and
<01997 AIAClil
AlA DOCUMENT !\ 101-1997
OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT
.2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
5.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follows:
(Q 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 19~7, (Q 1997 by The Amencan Institute ot
Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written
permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal
prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US copyright laws and will subject the
violator to legal prosecl!tion. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and
can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted
below. User Document: 97a101.aia -10/28/2003. AlA License Number 1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
. 3
. - th.J.1 - 1. . . . " __J: 1 NA Document A201-1997, General
Usury laws alld reqwrements wIder e Feuer3J Trot 1 JJI LendJJJg Act, SJInlJar state and local consumer crcr.ut Jaws and Conditions of th - C t ct f r
otlIer regulatioJJs at tlIe Owners alld CoJltractors prillcipai places of bus mess, tbe locatiOJI of the Project and elsewhere .. . e on ra. o.
may affect tbe vah(jity of tbis provisioJJ. Legai advice should be obwJied with respeclto deletions or modificatioJIS, ConstructIon, IS adopted In !hls document
and also regarding requiremellls such as written disdosures or waivers.} by.reference. Do. not use WIth other
general conditions unless this document is
modified. .
ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION
6.1 The Contract may be terminat~d by the Owner or the C"ontractor as provided ill
Article 14 of AIA Document A20l-1997. .
6.2 The Work may be suspended by the QWner as provided in Article 1.4 of.AlA Document
A20l-1997. -
ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS. " . " ..
7.1 Where reference is made ill this Agreement to a provision of.AlA Document A201-1997
or another Contract Document, the reference - refers to. that provision as amended or
supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents.
7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date
payment is due at the rate stated below, orin the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing
from time to time at the place where the Project is located.
(Insert rate ofillterest agreed upon, if any.) "
7.3 The Owner's representative is:
(Name, address and other iIllOnnalion)
7.4 The Contractor's representative is:
(Name, address alJd other llJformatiolJ)
7.5 Neither the Owner's nor the Contractor's representative shall be changed without ten
days written notice to the other party. "
7.6 Other provisions:
ARTICLE 8 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
8.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this
Agreement, are enumerated as follows:
8.1.1 The Agreement is this executed 1997 edition of the Standard Form of Agreement"
Between Owner and Contractor, .AlA Document AIOl-l997.
8.1.2 The General.Conditions are the 1997 edition of the General Conditions of the
Contract for Construction, AIA Document .A2Ol-1997.
8.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the
Project Manual dated ) and are as follows:
Document
. Title
Pages
,-
,
.f
.J.,
r
.f" .
THIS DOCUMENT HASIMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTAT.ION WITH
AN AtTORNpr ISENC,?URAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHEtJTlCATlON OF
THIS ELECTRONiCALLY DRAFTED NA
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING NA
.DOCUMENT D401.
,
.;
.~ ...
..
,-
This document has been approved and
.endorsed by The Assodated General
Contractors of America.
".i
:,
J,
.i
,.:..
-~
-... ,"
~~ .~
..... . - .....
. "'.......
-
""
101997 AfA@
AlA DOCUMENT A101-1997
OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT
:-:'..-
The American Institute of Architects
8.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in. 1735h~ew York Avenue, N.W.
Was mgton, D.C. 20006-5292
Subparagraph 8.1.3. and are as follows:
(Either h'st tile SpecificatiolJs lIere or refer to an exhibit attaclIed to tiJis Agreement)
@ 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, @ 1997 by The American InstItute at
Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written
permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal.
prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US copyright laws and. will subject the
violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and
can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted
below. User Document: 97alO1.aia - 10128/2003. AlA license Number 1001907, which expires on 212912004.
4
- "
AlA Document A201-1997, General
Conditions of the Contrad for
. . ' Construdion, is adopted in this document
8.1. 7 Other documents, if any, formmg part of the Contract Documents are as follo:ws: by reference. Do not use with other
(List here ;my additional docUJ11ents that are intended to form part. of the Contrad Documents. AlA Document A20l- general conditions unless this document is
:1.9.97 provides tlult bidding requirenlents such as advertiSeJ11ent or iJlvitation to bid, InstrUctions to Bidders, sample modified '
forms and the Contradors bid are ,not part. of the Contract DocUJ11ents unless enumerated in this Agreement. TIley .
should beh"sted hereonlyifinteJlded tobepart of the Contract Documents.) . .J h b d d
ThIS uocument as een approve an
endorsed by The Assodated General
ContradOf:s of America.
']
'.]
']
,~
Title
Pages
Section
8.1.5 The Drawings are as follows, and are dated unless a different datds shown below:
(Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to tllls Agreement.)
Title
Number
Date
:~.~
8.1.6 The Addenda, if any, are as follows:
Number Date
Pages
'-I
.J
Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract pocuments
unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 8.
,~:"]
'J
~.-
'J'
',-
This Agreement -is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at
least three original copies, of which ~>ne is to be delivered to the Contractor, one to the
Architect for use in the administration of the Contract, and the remainder to the Owner.
"]"
...-
CONTRACTOR {Signature}
OWNER {Signature}
'J
{Pnnted name and title}
{Printed name and title}
J
J
J
J
J
.J @ 1915, 1918. 1925, 1937, 1951. 1958, 1961. 1963. 1967, 1974, 1977. 1987, @ 1997 by The American Institute ot
Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written
t permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United ~tates and will subject the violator to legal
) prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US copyright laws and will subject the
:' violator to legal prosecution. This document was electron ically produced with perm ission 'of the AlA and
I can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted
I J b,low. U.., Doc"m,n" .7.lD1..', -lD/2812D03. AlA Licon.. N"mbe, 'DO'907, whkh "p"" on ,/2./2D04.,
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTAnON WITH
AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAG~D WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETIOf:/ OR
MODIFICAnON., AUTHENTICATION OF
THIS ELECTRONIC ALL Y DRAFTED NA
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING NA
DOCUMENT 0401.
.~.
~'J:tli.
...... . - .....
, .... ...
~
Cl1997 AIACil
AlA DOCUMENT A10l-1997
OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
.~ . .. '.: . ".'i .'
.F
:\
I~
,
. -
'" , .
!~
'~~
{~~
~
!! '
:1...
~]
~
J
:..~
"1
...~
.J
.,~
,J
]
"'J
0,
J
'J
J
J
J
..J
OJ
J
J
J
1997 Edition - Electronic Format
AlA Document AlOl - 1997
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.
TABLE OF ARTICLES
1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
2. OWNER
THIS DOCUMENT' HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENT'ICATlOf:J OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This document has been appr()v~d ~nd
endorsed by The Assodated General
Contradors of America.
3. CONTRACTOR
4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
5.' SUBCONTRACTORS
6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
7. CHANGES IN THE WORK
8. TIME
9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
11. INSURANCE AND BONDS
12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
INDEX
Acceptance of Nonconforming Work
9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3
Acceptance of Work . .
9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3, 9.10;1, 9.10.3, 12.3
Access to Work . .
3.16, 6.2.1,12.1
Accident Prevention
4-2.3, 10
Acts and Omissions
3.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,4.4.1,8.3.1,
9.5.1,10.2.5,1342, 13.7, 14.1
Addenda .
1.1.1, 3.n
Additional Costs, ClainIs for
4-3.4, 4-3.5, 4.3.6, 6.1.1,10.3
Additional Inspections and Testing
9.8.3,12.2.1,13.5
Additional T,ime, ClainIs for
4-3.4, 4-3.7, 8.3.2
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
3.1.3, 4,9-4,9.5
Advertisement or Invitation to Bid
1.1.1
~..
~.. . - .-:
..;r.1k...
-
01997 AIAIij)
AlA DOCUMENT A201- 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 19907 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation.until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
Aesthetic Effect
4-2.13,4-5.1
Allowances
3.8
All-risk Insurance
11.4-1.1
Applications for Payment
4-2.5,7.3.8,9.2,9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7.1,9.8.5,
9.10, 11.1.3, 14-2-4, 14-4.3
Approvals
2.4,3-1.,3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 3.12, 4-2.7, 9.3.2, 1342,
13.5
Arbitration
4.3.3,4-4, 4-5.1, 4.5.2, 4.6, 8.3.1, 9.7.1, 11-4-9,
11.4.10
Architect
4.1
Architect, Definition of
4-Ll
.Architect, Extent of Authority
2.4,3.12.7,4-2,4-3.6,4.4,5.2,6.3,7.1.2,7.3.6,
7-4,9.2,9.3.1,9.4, 9.5, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3,12.1,
12.2.1, 13.5.1,13.5.2, 14-2.2, 14-2-4
Architect, Limitations of Authority and
Responsibility .
2.1.1, 3.3-3, 3-12.4, 3.i2.8, 3-12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1,
4.2.2,4-2.3, 4.2.6, 4-2.7, 4.2.10, 4-2.12, 4-2.13,
4-4, 5.2.1, 7-4, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.6
Architect's Additional Services and Expenses
2.4, n.4-U, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4
Architect's Administration of the Contract
3.1.3, 4.2,4.3.4, 4-4, 9-4, 9.5
Architect's Approvals
2.4,3.1.3,3.5.1,3.10.2,4.2.7
Architect's Authority to Reject Work
3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.1.2,12.2.1
Architect's Copyright
1.6
Architect's Decisions
4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4-3.4, 441,
4-4-5,4-4-6,4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1,9.2,
9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1,13.5.2,14.2.2, 14.2-4
Architect's Inspections
4.2.2, 4.2.9, 4.3.4, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Architect's Instructions
3.2.3,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8,7.4-1,12.1,13.5.2
Architect's Interpretations
4-2.11, 4-2.12, 4.3.6
Architect's Project Representative
4-2.10
Architect's Relationship with Contractor
1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3~2.2, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.4.2,
3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.n, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3,
4-2,4-3-4,4-4.1,4-4.7; 5.2, 6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,
9.3,949.5,9.719.8,9.9, 10.2.6,10.3,11.3,
11.4-l, 12,13-4-2, 13.5
Architect's Relationshlp with Subcontractors
1.1.2,4.2.3,4-2.4,4-2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.4.7
,Architect's Representations
9.4-2,9.5.1,9.10.1
Architect's Site VISits
4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9, 4.3.4, 9.4-2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2,
9.10.1,13.5
Asbestos
10.3.1
Attorneys' Fees
3.18.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3
Award of Separate Contracts
6.1.1, 6.1.2
Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for
Portions of the Work
5.2
Basic Defmitions
1.1
Bidding Requirements
1.1.1,1.1.7,5.2.1,11.5.1
Boiler and Machinery Insurance
11.4.2
Bonds, Lien
9.10.2
Bonds, Performance, and Payment.
7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3,11.4.9,11.5
Building Permit
3.7.1
Capitalization
1.3
Certificate of Substantial Completion
9.8.,3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5
Certificates for Payment
4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,
9.10.1,9.10.3,13.7,14.1.1.3,14.2.4
Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval
13.5.4
Certificates of Insurance
9.10.2, 11.1.3
Change Orders
1.1.1,2.4.1,3.4-2,3.8.2.3,3.11.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,
4.3.4, 4-3.9, 5.2.3, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.3.1,9.3.1.1,
9.10.3,11.4.1.2,11.4.4,11.4.9,12.1.2
Change Orders, Definition of
7.2.1
CHANGES IN THE WORK
3.11,4.2.8, 7, 8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 11-4-9
Claim, Definition of
4.3.1
Claims and Disputes
3.2.3,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6, 6.Ll, 6.3, 7.3.8,9.3.3,
9.10.4, 10.3.3
Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims
4.6.5
Claims for Additional Cost
3.2.3,4.3.4, 4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1,7.3.8,10.3.2
Claims for Additional Time
T'f-
F
F
r=
".
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN' .
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPEa TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTlc;ATlON OF THIS
ELEaRONlCALLY DRAFTEDAIA
DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
.~.
This document has been approved and
, endorsed by The Assodated General
Contractors of America.
!, ..
f
,
.t.
"',::-:.
. ;~..
"
- '
~,..~:: 'j
.....; .".'t' ...... I
- "..1
101997 AIA@ I
AlA DOCUMENT A20l-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE ' 'j
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia -- 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
J
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
" ,I
1
'-i~'
"'h
_._-~J
,]
r-h
J
:]
-f!
..J
Ih
I ;J
;]
]
]
J
..J
..1
J
J
..J
3.2.3,4-3.4, 4.3.7, 6.1.1, 8.3.2,10.3.2
Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions
4.3.4
Clalms for Damages
, 3.2.3,3-18, 4-3.10, 6.1.1, 8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7,10.3.3,
11,1.1, ll.4.5, ll.4-7, 14.1.3,14.2.4
Claims Subject to Arbitration
4.4-1,4-5.1,4.6.1
Cleaning l)p .
3.15, 6.3
Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period
13:7
Commencement of the Work, Conditions
Relating to .
2.2.1,3.2.1,3.4:1,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,4.3.5,5.2.1,
5.2.}, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.i, ill, 114~1, 11-4.6,
11.5.1 .
Commencement of the Work, Definition of
8.1.2 .
Communications Facilitating Contract
Administration
3.9.1, 4.2.4
Completion, Conditions Relating to
1.6.1, 3-4-1, 3.ll, 3.15; 4-2.2, 4-2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8,
9:9.1,9.10,12.2,13.7,14.1.2
COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND
9
Completion, Substantial
4.2.9, 8.Ll, 8.1.3, 8.2.}, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.},
9.10-4-2, 12.2, 13.7
Compliance with Laws
1.6.1, 3,2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4-U, 4-4.8,
4.6.4, 4-6.6, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, ILl, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4,
13,5.1,13.5.2,13.6,14.1.1, 14.2.1.3
Concealed or Unknown Conditions
4-3.4, 8.3.1, 10.3
Conditions of the Contract
. 1.Ll, 1.1.7,6.1.1,6.1.4
Consent, Written
1.6,3.4-2, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4-3-4, 4.6.4, 9.3.2,
9.8.5~ 9.9.1,9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY
SEPARATE CONTRACTORS,
l.l.<b 6
Constructi?n Change Directive, Definition of
7.3.1
Construction Change Directj.ves
1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4-3.9, 7.i, 7.3,9.3.1.1
Construction Schedules, Contractor's
1.4.1.2, 3.10, 3-12.1, 3.12.2, 4-3-7.2, 6.1.3
Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts
5.4; 14.2.2.2
Continuing Contract Performance
4.3.3
Contract, Definition of
1
J
.J
.J
1.1.2
CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR
SUSPENSION OF THE
5.4.1.1, 114.:9, 14
Contract Administration
3.1.3,4,9.4, 9.5 '
Contract Award and Execution, Conditions
Relating to
3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1,11.1.3,11.4.6,11.5.1
Contract Documents, The
1.1, 1.2
Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use
of
'1.6, 2.2.5, 5.3
Contract Documents, Definition of
U.l
Contract Sum
3.8,4.3.4,4-3.5,4-4-5,5.2.3,7.2,7.3,7.4,9.1,
9-4.2, 9.5-L4, 9.6.7, 9.7,10.3.2,11.4-1, 14-2-4,
14.3.2
Contract Sum, Definition of
9.1
Contract Time
4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4-4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3, 7.4, 8.1.1,
8.2, 8.3.1, 9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 12.Ll, 14-3-2
Contract Time, Definition of
8.1.1
CONTRACTOR
3
Contractor, Definition of
3.1, 6.1.2
Contractor's Construction Schedules
1.4-1.2, 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4-3.7.2, 6.1.3
Contractor's Employees
3-3.2,3-4-3,3.8.1,3-9,3.18.2,4-2.3,4-2.6,10.2,
10.3, 11.Ll, 11-4-7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1,
Contractor's Liability Insurance
11.1
Contractor's Relationship with Separate
Contractors and Owner's Forces
3.12.5,3.14.2,4-2.4, 6, 11-4-7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4
Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors
1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2,
11.4-1.2, n.4.7, lL4-B
Contractor's Relationship with the Architect
1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.3-1, 3-4-2,
3.5.1,3.7.3,3-10, 3.n, 3-12, 3.16, 3.18, ~p.2, 4.1.3,
4.2, 4-3.4, 4.4-1, 4.4.7, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2,
9.3,9.4,9.5,9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 1O.}, 11.3,
ll-4.7, 12, 13-4.2, 13.5
Contractor's Representations
1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2
Contractor's Responsibility for Those
Performing the Work
3.3-2,3.18, 4.2.J, 4.3.8, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3,9.5.1,
10
>>Copyright, 1911, 1915, 191B, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ J997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal'prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/2712003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/2912004.
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA ,
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Contradors of America.
....~~..
.~ ......
-......11."'--
-
101997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OFTHE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C 20006-5292
3
Contractor's Review of Contract Documents
1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3
Contractor's Right to Stop the Work
9.7
Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract
4-3.10, 14.1
Contractor's Submittals
3.10,3.11,3.12,4-2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2,9;3,
9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, n.l.3,11.5.2
Contractor's Superintendent
3.9, 10.2.6
Contractor's Supervision and Construction
Procedures
1.2.2,3.3,3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3,
6.2.4, 7.1.3,7.34,7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12,14
Contractual Liability Insurance
11.1.1.8, 11.2, n.3
Coordination and Correlation
1.2,1.5.2,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6, 6.1.3; 6.2.1
Copies Furnished of Drawings and
Specifications
1.6, 2.2..5, 3.11
Copyrights
1.6,3.17
Correction of Work
2.3, 2..4;"3.7.4, 4.2.1, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1,
12.1.2,12.2,13.7.1.3
Correlation and Intent of the Contract
Documents
1.2
Cost, Definition of
7.3.6
Costs
2.4, 3.2.3, 3.7.4, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 4.3, 54.2,6.1.1,
6.2.3,7.3.3.3,7.3.6,7.3.7,7.3.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.2,
10.5, 11.3, 11.4, 12.1, 12.2.1, 12.2-4, 13.5, 14
Cutting and Patching
6.2.5,3.14
Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate
Contractors
3.14.2,6.2.4, 9.2.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, n.l,
.11.4, 12.2.4
Damage to the Work
3.14.2,9.9.1,10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, n.4, 12.2..4
Damages, Claims for
3.2.3,3.18,4.3-10, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3,
11.1.1, 11.4.5,11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2-4
Damages for Delay
6.1.1,8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3,2
Date of Commencement of the Work,
Definition of
8.1.2
Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of
8.1.3
Day, Definition of
8.1.4
Decisions of the Architect
4-2.6, 4-2.7, 4.2.11, 4-2..12, 4.2.13, 4-3.4, 4.4-1,
4-4.5,4.4-6,4.5,6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1,9.2,
9-4,9.5.1,9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14-2.4
Decisions to Withhold Certification .
9.4-1,9.5,9.7,14-1.1.3
Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance,
Rejection and Correction of
2.3,2.4, 3.5.1, 4-2..6, 6.2.5,9.5.1,9.5.2,9.6.6,
9.8.2,9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3
Defective Work, Definition of
3.5.1
Definitions
1.1, 2..1.1, 3.1, 3.5.1, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1,
4-3.1,5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.3.6, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1
Delays and Extensions of Time
3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4-34, 4.3.7, 4.4-5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1,
7.4.1, 7.P, 8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1,10.3.2, 10.6.1, i4-3.2
Disputes
4.1.4,4-3,4.4, 4.5, 4-6, 6.3,7.3.8
Documents and Samples at the Site
3.11
Drawings, Defmition of
1.1.5
Drawings and Specifications, Use and
Ownership of
1.1.1, 1.3, 2.2.5, 3.11, 5.3
Effective Date of Insurance
8.2.2, n.l.2
Emergencies
4.3.5, 10.6,14.1.1.2
Employees, Contractor's
3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4-2.3, 4-2.6, 10.2,
10.3, 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, .14.2..1.1
Equipment, Labor, Materials and
1.1.3,1.1.6,3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3-13, 3.15.1,
4-2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1, 6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3,
9.5.1.3,9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2..4, 14.2.1.2
Execution and Progress of the Work
1.1.3,1.2.1,1.2.2,2.2.3,2.2.5,3.1,3.3,3.4, 3-5, 3.7,
3.10, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4-3.3, 6.2.2, 7.1.3,
7.3.4, 8.2, 9.5, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3
Extensions of Time
3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4-3.7, 445, P.3, 7.2.1, 7.3,
741,9.5.1,9.7.1,10.3.2,10.6.1,14.3.2
. Failure of Payment
4.3.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2,14.1.1.3,14.2.1.2,13.6
Faulty Work
(See Defective or Nonconforming Work)
Final Completion and Final Payment
4.2.1, 4.2.9, 4-3.2, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1;
11.4.5,12.3.1,13.7,14-24,1443
Financial Arrangements, Owner's
2.2.1, 13-2.2, 14.1.1.5
Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance
n.4
GENERAL PROVISIONS
.F
F
F
r:7'
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
t.-
CONSEOUENCE$. CONSULTATION WITH AN
ATTORNEY is ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPEa TO ITS COMPLETION OR . .
MODIFICA TION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELEaRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA
pOCI.IMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
;;~-':
. . , . .
This.document has been approved and
en~orsed by The Assodated General
Contractors of America.
i--
~
.j
" .
.,
-
~.
....,;.,...--
-
"-
iD1997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
},CopYrlght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1915, 1937, .1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substanti,!1 The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 173,5 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington. D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a20l.aia -- 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
4
-'1
.J
]
1
Governing Law
13.1
Guarantees (See Warranty)
Hazardous Materials
10.2.4, 10.3,10.5
Identification of Contract Documents
1.5.1
Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers
5.2.1
Indemnification
3.17, 3.18,9.10.2,10.3.3,10.5,11-4-1.2, 11-4.7
Information and Services Required of the OWner
2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4-3.3,6.1.3,
6.1.4, 6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2, 9.10.3,
10.3.3, lL2, 114 13.5.1, 13;5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4
Injury or Damage to Person or Property
4.3.8,10.1,10.6 .
Inspections
3.1.3,3.3-3,3.7.1,4-2.2,4-2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.2,
9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1,12.2.1,13.5
Instructions to Bidders
Ll.l
Instructions to the Contractor
3.2.3, 3.3.1,3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7,12,8.2.2,13.5.2
Insurance
3.18.1,6.1.1,7.3.6,8.2.1,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,
9.10.2, 9.10.5, II
Insurance, Boiler and Machinery
IL4-2
Insurance, Contractor's Liability
11.1
Insurance, Effective Date of
8.2.2, 1l.1.2
Insurance, Loss of Use
11.4-3
Insurance, Owner's Liability
1l.2
Insurance, Project Management Protective
Liability
11.3
Insurance, Property
10.2.5, 11.4
Insurance, Stored Materials
9.3.2, 11..4.1.4
INSURANCE AND BONDS
11
Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial
Occupancy
9.9.1, 1l.4.1.5
Insurance Companies, Settlement with
11-4.10
Intent of the Contract Documents
1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4
Interest
',n
.J
:'-ij
'~'~
.J
,'j
]
J
'J
J
J
J
,j
'..J
13.6
Interpretation
L2.3, 1.4, 4-1.1,4-3.1,5.1,6.1.2,8.1.4
Interpretations, Written .
4.2.ll, 4.2.12; 4-3.6 .
Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required
4-6.4
Judgment on Final Award
4.6.6
Labor and Materials, Equipment
Ll.3, 1.L6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3-8.2, 3-8.3, 3.12, 3.13,
3.15.1,42.6,4-2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3,
9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2
Labor Disputes
8.3.1
Laws and Regulations
1.6,3-2.2,3.6, 3.7, 3-12.10, 3.13, 4-1.1,4.4-8,4.6,
9.64 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11:4> 13:1, 13.4, 13.5.1,
13.5.2,13.6,14 .
Liens
2.1.2, 4-4-8, 8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10
Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder
4.6.4
Limitations, Statutes of
4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7
Limitations of Liability
2.3, 3.2.1, 3-5.1, 3.7.3, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18,
4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9-4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7,
9.10.4> 10.3.3, 10.2.5, lLL2, ll.2.1, 11.4-7, 12.2.5,
13.4.2
Limitations of Time
. 2.1.2,2.2,2.4> ).2.1,3.7.3,3.10, 3.ll, 3.12.5, 3.15.1,
4.2.7,4-3,4-4> 4.5,4.6, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4> 7.3,
7.4, 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9-4-1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,
9.9,9.10, ILL3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, ll.4.10, 12.2, 13.5,
13.7, 14
Loss of Use Insurance
11.4.3
Material Suppliers
1.6,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.6,
9.10.5
Materials, Hazardous
10.2-4,10.3,10.5
Materials, Labor,'Equipment and
1.1.3,1.1.6,1.6.1,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.23,3.12,3.13,
3.15.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3,
9.5.1.3,9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2.4,14.2.1.2
Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and
Procedures of Construction
3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2
Mechanic's Lien
448
Mediation
4.4.1,4.4.5,4-4.6,4-4.8,4.5,4.6.1,4.6.2,8.3.1,
10.5
Minor Changes in the Work
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEOUENCES. CONSULTATION. WITH AN
ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETlpN OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTiCATION OF THIS
ELECTRONICAllY DRAFTED AlA: .' .
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by -The Assodated General
Contractors of America.
.~~
~. ..
....'!1 .:.r
...... .. - .......
.........
-
Cl1997 AIA4il
AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF tHE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
J
:..1
I
.)
"Copyright /911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects: Fifteenth Editiofl. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. 'User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA license Number
1001907, which expires on 2129/2004. .
5
LLl. 3-12.8. 4.2..8. 4.3.6.7.1,7.4
MISCELLANEOUS PROVtSIONS
13
Modifications. Definition of
Ll.l
Modifications to the Contract
1.L1. 1.1.2, 3.7.3, 3.11. 4.1.2. 4.2.1. 5.2.3. 7.8.3.1.
9.7, 10.3.2, lL4.l
Mutual Responsibility
6.2
Nonconforming Work, Acceptance ~f
9.6.6.9.9.3. 12.3
Nonconforming Work. Rejection and
Correction of
2..3,2..4, 3.5.1, 4-2.6. 6.2.5. 9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,
9.10.4, l2,2.1, 13.7.1.3
Notice
2..2.1,2.3,2-4,3.2..3,3,3.1,3.7.2.3.7.4.3.12..9,4.3.
4.4.8,4.6.5,5.2..1. 8.2.2.9.7; 9.10,10.2.2, lLL3,
11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12..2.4;13.3.13.5.1,13.5.2.14.1.14.2
Notice, Written .'
2..3, 2.4, 3.3.1. 3.9. 3.12.9,3.12.10. 4.3, 4.4-8.
4.6.5, 5.2..1, 8.2.2.9.7.9.10, 10.2..2. 10.3, 11.1.3.
lL4- 6, 12..2.2, 12..2..4. 13.3, 14
Notice of Testing and Inspections
13.5.1,13.5.2
. Notice to Proceed
.8.2..2
Notices, Permits, Fees and
2.2.2,3.7,3.13, 7.3.6.4. 10.2.2
Observations. Contractor's
1.5.2. 3.2. 3.7.3. 4.3-4
Occupancy
2..2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, 11.4-1.5
Orders, Written .
1.1.1, 2..3. 3.9. 4-3.6. 7, 8.2.2. 11.4.9. 12.1, 12..2.
13.5.2,14.3.1
OWNER
2
Owner, Definition of
2.1
Owner. Information and Services Required of
the
2.1.2. 2.2,3.2..1,3.12.4.3.12.10. 4-2..7. 4.3.3. 6.1.3,
6.1.4, 6.2..5.9.3.2.9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2.9.10.3,
10.3.3, 1l.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4. 14.1.4
Owner's Authority
1.6, 2.1.1,2.3, 2..4. 3.4-2, 3.8.1, 3-12..10. 3.14.2.
4.1.2,4-1.3,4.2..4,4.2..9,4.3.6,4.4.7, 5.2.1,5.2.4,
5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3. 7.2.1. 7j.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1. 9.3.1, 9.3.2.
9.5.1,9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.2,11.1.3. 11.3.1. 1143.
lL4.10. 12.2..2, 12..3.1, 13.2..2, 14.3, 14.4
Owner's Financial Capability
2..2..1, 13.2.2, 14.1.L 5
Owner's Liability Insurance
11.2
Owner's Loss of Use InsUrance
11.4.3
Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors
LL2, 5.2, '5.3.5.4, 9.6.4.9.10.2, 14.2..2
Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work
2.4,12..2..4- 14-2.2.2 .' .
Owner's Right to Clean Up
6.3 .
Owner's ~ght to Perform C~nstruction and to
Award Separate Contracts
6.1
Owner's Right to Stop the Work
2.3
Owner's Right to Suspend the Work
14.3
Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract
14-2
Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications
and Other Instruments of Service
1.1.1. 1.6,2.2..5.3.2.1, 3.11.1, 3.17.1. 4.2.12. 5.3
Partial Occupancy or Use
9.6.6.9.9,11.4-1.5
Patching, Cutting and
3.14. 6.2.5
Patents
3.17
Payment. Applications for
4-2.5.7.3.8.9.2.9.3,9.4, 9.5.1. 9.6.3. 9.7.1.
9.8.5,9.10.1.9.10.3.9.10.5,11.1.3.14.2.4,14.4.3
Payment. Certificates for
4.2.5.4.2.9,9.3.3, 9.4,9.5,9.6.1.9.6.6,9.7.1.
9.10.1.9.10.3.13.7,14-1.1.3,14.2.4
Payment. Failure of
4.3.6.9.5.1.3, 9.7,9.10.2. 14.Ll.3. 14.2..1.2. 13.6
Payment. Final
4.2.1. 4.2..9, 4.3.2. 9.8.2. 9.10, 11.1.2. 11.1.3. 1141.
11-4.5. 12..3.1, 13-7.14.2..4, 1443
Payment Bond. Performance Bond and
7.3.6.4.9.6.7,9.10.3. ll.4-9, 11.5
Payments. Progress
4.3.3.9.3.9.6,9.8.5.9.10.3.13.6. 14.2..3
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9
Payments to Subcontractors
5.4.2.9.5.1.3.9.6.2,9.6.3,9.6.4.9.6.7,11.4.8.
14.2..1.2
PCB
10.3.1
Performance Bond and Payment Bond
7.3.6.4,9.6.7.9.10.3.11.4-9. 11.5
Permits, Fees and Notices
2..2..2, 3.7. 3.13. 7.3-6.4, 10.2..2
PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION
F
F
"
i, .
f.==
F
. '''-".- !
f"
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTjl.nON WITH AN F
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH. !
RESPEa TO ITS COMPLETION OR .
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTic/WON OF THIS
ELECTRON/CALLY DRAFTED AiA' ',:' . in'
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401. . .
.j
..'
This document has been approved and 'f'~
endorsed by The Assodated General ' ., -.
Contractors of America.
;~
L
)
i
.L
-
~.~
..... . - ..~
...".......
-
01997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
}lCopynght 19l1, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecUtion. WARNING: unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 1O/27n003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
6
'--I
J
..~
.1
:1
,OJ
"]
J
;J
J
:J
"J
IJ
I
.J
J
,I
:..J
OF
10
Polychlorinated Biphenyl
10.3.1
Product Data, Definition of
3.12.2
Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings
3.n. 3.12,4.2.7
Progress and Completion
4-2.2, 4.3.3, 8.2,9.8, 9.9.1, 14-1.4
Progress Payments
4-3-3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3,13.6,14.2.3
Project, Definition of the
1.1.4
Project Management Protective Liability
Insurance
11.3
Project Manual, Definition of the
1.L7
Project Manuals
2.2.5
Project Representatives
4-2.10
Property Insurance
10.2.5, 11.4
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND
PROPERTY
10
Regulations and Laws
1.6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6,
9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4,13.5.1,
13.5.2,13-6,14
Rejection of Work
3-5.1, 4-2.6, 12.2.1
Releases and Waivers of Liens
9.10.2
Representations
1.5.2,3.5.1,3-12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1,
9.8.2,9.10.1
Representatives
2.1.1, 3.Ll, 3.9, 4-1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.10, 5.Ll, 5.1.2,
13.2.1
Resolution of Claims and Disputes
4.4,4.5,4-6
Responsibility for Those Performing the Work
3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3, 4-3.8,5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3,9.5.1,
10
Retainage
9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3
Review of Contract DoclJments and Field
Conditions by Contractor
1.5.2, 3.2,3.7.3,3.12.7, 6.1.3
Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and
Architect
3.1.0.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3,9.2, 9.8.2
I
__1
J
,I
I )
Review of Shop Drawings; Product Data and
Samples by Contra~tor ,',
3.12
Rights and Reme~ies
Ll.2, 2.:;' 2.4, 3.5.1; 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 4.3.4, 4.5, 4.6,
5.3,5.4, 6.1; 6.:;, 7.3.1, ~.3, 9.5.1, 9.j, 10.2.5,10.3,
12.2.2,12.2.4, 13.4,14 . "
Royalties, Patents 'and Copyrights
3.17
Rules and Notices for Arbitration
4.6.2
Safety of Persons and Property
10.2,10.6 '
Safety Precautions and Programs
3.3.1,4-2.2, ,4.2.7,5.3.1, 10.1,10.2,10.6
Samples, Definition of
3.12.3
Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and
3.11; 3.12. 4.2.7
Samples at the Site, Documents and
3.11 '
Schedule of Values
9.2,9.3.1 '
Schedules, Construction
1.4-1.2,3-10,3.12.1,3-12.2; 4-3.7.2, 6.1.3
Separate Contracts and <::ontractors '
1.1.4, 3-12.5, 3.11-2, 4.2.4, 4-2.7, 4.6.4, 6, 8.3.1,
lL4.7, 12.1.2,12.2.5
Shop Drawings, Definition of
3.12.1
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
3.11,3.12,4-2.7.
Site, Use of
3.13, 6.Ll, 6.2.1
Site Inspections
1.2.2,3.2.1, 3,3.3, 3.7.1, 4-2, 4-3.4, 9.4.2, 9.10.1,
13.5
Site VISits, Architect's
4.2.2,4-2.9,4.3.4,9-4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1,13.5
Special Inspections and Testing
4.2.6,12.2.1,13.5,
Specifications; Definition of the
1.1.6
Specifications, The
1.Ll, 1.1.6;1.1.7,1.2.2,1.6,3.11,3.12.10,3.17
Statute of Limitations
'4.6.3, ~2.6, 13.7 '
Stopping the Work
2.3, 4.3.6, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1
Stored Materials ,
6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11-4-1.4
Subcontractor, Definition of
5.1.1
SUBCONTRACTORS
5
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULT AnoN WITH AN
ATTORNEY 1$ ENCOURAGED WIT/-!
, RESPEa TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENnCAnON OF THIS
ELEaRONlCALL Y DRAFTED AlA. :
DOCUMENTMAYBE~EBYU~NGNA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Modated General
Contradors of America.
~~.
~'J..'~
.............. ......
-
11:)1997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction' of the material herein or substant.ial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the'United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlkensed photocopying violates U.s. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution., This 'document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - i0/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
7
Subcontractors, Work by ..
1.2.2,3.3.2, 3.l2.1, 4-2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2,
9.6.7
Subcontractual Relations
5.3,5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6,9.1010.2.1, 1l.4-7, 11.4-8,
. 14.1, 14-2.1, 14-3.2
Submittals
1.6, :po, 3.n, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1; 5.2.3, 7.3.6, ~.2,
9.3,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,11.1.3
Subrogation, Waivers of
6.1.1;11-4-5, 11.4.7
Substantial Completion
4-2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3,
9.10.4-2, 12.2, 13.7 .
Substantial Completion, Definition of
9.8.1 .
- substitution of Subcontractors
5.2.3,5.2.4
Substitution of Architect
4-1.3
Substitutions of Materials
3-4-2,3.5.1,7.3.7
Sub-subcontractor, Definition of
5.1.2
Subsurface Conditions
4.3.4
Successors and Assigns
13.2
Superintendent
3.9, 10.2.6
Supervision and Construction Frocedures
1.2.2, 3.3, 3-4, 3.12.10, 4-2.2, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3,
6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2, 8.3:1, 9-4.2, 10, 12, 14
Surety
4.4-7, 5-4-1.2,9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3,14.2.2
Surety, Consent of
9.10.2, 9.10.3
Surveys
2.2.3
Suspension by the Owner for Convenience
14.4
Suspension of the Work
5-4-2, 14.3
Suspension or Termination of the Contract
4.3.6,5.4.1.1, 1l.4.9, 14
Taxes
3.6, 3.8.2.1,7.3.6.4
Termination by the Contrador
4.3.10, 14.1
Termination by the Owner for Cause
4.3.10,5-4-1.1, 14.2 .
Termination of the Architect
4.1.3
Termination of the Contractor
14.2.2
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE
CONTRACT
14
Tests and Inspections
3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4-2.2, 4.2.6, 4-2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3, 9.9.2,
9.10.1, 10.3.2, n.4.1.1, 12.2.1,13 oS
TIME
8 .
Time, Delays and Extensions of
3.2.3,4-3.1,4-3.4,4-3.7,4.4.5; 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1,
7.4.1,7.5.1, 8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1,10.3.2, 10.6.1,14.3.2
Time Limits
2.1.2,2.2,2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.n, 3.12.5, 3.15.1,
4.2,4.3,4.4, 4.5, 4.6,.5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2-4,7.3,
7.4, 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3, 9.4.i, 9.5, 9.6,9.7,9.8,
9.9,9.10, n.l.3, n.4.1.5, 1l.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13;5,
13.7, 14 .
Time Limits on Claims
4.3.2,4.3-4,4.3-8,4.4,4.5, 4.6
Title to Work
9.3.2, 9.3.3
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF
WORK
12
Uncovering of Work
12.1
Unforeseen Conditions
4-3-4, 8.3.1, 10.3
Unit Prices
4.3.9, 7.3.3.2
Use of Documents
1.1.1,1.6,2.2.5,3.12.6,5.3
Use of Site
3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1
Values, Schedule of
9.2,9.3.1
Waiver of Claims by the Architect
13.4-2
Waiver of Claims by the Contractor
4-3.10,9.10.5, 1l.4.7, 13.4.2
Waiver of Claims by the Owner
4.3.10,9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4, 1l.4.3, 11-4-5, ll.4.7;
12.2.2.1, 13-4-2, 14.2-4
Waiver of Consequential Damages
4.3.10, 14.2-4
Waiver of Liens
9.10.2, 9.10.4
Waivers of Subrogation
6.1.1, 1l.4.5, 11.4.7
Warranty
3.5, 4.2.9,4-3.5.3,9.3.3,9.8-4,9.9.1,9.10.4,
12.2.2,13.7.1.3
Weather Delays
4.3.7.2
.1'"
r=
; ~
of-
I
F
i
I
f""-
!
!
i
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATIPN WITH AN f"
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH.
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION 'OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED!JA _ ,
DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401. .
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Contractors of America. l.
~~.
~,.~~
...... . - ~.~
,,,.'11...
-
01997 AIA@
AlA D.oCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL C.oNDITIONS .oF THE
CONTRACT FOR C.oNSTRUCTlON
"Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects: Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.s. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reprodl!ced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/2712003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/2912004. . . . " .
8
r] ..
.~
-'-n .
H
]
'-r
.,JJ.
.f
.~JJ
'J
J
J
J.
"'j
...
Work, Definition of
1.1.3
Written Consent
L6, 3-4-2, 3.12.8, 3.14-2, 4.1.2, 4-3.4, 4-6.4, 9.3.2,
9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11-4-1, 13.2,13.4.2
Written Interpretations
. 4-2.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.6
Written Notice
2-3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4-3,4.4.8,
4-6.5, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3,
1l.4-6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3,14
Written Orders
1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 4-3.6, 7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2;
13.5.2, 14.3.1
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
. 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 . THE CONTRACT DOC~MENTS THlSDOCUMENTHASIMPORTANTLEGAL
The ,Contract Documents consI~. of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
(heremafter the Agreement), CondItions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of. the Contract, RESPECT TO ITS COMPLEnON OR
9ther documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after eXecution of the MODIFICAnON. AUTHENncATIC)N OF THIS
Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA
a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the DOCUMENT D401. .
Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements
(advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid
or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements).
.J .
J.
J
J
J
J
1.1.2 THE CONTRACT
The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract representS the
entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,
representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or
modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a
contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Contractor,(2) between the
Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and Architect or (4)
between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall,
however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract
intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties.
1.1.3 THE WORK
The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the ~ontract Documents,
whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment
and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.
The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Proj~ct.
1.1.4 THE PROJECT
The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract
Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or
by separate contractors. .
1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS
The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the
design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections,
details, schedules and diagrams. .
1.1.6
THE SPECIFICATIONS
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Arsodated General
Contractors of America.
~~.
~,.V~
........1.11.;..--
-
01997 AIA'iiJ
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>CopYrlght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966,1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
. American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects .
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United. 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a20l.aia - 10/2712003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
I
J
J
9
F
The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written
requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and
performance of related services.
r=
!
1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL
The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding
requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications.
r:;::
".' < ';"' .:!:'"
1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper
execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are
complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;
performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract
Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated
results.' '
F
r:-!
1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, 'and
arrangement of Drawings 'shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among
Subcontractors or in establishing the extent ofW ork to be performed by any trade.
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL ,__
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
ATTORNEY IS ENC~/uMGEpWITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTH~NTlCATION OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENt~Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401. -
1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well~known
technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance
with such recognized meanings.
This doqmlent .has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated Genera!
Contradors of America. ' ,-
1.3 CAPITALIZATION
1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (1) specifically
defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles and identified references to Paragraphs,
Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other documents published by
the American Institute of Architects.
r-
OJ...
1.4 INTERPRETATION
1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words
such as "all" 'and "any. and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an
article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the
interpretation of either statemenL
1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. If either the
Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall
identify such unsigned Documents upon request.
1.5.2 ,Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representatiOli that the Contractor
has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to
be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract
Documents.
~
1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER II
INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE
1.6.1 The Drawings; Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic
fonn. prepmd by th, A,chi"''' ",d th, Architect', consultants are Instrum'nts of S""ic, ~I;
through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may .....
retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or
material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings; Specifications 101997 AIA@
and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and upless AlA l?OCUMENT A20l - 1997
otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT fOR CONSTRUCTION
))Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, ,1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates u.s. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a20l.aia -- 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which'expires on 2fl9/2oo4.
10
]
~i
.]
']
]'
]
J
J
J
'1
~-
:.J
J
J
J
J
J
them and will retain all common law, statutory lpld other reserved rights, in addition to the
copyrights. All copies of Instruments of Service, except the Contractor's record set, shall be
returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work.
The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the
Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with
respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub-
subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this
Project outside the scope of the Work 'Vithout the specific written consent of the OWner,
Architect and the Architect's consultants. The Contractor. Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors
and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of
the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the
Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the
Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall' bear the statutory
copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared
by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official
regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants' copyrights CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
or other reserve~ rights. ATTORNEY IS ENCOU/fAGED WITH.
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTlCAT~ON OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT D401.
ARTICLE 2 OWNER
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred
to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in
writing a represen~ative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all
matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in
Subparagraph 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The teIIil .Owner" means the
Owner or the Owner's authorized representative.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
Contractors of America.
2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a
written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice
of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the
record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site,
and the Owner's interest therein.
2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the written request of the Contractor, prior to commencement of
the Work and thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial
arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the ContracL Furnishing
of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the
Work. After such evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall not materially vary such
financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.
2.2.2 Except for permits and fees, including those required under: Subparagraph 3.7.1, which
are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure
and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction,
use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.
-
. -.
2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legallimitatioDs' .
and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The
Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but .., ,"
shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. "'::," . - ..~
,.1'....,,-
-
2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be
furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness. Any other information or services lD1997 AlA~
relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work under the Owner's control shall be AlA DOCUMENT A20l-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
.,
.1
J
>>Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects'
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97alOl.aia -- 10/2712003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
11
furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such
information or services.
2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be
furnished, free of charge, such copies of Dra!Vings and Project Manuals as are reasonably
necessary for execution of the Work.
2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to
carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Docunients, the Owner may issue a written
order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order
has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a
duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any
other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3.
2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from
the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and
promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second written
notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period. If the Contractor within such
three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct
any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have,
correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be 'issued deducting
from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such
deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional
services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and
amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If
payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the
Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is
referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term
"Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative.
3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's
administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by
persons other than the Contractor.
3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY
CONTRACTOR
3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the
Work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other
Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished
by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing
conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site
affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor
and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract
Documents; however, any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor
J
r
,"
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
. .
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OFIHIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA . "
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING NA
. DOCUMENT 0407.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
'Contractors of America.
-
~'J:~.
..z~. -.,~
...'....
-
@1997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>CopYrlght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition, Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects j
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. _
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced .1
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia -- 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004. .
12
. J
I]
'--h.
'---1.1
II
lJ
,-~
,.~
',]
'ij
,]1
..~
']J
'-II
J
,J
.J
J
,
J~
,J}
.~
shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the
Architect may require.' .
3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Coritract9rduring this review shall be
reported promptly to the Architect, but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in
the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional uhless
otherwise specifically provided in the Contnict Documents. The Contractor is not required to
ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes,
ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations, but any non,conformity discovered by or
made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. .
3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is ,involved because of
clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor'1! notices or
requests for information pursuant to Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, tlJ;e Contractor shall make
Claims as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.6 and 4.3.7. If the Contractcir Jails to perform the .
obligations of Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to THIS DOCUMEN~ HAS Ifv1PORTANT LEGAl.
the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had perform~d such obligations. The CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, ATTORNEY IS ~COURAGED WITH,
inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field RESPEa TO ITS COMPLETION OR
measureme~ts or ~onditions ~~ the Co~tract Documents u~~ss th: Contractor re~ognized ~:;~~;~:~::;;riC:ON OF THIS
such. error, mconsIstency, ODllSSlOn or dIfference and knowmgly failed to. report It to the DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
Architect. DOCUMENT 0401.
3.3 . SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDUR,E~
3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill
and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of.the
Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions
concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or. proce~ures, the Contractor shall
. evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely
responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, teclmiques, sequences or procedures.
If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures
may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and
shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the
Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with We required means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the
Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or dainage.
This,document has been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Contradors of AmeriGJ.
3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the
Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persoris or
entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its
Subcontractors.
3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection bf portions of Work already
performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.
3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide
and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, cQnstruction equipment and machinery, water,
heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution
and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not
incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. -
--~
~~A: .~
.....;..........;..--
-
3.4.2 The Contractor may make substituti9ns only with the consent of the Owner, after
evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. .
))Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violate~ the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Ul11icensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the. date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/2712003. AlA license Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
01997 AIM)
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.c 20006-5292
13
3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's
employees and other persons carrying out the .Contract. The Contractor shall not permit
employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. .
3.6 TAXES
_ 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided
by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded,
whether or not yet effective o~ merely scheduled to go into effect. -
3.5 WARRANTY
3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment
furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or
permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in
the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to the reqUirements of the
Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not
properly approved and authorized, may.be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty
excludes remedy for'damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the
Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and
tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall fuinish satisfactory' .' -.-
evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORT ANT LEGAL
. - CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
ATT9RNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICA TlON. AUTHENTIC A TlON OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTE(J NA
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING NA
DOCUMENT D401.
r-
3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES
-- 3.7.1 . Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure
and pay for the building permit and other permits and govermnental fees, licenses and
inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily
secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or
negotiations concluded.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Contradors of America.
3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations and lawful orders of public autJ;1orities applicable to performance of the Work.
3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are
in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and
regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are
at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, _
and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification.
3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws,. statutes,
ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and
Owner, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the
costs attributable to correction.
3.8 ALLOWANCES
3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the -
Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by
such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to
employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. .
3.8.2
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents:
-
~.
....... .. - ~...
.......11....
-
.1
allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment
delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;.
<D1997 AlAI[;)
AlA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OFTHE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925! 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.s.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a20l.aia -- 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2n9/2004.
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W. _.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5;292
14
h
I ,!J
Il
I :)J
:-.n
;.U
.- J
.~
'-l
.J
: l'
.j
JJ
:, ij'
::11
.J1
.J
~j
.j
...lJ
J
.~~
.2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs,
overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts
shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances;
.3 whenever costs are more than odess than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be
adjusted accordingly by Change Order. T,he amount of the Change Order shall
reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause
3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.2.
3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in
sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work.
3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants
who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The
superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
shall ~ confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WtTH
request in each case. RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETiON ok
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRj\FTED A.JA .' .
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE' BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUaJON SCHEDULES
3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit
for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.
The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract DocumentS, shall be
revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be
related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall
provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work.
3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a
schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and
allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. '.
3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent
schedules submitted t~ the Owner and Architect.
3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the
Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and
marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction, and one
record copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required
submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for
submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
Contradars of America.
3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared
for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier
or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. . . I!!!!!!!!!!!!!'
3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions; II
brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials ....~ ."
or equipment for some portion of the Work. ~..,. _ .,~
...1.....
-
3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship
and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.
>>CopYrlght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
. the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a20l.aia - 10/2712003. AlA license Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
~
i'I
I
01997 AIA~ .
AlA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W:
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
15
3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract
Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the W!Jrk
for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contract!Jr
proposes to conform to the information given and the design c~hcept expressed. in the
Contract Docilments. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph
4.2~7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive
action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals which are not required by
the Contract DocUments may be returned by the Architect without action. .
.,
I.
..t.
L.
r
3.12.5. The. Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve
and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals
required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to
cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors.
Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents
and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action.
,.
...
THlS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
3 12 6 By app.roving and submitting Shop Drawings Product Data Samples and similar CONSEQUENCES. CPNSULTJ!t.rrON WITH AN
. . .. . . " . .. ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
suboo.ttals, . the Contractor represents that th~ Co~tra~tor has determmed .and verified RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
. matenals, field measure~ents and fi~ld const;uctIOn cr~tena r~lat.ed thereto, or ~ll do ~o, and MODIFICATION. AUTHEN11CATfClN OF THIS
has checked and coordmated the informatIOn contamed Wlthm such subnuttals Wlth the ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA
requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. DOCUMENT MAY Be MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401. .
:~ .
3.12.7 The. Contractor shall perf orin no portion of the Work for which the Contract.
Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar
submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect.
This document h<!S b~erj approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
Contradors of Ameika. .
3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor
shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract
Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar
submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such
deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the
specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction
Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be
relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or
similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof.
3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested
by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice the Architect's
approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.
3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute
the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the
Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such
services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall. not be required to provide
professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or I!!!!!!!'
certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically II
requlled of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the OWTler and the Architect will
specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall .... ~
cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, ~~~..::
whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, -=
Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other
submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others,
shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect. The OWTler
and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the
[.
01997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDlTIONS.OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
. "
16
]
~.
~ll
I -~O
I .--
L~
.ij
in
:.II
...,
j
'j
J
-~.~ .
~
..:1
J
J
J
.J
1
--I
. 1
I
-1
services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provid~dthe
OwD.er and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that
such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Subparagraph 3.12.10, the Architect will review,
approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking
for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Con,tract
Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or
design criteria required by the Contract Documents.
3.13 USE OF SITE
3.13.1 The Contractor shall confme operations at the site to areas permitted by law,
ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site
with materials or equipmenL
3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
3.14.1 The Contractor shall. be' responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
complete the Work or to make Its parts fit together properly. CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATIONWITHAN
. ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH "
3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .
. partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS.
otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut ot ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA. .
otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USiNG AlA
cOJl~ent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably DOCUMENT 0401.
withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate
contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.
3.15 CLEANING UP
3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation
of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contrad At completion of the
Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the
Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials.
This document has.been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
Contradors of America.
3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner
may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor.
3.16 ACCESS TO WORK
3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in
preparation and progress wherever located.
3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend
suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and
Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense
or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or
manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are
contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the qwner or Architect.
However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is
an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss
unless such information is promptly furnished to the ArchitecL .
-'
3.18 INDEMNifiCATION ~.::
-..I....i.....
3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or _
expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by .
the Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 11.3, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold ~1997 AIM
harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of AlA DOCUMENT A10l - 1997
them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
IICopynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
17
attorneys' fees, arising ~)Ut of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such
claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to
injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent
caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or
indirectly employed by them or anyone for whos.e acts tJ.?ey may be liable, regardless of whether
or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder.
Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations
of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph
3.18.
.-
3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an
employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them
or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under
Subparagraph 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,
compen~ation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a.Subcontractor under workers'
compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
I~
ARTICLE 4
4.1
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
A TTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA .
lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USiNG AlA
throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the DOCUMENT 0401.
Architect or the Architect's authorized representative.
This document has been approved and
4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the endorsed by The Ass~ciated General
Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of Contradors of America.
the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
ARCHITECT
~. "
4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a new
Architect against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the
Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect.
4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract
Documents, and will be an Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final
payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the one-year
period for correction of Work described in Paragraph 12.2. The Architect will have authority to
act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless
otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract.
" ~.
4.2.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will visit the site at intervals
appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's operations (1) to become generally familiar with
and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the pornon of the Work
completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work,
and (3) to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the
Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However,
the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to II!!!!!!!!'
check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or _
charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or .
procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since ....~M ."
these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, ~'.r....'';':
except as provided in Subparagraph 3.3-1. -
t...
4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have
control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor,
>>Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia -- 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
~1997 A1A@
AlA DOCUMENT AlO1 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
18
]
.J
~J.
1
]
.J
'~l
J
J
]
..I
::J
J
I
!
j
,J
.J
\
"
I
..i
\
)
Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing
portions of the Work
4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwis~
provided in the Contract Documents or when direCt cOlllffiunications have been specially
authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through
the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the .Contract. Co~unications by and
with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with
Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be throug4 the Contractor. Communications by
and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. . .
4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the
Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for
Payment in such amounts.
4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
. Wh th hi 'd' 'd' bI th ch' . CONSEOUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
C~>ntract Docume!1ts. . ene".er . e Arc . tect conSl ~rs It necessary or a YIsa . e, e Ar It~ct ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED wmi
will have authonty to requrre mspection or testing ?f th~ W o~ m accordance WIth RESPECT TO)rs COMPLETION OR
Subparagrap~s 13.5-2 .and I3.5.~, whether or n~t such.W ork IS. ~abncatedJ ~stalled o~ cOID.-pleted. MODIFlCA TION. AUTHENTIC A ikJN OF THIS
However, neIther thIS authOrIty of the ArchItect nor a decIsIon made m.good faIth eIther to ELECTRONIcAn.YDRAFTEDAiA
exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise .to a duty or "responsibility of the DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE By'usiNG AlA
Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or DOCUMENT D401. .
employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. .
4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon ,the
Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, l;>ut only for the
limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept
expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable
promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the. Owner, Contractor or
separate contractors, while allowing .sufficient time in the Architect's prof~ional judgment to
permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of
determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as diinensions and quantities,
or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of
which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The
Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals' shall not relieve the Contractor of the
obligations under Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The. Architect's review shall not constitute
approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of
a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by TheAssodated General
Contradors of America.
4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and
may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. .
4.2.9 The Architect will conduct ~spections to detennine the date or dates of Substantial
Completion and the date of final completion, will receive and fo~ardto the Owner, for the
Owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract
and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon.
compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
--~
~~..I! .::
..... . - .....
..r......
-
4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Archite~ will provide one or more project
representatives to assist in carrying out the Archited's responsibilities at the site. The duties,
responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth
in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents.
11)1997 AlA(/;)
4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request. of either the Owner or GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
. CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
),Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, (Q 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws 9f the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.s. Washington, D.C.1OOOG-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproauced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
19
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
43 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATlONWITHAN J'
. ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH i ~
4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by.one of the. parties seeking, as a RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATioN OF THIS
of time or other relief with respect to the.terms of the Contract. The term "Claim n also includes ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA . :'('
other disputes and matters in question '~etween the Owner and Contractor arising out of or DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA I
. relating to the Contract. Claims must be initiated by written notice. The responsibility to DOCUMENT D401.
substantiate Claims shall rest with the P!lrty making the Claim.
Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time
limits agreed upon or otherwise with r~asonable promptness. If no agreement is made
concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in
compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then <:lelay shall not be recognized on account of failure by
the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for
them. .
4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and
reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of
drawings. When making such interpretations and initial decisions, the Architect will endeavor
to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either
and will not be liable for results of interpretations pr decisions so rendered in good faith.
4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matteJ;s relating to aesthetic effect will be final if
consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.
4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after
occurrence of the event giving rise to such .Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first
recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be initiated by
written notice to the Architect and the other party.
4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim except as
otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Subparagraph 9.7.1 and Article 14, the Contractor
shall proceed diligently with perform~nce of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to
make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.
.~
rP
:r
i;
r,o'
~;'
:1)
I~t
I
'il
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
Contradors.of America.
~ !:-1
'i-'.-:
I,
4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at
the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ
materially from those indicated ill the Contract Documents or (2) unknOwD. physical
conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist
and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in
the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party
promptly before conditions are disturbed. and in no event later than 21 days after first
observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and,if
they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time
required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in
the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at
the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that
110 change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify the Owner and I!!!!!!!!I
Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to such .
determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision. .
If the conditions encountered .are materially different, the Contract Sum and Contract Time ~~, ..
shall be equitably adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in ~~. - .,:
the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial -=
determination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph 4-4.
4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an
increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before
,>CopYrlght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, ]967, 1970, ]976, 1987, @ ]997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth. Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a20Laia -- 10/27/20lJ3. AlA license Number
100]907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
i.,,1
.' j
4:)1997 AIM)
AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
.J
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
....\
.J
20
lJ
-]
".-.1
, '[
-.
']
.' "
,]]'
'-ij
.-]
:J
:'U'
J
:. JI
J
: 'i
,J
]
J
.J
J
'J
I
.J
proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an
emergency endangering life or property arising under Paragraph 10.6.
4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not
limited to (1) <). written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an_ order by the Owner to stop the
Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a written order for a minor change in the Work
issued by the Architect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, 6) teimination of the Contract by
the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in
accordance with this Paragraph 4.3.
4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time
4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written
notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of
cost and of-probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay
only one Claim is necessary. -
THIS DOCUMENT HAS JMPORTANT,1EGAL
4 3- 72 If d th d' . th b ." Cl' " dd" l' ch Cl' CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATlONWITHAN
. . . a yerse wea er con lUons are e aslS .lor a aIm .lor a luona time, su alm ATTORNEY is ENCOURAGED WITH
shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .
period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATiON OF THIS
scheduled construction. ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTE[) AlA .
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract sUffers DOCUMENT 0401.
injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of. . _ '.
others Jor whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, ThIS document has bee? approved and
whe!her or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding endorsed by The Ass~aated General
21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to Contractors of AmerIca.
investigate the matter. -
4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and
if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or
Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities Qf Work
proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices
shall be equitably adjusted.
4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims
against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This
mutual waiver includes:
.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income,
profit. financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or
employee productivity or of tlle services of such persons; and
.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the
compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and
reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from
the Work.
This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either
party's tennination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained.in this Subparagraph 4.3.10
shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages. when applicable, in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
.~~
.... ,"
....~ ...".
......i.........
-
4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the
Architect but excluding those arising under Paragraphs 10.3 through 10.5, shall be referred
initially to the Arcl1itect for decision. An initial decision by the Architect shall be required as a C1997 AIA@
condition precedent to mediation, arbitration or litigation of all Claims between the Contractor AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
))CopytJ,ght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein -or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA License Number.
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
J
21
and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the
Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered. by the
Architect. The Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or
entities other than the Owner.
~
4A~ The Architect will review Claims and within ten. days of the receipt of the Claim take
one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant
or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in
part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the
Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate
the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that, in the Architect's sote discretion, it
would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim. .
!":
,:
'.
.;~ '
4.4.3 In evaluating Claims, the Architect may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or
. seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who
may .assist the Architect in rendering a decision. The Architect may request the Owner to
authoJi?;e retention of such persons at the Owner's expense.
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORT ANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
ATTORNEY IS ENCOWMGEDWITH .
. . .. RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
4.4.~ If the ArchItect requests a party to prOVIde a response to a Claim or to furnIsh MODIRCATION AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such ELECTRONlCAUY DRAFTEDNA . ' .,
request, and shall either provide a response 011 the requested supporting data, advise the DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no DOCUMENT D401. .' .
supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the
Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whote or in part.
I:'
4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the
reasonS therefor and which shaH notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or
Contract Time or both. The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and
binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration.
This document has been appr.oved and
endorsed by The Assodated Ge(ieri31
Contradors of America. ..,
I,'
\0 ;'"
t.-
"1.
4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that (1) the decision is final but subject
to mediation and arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such
decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand
receives the final written decision, then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days'
period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and
Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated,
such decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings
unless the decision is acceptable to aH parties concerned.
. .'
4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter, the
,Architect or the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and
amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default, the Architect
or the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance
in resolving the controversy.
4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such
Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing
deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect, by mediation or by arbitration.
-
.
-i :.r....;......
-
4.5 MEDIATION
4.5.1 Arty Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims r'elatirig to aesthetic
effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall,
after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect,
be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or Cl1997 AIM)
equitable proceedings by either party. AlA DOCUMENT A201: 19~7
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>Copyright 1911. 1915. 1918, 1925, 1937. 1951. 1958, 1961. 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987. @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Archifects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue. N.W..
States and wilf subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington. D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject tne violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA license Number
,1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
22
~n
'~
.fl
..~
,..II
._~
Jf
:],
, ~J
,.'1
,J
.J
'01
J
J
..1.
4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by.mediation which, unless the
parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry
Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for
mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American
Arbitration Association. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for
arbitration but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or
equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from
the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order.
4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation
shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutual\y
agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation sh.dl be enforceable as settlement agreements
in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
4.6 ARBITRATION
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL .
4.6.1 Any Claim arising.out of or rel.aled to ~e Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
effect and except those waIved as proVIded for m Subparagraphs 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5, shall, AITORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
after decision by the Architect or 30 days' after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
subject to arbitration. Prior to arbitration, the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
. mediation in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 4.5. ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA .
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
4.6.2' CI~s not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which, unless the DOCUMENT D401. .
. parties mutually agree otherwiSe, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry... '.'
. . Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. The demand for Thisdocument.has bee~ approved and
arbitratiop. shall be filed in Writing with the other party to the Contract and with the ~erican endorsed by The fl,oss~aated General
Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. Contradors of Ameflca.
4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in
Subparagraphs 4-4.6 and 4.6.1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable time after the
Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or
equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of
limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7.
4.6.4 limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating
to the Contract shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other marmer, the Architect,
. the Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific
reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner, C()nlractor and any other
person or entity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include, by cons()lidation or joinder or
in any other manner, partie's other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate. contractor as
described in Article 6 and otller persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or
la~ whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. No person or
entity other than the Owner, Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall
be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest
or responsibility is insubstantial Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity
shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or
entity not named or described therein. The foregoing agreement to arbitrate ~d other
agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the -
Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having ~
jurisdiction thereof. ~.~
4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for ~~~..:: .
arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration ~
is permitted to be demanded.
>>CopYflght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subjecf the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U5.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
01997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A20l- 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCT/ON
.J-
J
J
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
23
4.6.6 Judgment on Final.Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators
shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any
court having jurisdiction thereof.
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1 DEFINITIONS
5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to
perform a portion of the Work at the ~ite. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout
the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized
representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate
contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. .
I'
'"'
J'~ '
5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a
Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is :.
referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub- THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRON/CAllY DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0407. '. .
AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF
THE WORK
5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the
Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the
Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to
.furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal
portion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating
whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to
any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall
constitute notice of no reasonable objection.
5.2
5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed perSall or entity to whom the
Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor ~hall not be
required to contract with anyone to whom tlle Contractor has made reasonable objection.
5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by
the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no
reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of
performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by
the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be
issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However, no increase in
the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has
acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required.
5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected
if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute.
5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor
shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent. of the Work to be performed by the
Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to
assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the
responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor, by these
Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect Each subcontract agreement shall
preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents With
respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will
not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided
otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against
This document has been apprc?v~ and
endorsed by The Associated General
Contractors of America. ..
,.
.'
-
~.
....... . - ......
..".-a....
-
-.-
C>1997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United ,1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: .Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced .
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a20l.aia - 10/2712003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on m912OO4.
24
'.]
":-n
Jr
.-~
]1
:-~
..u.~
:J
,J
:]
,.1
J
. the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where
appropriate, the Contractor shall require each 'Subcontra~or to enter into similar agreements
with Su~subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Sul?contractor,
prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to
which the Subcontractor will be bound} and, upon written request of the Subcontractor,
identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement
which may be at variance with the Contract I?ocuments. Subcontractors will similarly make
copies of applicable portions of such documents available to .their respective proposed Sub-
subcontractors, .
5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS
5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a: portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to
the Owner provid~d that:
.1 assignment is effective only . after' termina~on of the Contract by the Owner for
cause pursuant to Paragraph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements
hich th b 'fyin th b . d'" THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
w. . e Owner accepts y noli g e Su contractor an <;:;ontractor ill CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTAnONW/THAN
wnting; and ..' . . ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED 'WliH
.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
relating to the Contract. . MODIFICATION. AUTHENTIcATION OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Workhas been suspended for more th!ln '30 days, the
Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resUlting Ironi
the suspension. . .
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
Contradors of America.
ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRAGORS
6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD
SEPARATE CONTRACTS
6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the
Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other
portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the
Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related ~o insurai1~e
and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is'involved
because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in
Paragraph 4.3.
6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other
construction or operations on the site,. the term "Contractor" in the Contract J)ocuments in
each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.
6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces
and of ~ach separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall ~ooperate with
them. The Contractor shan participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in
reviewing their construction schedules wh~n directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any
revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual
agreemenL The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the
Contractor, separate contractors and the Other until subsequently revised.
}
I
J
J
J
~
6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the . Contract Documents, when the Owner performs II
construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall .
be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the ~1'A.!.,~
Contractor under the Conditions of the Golitract, including, without excluding others, those ......,r.1II........
stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles io, 11 and 12. -
>>Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951; 1958, .1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970. 1976, 1.987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates u.s. Washington, D.C. 20006.5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was eJectro'nically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a20l.aia "- 1012712003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/2912004.
6.2
MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
I
.J
.J
J
Cl1997 AIA<!l
AlA DOCUMENT A20l -1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
25
6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable
opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of
their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations
with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.
6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for prop~r execution or results upon
construction or operations by the Owner or a sep~ate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to
proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent
discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such
proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an
acknowledgment tllat the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or .partially completed
construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then
. reasonably discoverable. .
.;
t-.
L
6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner
h h bl b f d I. l' d .. . THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
...,. w ic . are paya e .to a separate contractor ~i::ause 0 e ays, ID1pr~per y time actlVllles or CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN ,.
.. defe~Ive construction of the Contractor. The Owne;.shall be res?onslble .t~ ~e Contractor for ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
costs lDcurred ?y the Cont~ctor because of delays, Improperly bmed actlVlties, damage to the RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
Work or defectIve constructlon of a separate contractor. MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT D407.
6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor
to completed or partially completed construction or to properly of the Owner or separate
contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. .
This document has been approved and
6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall.have tIle same responsibilities for endorsedbyTheAssodatedGeneraJ
Contractors of America.
cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Subparagraph 3.14-
6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and tIle Owner as to the
responsibility under tIleir respective contracts for. maintairIing the premises and surrounding
area free from waste materials and rubbish; the Owner may clean up and the Architect will
allocate the cost among tIlose responsible. .
ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and
without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order
for a minor change in tIle Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere
in the Contract Documents. .
7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the OWner, Contractor and
Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owne~ and Architect
and mayor may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a mirIor change ill the Work
may be issued by the Architect alone.
7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract
Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided ill the
Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a mirIor change in the Work.
7.2 CHANGE ORDERS
7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the
Owner, Contractor and Archit.ect, stating their agreement upon all of the following:
.1 change in the Work; .
.2 the amount of the adjustment, if any, ill the Contract Sum; and
>>CopYrlght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, ]966, 1967, 1970, 1976, ]987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia -- 10/27/2003. AlA license Number
1001907, which expires on 2/2912004.
~
-
.
.... . - .......
. ".... ...
-
01997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, NW.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
26
I]
:.~
]
]
J
._~
..'1
.J
]
.nj
..-;.
I,']
,]
J
J
J
..J
.J
.J
\
.:1
\
!
.3 the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.
7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments t9 the Contract Sum may include those
listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3.
7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and
signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on
'adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract rime, or both. The Owner may by
Construction Change Directive, witJ;lOut invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work
within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions,
the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.
7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on
the terms of a Change Order. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORT ANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSU,LTATION. WITH AN
7.3.3. If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
.1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
substantiating data to permit evaluation; ELECTRON/CALLY DRAFTED AlA
. . . . th b DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
.2 urnt pnces stated ill . e Contract Documents or su . sequently agreed upon; DOCUMENT 0401
.3 cost to be determined in a marmer agreed upon by the parties and a mutually .
acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or This document has been approved and
.4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. endorsed by The Assodated General
Contractors of America.
7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly
proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's
agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change
Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of
the Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the
method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be
recorded as a Change Order.
7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for
adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustinent shall be determined by the
Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work
attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable
allowance for overhead and profit. In such case,' and also under Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor
shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting
together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents, costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following:
.1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance,
fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' compensation
insurance; . ~
.2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, _~l
whetller incorporated or consumed; ~
.3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented ~l1"~ .:
from the Contractor or others; .....;.1....;:--
.4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, ~d sales, use or -
similar taxes related to the Work; and
.5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to
the change.
~1997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A201 -1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>,Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, (9 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will sul?ject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This d?cument'was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted be/ow. User Document: 97a20l.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
27
:-r
;!
;;\
r=
. 7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or
change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed
by the ArchitecL When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are
involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net
increase, if any, with respect to that change.
!;!
7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to
the Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in
Applic~tions for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties' agreement
with part or all of such costs. For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute, the Architect
will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those
costs. That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change
Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with
Article 4.
~
:(
I.;
f7J
;
:.l"
&.~
THIS DOCU/V1ENT HAS IMPORTANT !-EGAL .
~ ~-.1
7 3 9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN,
". . . . ., ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
concernmg the adJusm:ents III the Contract Sum and Contra~t -:r:1me, 0: otheIWlse reach RESPECT TO iTS COMPLETION OR .
agreement upon the. adjustments, ~uch agreement s~all be effectIve Immediately and shall be MODIfICATioN. AUTHENTIcATION Of THIS
recorded by preparatIOn and execution of an appropnate Change Order. ELECTRON/CALLY DRAfTED AlA
. DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
, ,
- f
7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving
adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with
the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall
be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders
promptly.
..~~
This document has been approved and
endorsed by the Assodated General
Contradors of America.
.:,1
. ..
~~
.,
-..:;:
, :".
I'
I
ARTICLE 8 TIME
8.1 DEFINITIONS
8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized
adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.
':.1
{.
~'j)
8.1.2
The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.
. I
.,
8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance
with Paragraph 9.8.
..'
8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless
otherwise specifically defined.
8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By
executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable
period for performing the Work. . .
Ii!!!!!!!!!!' .
8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the OWIler II
in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective .
date of insurance required by Article II to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date ....~.. ,"
of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. ~.~..::
Unless the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to -=
proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the OWIler in writing not less than five
days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of 01997 AIAQil
mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests. AlA DOCUMENT A2Dl - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
. 1
",\
I
>>CopYrlght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia -- 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
28
I]
'J
~.~
J
~"]
]
8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve
Substantial Completion within the Contract Time.
8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at anytime in the commencement or progress of the Work
by an,act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate
contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, .
fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's
control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and ~bitratioIi, or by other
causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be
extended by Change Order for. such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.
8.3.2" Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of
Paragraph 4-3-
:]
]
. . THIS DOCUMENT HASIMPORTANT LEGAL
8.3.3 TIns Paragraph 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED. WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRONlCALL YDRAFTEP AlA
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY.USING AlA
DOCUMENT D401. "
ART.lClE 9 PAYM.ENTS AND COMPLETION
9.1 " CONTRACT SUM
9.1.1 'The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments,
is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under
the Contract Documents.
" "
'.J',
,."
'J
9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit'to the Architect
a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and
supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule,
uIlless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's
Applications for PaymenL
J
9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor
shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in
accord~ce with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and
supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or
Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material
suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents.
J
J
9.3.1.1 As provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8, such applications may include requests for
payment on account of changes m the Work which have been properly authorized by
Construction Change Directives, or by mterirn determinations of the Architect, but not yet
included in Change Orders.
.J
J
J
J
I
..J
9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for
which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless
such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay.
!
-)
9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on
account: of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent
incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be
made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in
writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned
upo!:). compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the
Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and
>>Copyright 19I1, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ~ 1997 by The
Ameri~an Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein er substantial
quetatien of its previsions without written permissien of the AlA vielates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the vielate to. legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photecopying violates U.S.
cepyright laws arid will subject the vielater to. legal prosecutien. This decument was electronically produced
with permissien of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violatien until
the date of expiratien as noted belew. User Document: 97a201.aia -- 10/27/2003.' AlA License Number
1001907, which expires en 2/29/2004.
J
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Asso.dated General
Co.ntradors o.f America.
-~~.
~y~ ,::
....... - ..~
....1'.....
-
01997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A20l-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue,N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
29
shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such
materials and equipment stored off the site.
9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment
will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that
upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which C~rtificates for Payment
have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the
Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security
interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or
other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and
equipment relating to the Work.
r -
'~
9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for
Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for
h th Ar hi d .. 1 d 'fy th C d 0 THIS DOCUMENT HASIMPORfANT LEGAL
~uc ~~ount as e c. tee; etermmes IS P!oper y. ue, or .notl . ~ ontractor a.n wner CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN ..-
m w:ntin~ of ~e Architect s reasons for wlthholdmg certIfication m whole or m part as ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
proVldedw Subparagraph 9.5.1. RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR -
MODIFICA TlON. AUTHENTlCA TlON OF THIS
ELECTRONlCAll Y DRAFTED AlA.
DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT D401.
9.4.2. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the
Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data
comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated
and th'at, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the
Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject
to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contr;1ct Documents upon Substantial
Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations
from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by
the ArchitecL The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation
that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a
Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive
or continuous on-site inspections to check tbe quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of
requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by
the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or (4) made examination to
ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account
of the Contract Sum.
9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION
9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the
extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the
representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect
is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the
Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect
cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment
for the amouut" for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The
Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered
evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such
extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which
the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in
Subparagraph 3.3.2, because of:
.1 defective Work not remedied;
.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such
claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;
.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for
labor, materials or equipment;
>>CopYrlght J911, 19J5, J918, 1925, 1937, 195J, J958, J961, J963, J966, J967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
, .
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
Contractors of America.
;.-
-
~.
....;..".............
-
€:l1997 AIAIil
AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
....J
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C 20006-5292
.. .1
- .J
30
_ ,.1
11
,~
]
]
,]
,]
]
J
,J
J
I]
J
J
J
, J
}
,J
,J
I
J
.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of
the Contract Sum; .
.5 damage to the Owner or another contractor;
.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract
Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actJ,lal or
liquidated damages for tlJ,e anticipated delay; or
.7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will
be made for amounts previously,withheld.
9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make
payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so
notify the Architect.
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
COI'!SEOUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
,ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH
9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment RESPECTTOITSCOMPLEnONOR
from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's MqDIFlCATION. AUTHfNnCATION OF THIS
. f th W Ie, th . hi h "d S bc ..tl d fl . .' ELEaRONlCAUY DRAFTED AlA
portion 0 . e or e amount to w c Sat u ontractor IS enn e , re ectmg percentap~ DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
actually retamed from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion DOCUMENT 0401 .
of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require .'
each ~ubcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
Contractors of America.
9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information
regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action'
taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such
Subcontractor.
9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to payor to see to the
payment of money to a Subcontra!=tor except as may otherwise be required by law.
9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in
Subparagraphs 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and'9.6-4- . '
9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupanCy of
the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum
of the .Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by
Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or
suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the
Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require
money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor,
'shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of.
,trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the
Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.
-
~'J...~JI
~~. - ..?:
..I..........
-
9.7 FAILURE OF pAYMENT
9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the
Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if
the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date establisl).ed in the Cl1997 AIM)
Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by, arbitration, ~en the AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 195J, 1958, 196J, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 173S New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying viol<,'ltl:!s U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
31
the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be
extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be. increased by the amount of the
Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in
the Contract Documents.
9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progr~ss of the. Work when the Work or
designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents
so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.
9.8.2 . When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner
agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit
to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final
payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the
Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,
9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to
determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the
Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list,
which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the. Contract Documents so that the
Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the
Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or
correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then
submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.
9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect
will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial
Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,
maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and msurance, and shall fix the time within
which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties
required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of
the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of
Substantial Completion.
9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and
Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.
Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of
retain age applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted
for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the
Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,
provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Clause 11.4-1.5
and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy
or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the
Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them
for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and
insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and
commencement of waqanties required by the Contrad Documents. When the Contractor
considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the
Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. . Consent. of the Contractor to partial
occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work
shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no
agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.
)>Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. FiFteenth Edition. Repr()ductionoF the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of thf: AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates u.s.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution; This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.ahi -- 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
,.
,
,
.,
~..
.(
;1
.~L
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION iylTH AN
ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRONlCAUY DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT~YBEMADEBYU~NGA~
DOCUMENT D401.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
Contradors of America.
..
.j
,
.,
"
-
~.
...... - - .....
..........
-
<!:l1997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
32
I]
'~
I']
,1
'J
~]
0]
r 'J
h
'J
,]
'J
, 'J
J
"j
J
J
J
J
J
9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and
Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in
order to determine and record the condition of the Work.
9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the
Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and
acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly
make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract
Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final
, Ce~cate for Paymen.t stating that ~o tb,e best ?f th.e .Archite:t's kn~wledge, information and THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
,behef, and .on the basIs of 0e ArchItect s on-~I~e VISits and mspections, the Work. has been CONSEOUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
completed ill accordance WIth t,erms and condItions of the Contract Documents and that the ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED wirH
entire balance found to be due tlle Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation MODIFlCATlQN. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA
final payment have been fulfilled. DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT D401.
9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until
the' Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and
equipment, and othe~ indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the
Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have
been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing, that insurance required by the
Contract Documents to remam in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be
canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the
Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the
insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4)
consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data
establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of
liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and
in such form as may be designated by the OWIler. If a Subcontractor refuses to fumish a release
or waiver required by tlle Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner
to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are
made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to
pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
Contradors of America.
9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion pf the Work, final completion thereof is materially
delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affectir1g final
completion, and tlle Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the
Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make
payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the
remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in
the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to ~
payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be II
submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such paymenL Such ~
payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it ~i.1 ..
shall not constitute a waiver of claims.' :::';$"AN .:.-
. ....... .. - ......
, ..I......
9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except -
those arising from:
.1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and
unsettled;
01997 AIAIfJ
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>CopYflght 1911. 1915, 1918. 1925, 1937. 1951. 1958. 1961. 1963. 1966. 1967. 1970, 1976. 1987, ~ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.s. Washington. D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below, User Document: 97a20l.aia - 10/27/2003, AlA License Number
1001907. which expires on 2/2912004.
33
.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;
or
.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.
9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier
shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and
identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment.
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all
safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract.
10.2 . SAFETY OF PERSONS AND Pf.{OPERTY
10.2.1 The Contractor shall. take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide
reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
.1 employees on the Work and other per:sons who may be affected thereby;
.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in
storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the
Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors; and
.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal,
relocation or replacement in the course of construction.
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEOUENCES. CONSULT AT/ON wmi AN
ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
. RESPECT TO ITS COMPLET/ONOR
MODIFlCAT/ON. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS.
ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
Contractors of America. .
10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations and lawful orders .of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or
their protection from damage, injury or loss.
,.
10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and
performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting
danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying
owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities.
.,.
-~
10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or
unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost
care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.
10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss
insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to
in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 1O.2.L3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a
Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for
whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 1O.2.L2
and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of
them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The
foregoing obligations Qf the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under
Paragraph 3.18.
-
~.
....."....."'...
-
10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization
at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractoris
superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and
Architect.
>>Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The.
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
l!:l1997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
34
1
~
'1
-1
1
~l
"]
'''1
}
']
J
J
J
)
1
J
J
'J
I
..1
.1
10.2.7 The Contractor s4all not load or permit .any part of the construction or site to be
loaded so as to endanger its safety.
10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
10.3.1 If r~sonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or
death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or
polychlorinated .biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor
shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report
the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. .
..'~
10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or
absence of the. material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material
or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless
otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the O~er shall furnish in writing to the
Contractor and ~~hitect the names and qualifications of p~rsons or entities who are to THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
perform tests venfring. the presence or ~bsence of. such mate~IaI or substance or who are to CONSEQUENCES.' CONSULTATION WITH AN
perform the task of removal or safe contamment of such matenal or substance. The Contractor ATTORNfYl5 ENCOURAGED WITH
and the Architect Will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
. reasonable objection t<? the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall ELECTRONICAlLY DRAFTED AlA
. propose anotli~r to. ~hom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. DOCUMENT MAY.BE MADE BY USING AlA
When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall DOCUMENT 0401.
resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be
exterided appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the
Contractor's reasonable ~dditional costs of shut-down, delay arid start-up, which adjustments
shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated Genetcl1
Contrador~ of AmeriCa. . .:-
10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless
the Contractor, Subcontractors) Architect) Architect's consultants and agents and employees of
any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited
to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from perfoi:rilance of the Work in the affected area
if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in
Subparagraph 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss
or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or
destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) a,nd provided that such damage,
loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity.
10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Paragraph 10.3 for materials and substances
brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the
Contract Documents.
10.5 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable. for
tl;1e cost .of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing
Work as reqttired by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all
cost and expei1s~ thereby incurred.
10.6 . EMERGENCIES II!!!!!!!!.
10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at ...
the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional
compensation pr extension of time claimed by tlle Contractor on account of an emergency ....~ ."
shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and Article 7. . . ~.'oI'."1I.~
-
ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
01997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
llcopynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright Jaws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.s.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia -- 10/27f2oo3. AlA license Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
The AmeriCan Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, O.c. 20006-5292
35
r
r
.J
11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies
lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such
insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or
result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may
be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of
them may be liable:
.1 claims under workers' compensation, disability benefit and other similar
employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed;
.2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or
death of the Contractor's employees;
.3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any
person other than the Contractor's employees; .
.4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
.5 claims for damages, 'other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORT ANTLEGAL
destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; CONSEQUENCES. CONSVLTAnON WITH AN
.6 cla~s for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH.
damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .
.7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations' MODIFICAnON. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
, ELECTRONICAllY DRAFTED AlA . ,
an~ ., . .. ., DOCUMENTMA Y BE MADEBY U5.ING AlA
.8 clarms mvolvmg contractual liabilIty msurance apphcable to the Contractor's DOCUMENT D401. '
obligations under Paragraph 3.18. . .
.' t:
J
;
.r
r
,r
i
I
.-
i'
I
I
I
"f"':
!
'j
11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph n.l.l shall be written for not less than limits
of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is
greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or' claims-made basis, shall be maintained
without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and
termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The AssoCiated Gimeral
Contradors o(America. _..
11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior
to commencement of the Work. These certificates and the insurance policies requir~d by this
Paragraph n.l shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be
canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the
Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final
payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such
coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by
Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised
limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor
with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief.
11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual
liability insurance.
11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE
11.3.1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project ~
Management Protective Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as pr:in1ary . _
coverage for the Owner's" Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction ~
operations under the Contract. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Docllments, the ~~~ ,"
Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of ~.'i.li",::
purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the Contractor shall not be ~
responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner. The minimum
limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits
required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under Clauses 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5.
<01997 AIA<Ol
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
. I
>>CopYrlght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates u.s. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in aq:ordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a20l.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2129/2004.
36
11
-~
~n
-~
11
'~
,.~
J
Lp
~JJ
, Oil
'p
"il
'p
'-~
'OJ
J
J
.J
.I
11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability
insurance, the Owner, Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages,
except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance. The policy shall provide
for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.
11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner, Architect or other
persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under
Paragraph 11.1.
11.4 PROPERTY iNSURANCE'
11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or
companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located,
property insurance written on a builder's risk "all-risk" or equivalent policy form in the amount
of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of
materials supplied or install.ed by others, c?mprising to~al value for the entir~ Project at the site THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
on.3 r~placement costbas~s Wltho~t op?onal deductibles. Such property illsur:mce shall ?e CONSEOUEN~. CONSULTATION WITH AN
mamtamed, unless otherwISe provIded ill the Contract Documents or otheIWlSe, agreed ill ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
, writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
haS been made as provided j.n Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner MODIFlCAnON. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11.4 to be covered, ELECTRONlCALL Y DRAFtED AlA
whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA
Subcontractors and Sub-subconu-actors in the Project. 'DOCUMENT 0401.
11.4.1.1 Prop~rty insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall, This document has been approved and
include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and e[lCiorsed by Th7 Ass~dated General
physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, maliCious Contradors of America.
mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary
buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any
applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and
Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss.
11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the
Contract and with all qf the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so
inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may
then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and
Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be
charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to
purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in
writing, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.
11.4.1.3 If the prop~rty insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not
covered because of such deductibles.
11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also
portions of the Work in transit.
11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence
until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to
such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor
shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall,
without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that
would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance.
~.
-...........--
-
11.4.2 Boiler and MacDinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler (J1997 AIACil
and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, ,whic!). shall' AlA D<?CUMENT A20l - 1997
specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the GENERAL CONDITIONS OFTHE
, CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>Copynght 1911, 1915, 19ia, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, (Q 1997 by The ... .
American Institute of Architects. fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright Jaws of the United 17.35 ~ew York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U5. ,Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
37
Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the. Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and
Sub-subcontractors:in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds.
1\
11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and
maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property
due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the
Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire or
other hazards however caused.
r
11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described
herein or other special causes of loss be included in' the property insurance policy, the O\Vl1er
shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charge~ to the Contractor
by appropriate Change Order.
11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insur~s properties, real or .
personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance' under policies separate from THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL .~ .
th . . th p' 'f ft fin 1 .... . b 'd d th CONSEOUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
ose msunng. e rOJect, or 1 ~ er a p~yment property ms,!ranc.e IS to e p:OVl e .on e ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
complete~ ProJe~ through a policy or pOliCl~ other ~an tl;ose msurmg the ~rolectdunng the RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETiON OR
constructlOn penod, the Owner shall waIve all nghts ill accordance WIth the terms of MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
Subparagraph 1l.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate ELECTRONIC ALL Y DRAFTED AiA "
property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this .waiver of subrogation by DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
endorsement or otherwise. DOCUMENT D401. ..
11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall. fill; with the Contractor a copy
of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 1l.4- Each policy
shall contain all genenilly applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements
related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled
or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days' prior written
notice has been given to the Contractor.
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Contractors of America.
11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1)
each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of
the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in
Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for
damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance
obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 1l.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work,
except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary.
The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants,
separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors,
agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally
required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other pa~es enumerated herein. The
policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of
subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would
otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did n()t pay the insurance
premium directly or indirectly, and whether or' not the person or entity had an insurable
interest in the property damaged. '
./
,
,1
11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as
fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may
appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 1l.4.10.
The Contractor shaJl pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the
Contractor, and by appropriate agreements; written where legally required for validity, shall
require Subcontractors to make payments to their S~b-subcontractors in similar manner.
-~~
"'l ."
.....~.-
-..,...........
-
.1
11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon
occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The
Cl1997 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT A2CH - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
)>Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates u.s. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA license Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
. .1.
II
I
38
--ij
~]
'-~
'-~
]
,.".~
:-1
~]
1
'1
"J
,-
'"]
'}
'/
OJ
_' J
cost of r~quired bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall
deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in
accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an
arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as proVided in Paragraph 4-6. If after
such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for "
convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after
notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7.
11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless
one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to
the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection is 'made, the dispute shall be resolved as
provided in Paragraphs 4.5 and 4.6. The Owner as fiduciary shall, in the case of arbitration,
make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators. If distribution of
insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution.
11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
11.5.1 'The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTjl.TlpN WITH AN
~ .thful Ii f th C " d f bli"' . . th d ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
!a! p~r ox;ma!lce 0 . e ontract a~ paymen~ 0 .0 gations ansmg ereun er as RESPECT TOITS COMPLETiON OR
stipulated ill ~ldding requIrements or specifically reqUIred ill the Contract Documents on'the MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
date of execution of the Contract. ELECTRON/CALLY DRAFTED AlA "
DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA
11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of DOCUMENT D4Dl.
bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall
promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made.
ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.1 UNCOVERING OFWORK
12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to
requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing
by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the
Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time.
This document hasbeen approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Contractors of America.
12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically
requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work
and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract
Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the
Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction
shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate
contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs.
12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to
conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after
Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of
correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation _
for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be" at the Contractor's II
expense.
12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ~)f..l,! ~~
12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.5, if, within one year ....-=--
after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the
date for commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an
applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to ~11~7 ~g;u M ENT A20l - 1997
be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.s. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/2712003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
I
.1
,J
.I
39
correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner
has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall
give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for
correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an
opportunity to make the correction, tlle Owner waives the rights to require correction by the
Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct
nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from
the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2-4.
s'
i.
.:
.~
12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to
portions of Work first' performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between
Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work.
"
I
12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective
Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Paragraph 12.2.
"
12.2.3 The Contractor shall r~move from the site portions of the Work which are not in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the
Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CONsULTATION WITH AN ".
ATtORNEY ISENCOURAGED WITH
RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRON/CALL Y DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT~YBEMADE8YU~NGAfA
DOCUMENT 0401.
. 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction,
whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the
Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents. .
This document has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of Contradorsof America.
limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the
Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction ofW ork as described
in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the
Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the
Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings
may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's
obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.
.,
i
o.i
....,
,
~
, t
12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK
12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and
correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such
adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. .
',1
. .1
ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.1 GOVERNING LAW
13.1. 1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located.
,
,
"
.1
13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, _
assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns' II
and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and ~
obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Subparagraph 13.2.2, ~i.. .
neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of ~"!'.IJN.i
the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party......'...
shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. -
13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an
institutional lender providing construction financing for the ProjecL In such event, the lender
iD1997 AlAI/)
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
.1
')Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or .substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United ]735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.s. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a20l.aia - 10127/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2129/2004. .
40
-]
]
-~
~~
']
.-]
1
J
"]
'-1
']
1
J
"I
.J
.J
J
,.1
shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The
Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. ,
13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE
13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the
individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was
intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address
known to the party giving notice.
13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies
available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights
and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.
13.4~2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the ~ontract, nor shall such action or failure to CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN
act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically AITORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
agreed in Writing. " RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
MOD/FICA TlON. AUTHENTICA TlON OF THIS
13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS ELECTRONICALLYDRAmDAIA
13.5.1 Tests, inspections and. approvals of portions of the Work required by the'Contract DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA
Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having DOCUMEN~ 0401.
jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time.'Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor' T.'L: J ' t' h b d nd
' h II ale' fa h . .' d als.th. d d . IllS uocumen as een approve a
sam e ,arrangements r suc tests, mspections an approv ,WI an m epen ent testmg endorsed by The Assodated General
laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall Contractors of America.
bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect
timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may
be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals
which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. '.
13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that
portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under.
Subparagraph 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, 'iJIstruct the
Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an
entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the ArChitect of
when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for
such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner's
expense.
13.5.3 If such procedureS for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and
13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the
Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated
procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required _
by the Contract Dqcuments, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the II
Architect. .
13.5.5 If th, Ardlltect " to 0\'<''''' "ill, in>p,ctions or approvals required by th, Contract :;,y~ ~~
Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of ..........11....-
testing. -
13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract DOl:;uments shall be made
promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work.
01997 AJA@
AlA DOCUMENT AlOl-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OFTHE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION,
))Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subj~ct the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, whic~ expires on 2/29/2004.
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W. ,
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
41
r-
13.6 INTEREST
13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the
date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence
thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is locat~d.
i-
;j
1
i-
r
13.7
13.7.1
COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD
As between the Owner and Contractor:
.1
r
T
,
.1
Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior
to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable. statute. of
limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause. of action shall be
deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of
Substantial Completion;
.2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As
to acts or failures to act occtming subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORtANT LEGAL
Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Paynient, any CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN r
applicable statute of.limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH
action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
date of issuance of the [mal Certificate for Payment; and MODmCATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
.3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA . . r-
after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment any DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AlA
applicable statute of limita:tions shall commence. to run and any alleged ca~se of DOCUMENT D401.
action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the Th....J . t h b .. d d
d f "_:1 b th c. . Hr " IS uocumen as eenapprove .an
ate.o any act or l<wure to act y e ontractor. pursuant to any yv :manty endorsed by The Assoda'ted General
proVIded under Paragraph 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure to Contractors of America: .
correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2, or the date of actual
commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the
Contractor or Owner, whichever occurs last.
F
r
I
f'
.
ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
14.1 TERMINATION BYTHE CONTRACTOR
14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period'of 30
consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-
subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performmg portions
of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following.
reasons:
.1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which .
requires all Work to be stopped;
.2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency which requires i
all Work to be stopped; "
.3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not
notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in
Subparagraph 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made paynient on a Certificate
for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or
.4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the
Contractor's request, reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. I!!!!!!!!I
14.1.2 The Contract~r may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fauLt of the ._
Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other ....~.~.. .,1
persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the "":;.............~.::-
Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as _
described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total
number of days scheduled for completion, or uo days in any 365-day period, whichever is less. 01997 AIA@ .,
AlA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963. 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United
States and will subject the viqlate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates u.s.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the d<;lte of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia -- 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/2912004.
. .
The American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 .
42
"]
1
,1J
,r]
~.~
"l
"11
:']
'.
]
'J
.-
'1
'J
J
I
1
J _
I
I
..I
..r
14.1.3 If one qf the reasons described in Subparagraph 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 eXists, the. Contractor
may, upon seven days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract 'and
recovei: from the Owner payment f9r Work executed and for proven -loss with respect to
materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable
.overhead, profit .and damages.
14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of
the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or eniployees or any other persons perforniing
portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently
failed to fu~fi1l the Owner's obligatio:~].s under the Contract Documents with respect to mattt~rs
important to the progress of the \york, the Contractor may, upon seven additiona! days'
written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract ana. recover from' the
Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.3.
14.2
14.2.1
; TERMINATION BYTHE OWNER FOR'CAUSE
The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor:
. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
CONSEQUENCES. CoNsULT AnON WITHAN
.1 . persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH
workers or proper materials; . . RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
.2 fails to r,nake payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance With MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF TH/S
the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Sl1bcontractorS; . . ELECTRON/CALLY DRAFTED AlA
.3 persistently disregard.s laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public DOCUMENT MA Y BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT 0401.
authority having jurisdiction; or
.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial
Documents.
breach of a provision of the Contract This docuf1!erit .has been approved and
endorsed by The Assodated General
Contradors of America. .
14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect
that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or
remedies of the Owner ;md after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any,
seven days' written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any
prior rights of the surety:
.1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction
equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;
~2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.;J; and
.3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.
Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a
detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.
14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in
Su~paragraph 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the
Work is finished.
14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,
includmg compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and
other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the
Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may '!!!!!!'
be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall II
survive termination of the Contrad .
143 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE ~!.f5,".i
14.3.1 :The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or -
interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.
Cl1997 AIAGl
AlA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
>>Copyrrght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington; D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced . .
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/27/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
43
I
I
n.
. i
I; -I
14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Cont:IactTiine shall be adjusted for increases in.the cost and
time caused by suspension, delay or. interruption .as. described: in Subparagraph' i4.3.1.
Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shan be made to the
extent:
.1 that performanceis, was orwould have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted
by another cause for which the' Contractor is responsible; or'
.2 that an equitable adjustment is .made or denied under anoth~r provision of the
Contract.
n-
: f
i_~-:-
~,.
r,'
14.4 TERMINATION BY THE bWNE.R FOffcONVENIENCE
14.4.1 The Owner may, at anytinie,'iermiIiate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and
without cause. .. .. '
.',
14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for.the Owner's
conyenience, the Contractor shall: , THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL
.1 ceaSe operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN r~-
;2 take action's neceSsary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGEQ WITH I .'
preservation of the Work and . RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR
" . .,' , . .. , MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
'.3 except for Work drrect~d, to be performed pnor to th~ effective date of ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA "';'
termination stated in the notice, terininate all existing subcontracts and purchase DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY. USING AlA
orders and enter mto rio further subcontracts and purchase orders. . DOCUMENT D401.
14.4.3 In case of such termmation for the Owner's convenience, the .c.ontractor shall be
entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs mcurred by reason of such
termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not execut~d. '
This document h!JS been approved and
endorsed by The Associated General
Con/radors of America.
.-?
: .-?
''I'
I
I!
;.
, .J
~
~'J..V1~ \
....,; .........;:0-
-
101997 AIA@ "
AlA DOCUMENT A20l - 1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
),Copynght 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, i970, 1976, 1987, @ 1997 by The
American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects
quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright Jaws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates u.s. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
copyright laws and will subject the violator to Jegal prosecution. This document was electronically produced
with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until
the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia - 10/2712003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29f2004.
44
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
DESCRIPTION
THIS SUPPLEMENT shall modify, delete from, and add and replace by substitution to the "General
Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AlA Document A201, 1997 Edition. Where any Article,
Paragraph, Subparagraph, or Clause of the General Conditions thereof is modified or deleted by this
Supplement, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph, or Clause remain in effect.
If and to the extent that this Supplement is inconsistent with the Owner-Contractor Agreement, the
Specifications and other relevant transaction documents, this Supplement shall control.
ARTICLE 1. - GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 ADD the following to Subparagraph 1.1.1:
All provision of the Revised Code of Washington (RCW) are specifically included in the
General Conditions by reference, including the following:
a) RCW CH 18.27 - Relating to registration of contractors.
b) RCW CH 39.04 - Relating to plans and specifications on work done for public
bodies, estimates of costs of work, supplemental plans and specifications,
supplemental estimates, accounts and records of costs, and engineer's certificate.
c) RCW CH 39.08 - Relating to form of contractor's bonds and liens.
d) RCW CH 39.12 - Concerning the prevailing wage rates to be paid to labor on
public works, the certificates required by the state, the arbitration of disputes
over wages, and penalties.
e) RCW CH 39.16 - Relating to resident employees on public works.
t) RCW CH 39.25 - Relating to offshore items.
g) RCW CH 49.28 - Relating to hours of labor.
h) RCW CH 49.60 - Relating to nondiscrimination.
i) RCW CH 60.08 - Relating to the withholding and payment of retain age.
j) RCW CH 60.28 - Relating to labor and material liens and taxes and retainage.
k) RCW CH 70.92 - Relating to provisions for the aged and handicapped.
1. 1. 1.1
"In the event of a conflict or discrepancy among or in the Contract Documents,
interpretation shall be governed in the following priority:
a) Agreement (AIA-lOI) (written amendments having precedence)
b) Supplemental Conditions
c) General Conditions (AIA-20I)
d) Addenda (later having precedence over earlier)
e) Specification
t) Schedules on the drawings
g) Drawings (large-scale having precedence over small-scaled, and written
dimensions having precedence over scaled dimensions)
DELETE the last sentence of Subparagraph 1.1.1.
1.1.3
ADD the following to subparagraph 1.1.3:
The Contractor acknowledges and warrants that he has closely examined all the Contract
Documents, that they are suitable and sufficent to enable the Contractor to complete the
Work in a timely manner for the Contract Sum, and that they include all work, whether or
not shown or described, which reasonably may be inferred to be required or useful for the
SUPPLEMENT AR Y CONDITIONS
00800-1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
Contractor is to install all work in accordance with Manufacturer's or
Manufacturers' directions.
1. Conflict between Manufacturer's Recommendations and these
Documents:
a. Should any provision of these documents be in conflict with
Manufacturer's or Manufacturers' recommendations,
immediately notify Architect.
1) Do not proceed until written authorization is
received.
P. "Product" as used in these Contract Documents refers to materials, systems, and
equipment provided by Contractor.
Q. "Project Manual" as used in these Contract Documents includes Bidding
Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract, General
Requirement, Specifications, and any other items that may be listed/Table of
Contents.
R. "Knowledge". The terms "knowledge", "recognize" and "discover", their
respective derivatives and similar terms in the Contract Documents, as used in
reference to the Contractor, shall be interpreted to mean that which the
Contractor knows (or should know), recognizes (or should recognize) and
discovers (or should discover) in exercising the care, skill, and diligence
required by the Contract Documents, Analogously, the expression "reasonably
inferable" and similar terms in the Contract Document shall be interpreted to
mean reasonably inferable by a contractor familiar with the Project and
exercising the care, skill and diligence required of the Contractor by the
Contract Documents.
1.5
EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.5.1
ADD the following to Subparagraph 1.5.1:
The parties' signatures on A-IOl (1997 Edition) shall be in lieu of signing each Contract
Document.
1.5.2
ADD the following to Subparagraph 1.5.2:
By executing this Contract, the Contractor represents and acknowledges that the Contract
Sum is reasonable compensation for all the Work, that the Contract Time is adequate for
the performance of the Work, and that it has carefully examined the Contract Documents
and the Project Site, including any existing buildings, and that it has satisfied itself as to
the nature, location, character, quality and quantity of the Work, the labor, materials,
equipment, goods, supplies, work, services and other items to be furnished and all other
requirements of Contract Documents, as well as the surface conditions and other maters
that may be encountered at the Project Site or affect performance of the Work or the cost
or difficulty thereof, including but not limited to those conditions and matters affecting:
transportation, access, disposal, handling and storage of materials, equipment and
condition of roads; normal climatic conditions and seasons; physical conditions at the
Project Site and the surrounding locality; topography and ground surface conditions; and
equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and at all times during the performance of
the Work. The failure of the Contractor to fully acquaint itself with any such condition or
matter shall not in any way relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for performing
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and within the Contract Time and
the Contract Sum.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
completion of the Work in full compliance with all applicable codes, laws, ordinances,
and regulations.
1.1.4
ADD the following to Subparagraph 1.1.4:
The Project will cover the following as applicable and without limitation: Preparatory
work, selective demolition, site preparation, construction, and post-construction work.
1.1.8
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
MISCELLANEOUS
A. "Approved" means "approved by Architect".
B. "For approval" means "for Architect's approval".
C. "Selected" means "as selected by Architect".
D. "As directed" means "as directed by Architect".
E. "As required" means:
1. "As required to suitably complete the Work"; and
2. "At the direction of the Architect".
F. "Provide" means "pay for, furnish, and install complete, in place, ready for
operation, and use".
G. Where "or approved" is used, Architect is sole judge of quality and suitability of
substitution.
H. "Verify" means "verify existing conditions and coordinate with Architect".
I. "Indicated" means "where reasonably implied and necessary in conformance
with work specified, drawn, or required for completion". Words "indicate".
Drawings "indicate".
J. "Specialist" means "an individual or firm of established reputation (or, if newly
organized, whose personnel have previously established a reputation in the same
field".
This individual or firm must be regularly engaged in and maintain a regular
force of workmen skilled in (as applicable): Manufacturing, fabricating, or
otherwise performing required work.
K. "Contractor" refers, as applicable, to the General Prime Contractor (as
mentioned in Form of Agreement), thus differentiated from a Subcontractor,
even though "Contractor" may be used with respect to Subcontractor's work.
L. "Contractor" or "you" referenced in Imperative: Where imperative mode is
used, General Prime Contractor is the one who shall perform or is responsible
for the performance of others.
M. "Manufacturer's Recommendations":
1. Unless otherwise noted directed, install all work in accordance with
each Manufacturer's recommendations for the best results.
a. Not one preparatory step or installation procedure may be
omitted unless specifically modified or exempted by these
documents.
N. "Manfuacturers' (Manufacturer's) Directions and Recommendations":
1. Where Contractor is required to follow Manufacturer's directions,
recommendations, instructions, and the like, but more than one
Manufacturer is involved in the work or its components parts,
Contractor must follow all Manufacturers' directions and
recommendations.
a. In the event of conflict between Manufacturers' directions and
recommendations, Contractor shall submit discrepancy or
conflict to Architect for resolution and instructions.
O. "Install in Accordance with Manufacturer's or Manufactureres' directions":
Throughout the Documents, although it may not be specifically stated,
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
ARTICLE 2. - Owner
2.2.1
DELETE Subparagraph 2.2.1
2.2.4
DELETE the word "Information" at the Beginning of Subparagraph 2.2.4 and substitute
in lieu thereof "Upon receipt of a written request therefor from the Contractor,
information" .
2.2.5
DELETE Subparagraph 2.2.5 and substitute in lieu thereof the following:
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished,
free of charge, twenty (20) copies of the Drawings and Specifications prepared by the
Architect, and other drawings and documents necessary for the execution and completion
of the Work shall be furnished at Contractor's expense.
2.3.1
DELETE the word "persistently" in the first sentence of Subparagraph 2.3.1. In addition,
delete the clause ", except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3", at the end of
Subparagraph 2.3.1., and insert at the end of Subparagraph 2.3.1 the following:
This right shall be in addition to, and not in restriction of, the Owner's rights under
Subparagraph 12.2.
2.4.1
DELETE the first two sentences of Subparagraph 2.4.1. and substitute the following in
lieu thereof:
If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice
from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with
sufficient diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies
the Owner may have, commence and continue to carry out the Work.
DELETE the fourth sentence of Subparagraph 2.4.1 and add at the end of Subparagraph
2.4.1. the following sentence:
The right of the Owner to stop the Work pursuant to this Subparagraph 2.4.1 shall not
give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the
Contractor or any other person or entity.
ARTICLE 3. - CONTRACTOR
3.1.4
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
The Contractor shall be and operate as an independent contractor in the performance of
the Work and shall have complete control over and responsibility for all personnel
performing the Work. In no event shall the Contractor be authorized to enter into any
agreements or undertakings for or on behalf of the Owner or to act as or be an agent or
employee of the Owner.
3.2.1
DELETE the Subparagraph 3.2.1 and substitute in lieu thereof the following:
The Contractor hereby specifically acknowledges and declares that Contract Documents
are full and complete, are sufficient to have enabled it to determine the cost of the Work
and that the Drawings, the Specifications and all addenda are sufficient to enable the
Contractor to construct the Work outlined therein in accordance with applicable laws,
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
statutes, building codes and regulations, and otherwise to fulfill all of its obligations
under the Contract Documents, In addition, if the Contractor performs any construction
activity and if it knows or should have know that any of the Contract Documents contains
a recognizable error, inconsistency, or omission, the Contractor shall be responsible for
such performance and shall bear the cost for correction thereof.
If the Contractor claims an additional cost is involved because of conflicts or omissions
in the Contract Documents, the Contractor and Subcontractors will be deemed to have
carefully reviewed all of the Contract Documents, including drawings, schedules, and
specifications, and the most expensive work indicated thereon shall be provided with no
change in the Contract Sum or Time. In the event that work is shown but not specified, it
will be assumed the work as shown shall be provided at no change in the Contract Sum or
Time, according to specifications to be issued by the Architect.
3.2.2
ADD the following clauses to Subparagraph 3.2.2:
3.2.2.1
the exactness of grades, elevations, dimensions, or locations given on any drawings
issued by the Architect, or the work installed by other Contractors, is not guaranteed by
the Architect or the Owner.
The Contractor shall, therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations,
dimensions, and locations. In all cases of interconnection of its Work with existing or
other work, it shall verify at the site all dimensions relating to such existing or other
work. Any errors due to the Contractor's failure to so verify all such grades, elevations,
locations, or dimensions shall be promptly rectified by the Contractor without any
additional cost to the Owner.
3.2.2.2
3.3.1
ADD the following to Subparagraph 3.3.1:
The contractor shall review any such specific instructions and any construction or
installation procedure specified in the Contract Documents and shall advise the Architect:
a) if the specified instruction or procedure deviates from what the Contractor
considers to be good construction practice,
b) if following the instruction or procedure will effect any warranties, or
c) if the Contractor objects to the instruction or procedure, and shall propose
alternative instructions or procedures acceptable to the contractor, for which no
increase in the Contract Sum or Time will be made.
3.3.4
ADD the following provision as a new Subparagraph 3.3.4:
At the earliest possible time after the commencement of the Work on the Project Site, the
Contractor shall have all property comers and benchmarks verified or established by a
state-licensed land surveyor, shall locate the Project on the Project Site, establishing
necessary reference marks and axes from which the Work accurately can progress, shall
furnish Architect evidence of such verification and shall report at once any errors
discovered during the process of such verification.
3.3.5
ADD the following provision as a new Subparagraph 3.3.5:
The Contractor shall perform such detailed examination, inspection, and quality
surveillance of the Work as will ensure that the Work is progressing and is being
completed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, including the then latest
issue of the Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for
examination, inspection, and quality surveillance of all Work performed by any
Subcontractor of any tier. The Contractor shall determine when it is necessary to
perform, and shall perform, tests (in addition to those requested by the Owner or required
by the Specifications or any other provision of the Contract Documents) to verify its
SUPPLEMENT AR Y CONDITIONS
00800-5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
inspections or to ensure that the Work is being completed in strict accordance with the
Contract Documents.
3.4.4.
ADD the following provision as a new Subparagraph 3.4.4.:
The Contractor shall inspect all materials as delivered to the premises and shall reject any
materials that will not conform with the Contract Documents when properly installed.
3.4.6.
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
The Contractor is restricted in his selection of labor and payment by legal requirements
for compliance with public policy enunciated in RCW 39.12 and RCW 49.28. This refers
to prevailing wages, eight (8) hour day, payment for overtime, cancellation of Contract
for violations, and the like. (Wage rates for Clallam County are included in this
documents).
3.4.7.
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless, including attorneys' fees,
from any violation or alleged violation of RCW 39.12 by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor of any tier.
3.6.1
ADD the following to the end of Subparagraph 3.6. I:
Taxes to be paid include those imposed by Federal, State, County, and City governments
excepting only real estate taxes on the property, and such taxes as applicable shall not be
included in the proposal sums.
The State and local retail sales tax is not permitted to be included in the proposal sums;
the Owner will pay sales taxes proportionately with each periodic and final payment
request in addition to the amount allowed on the payment certificate and Contractor shall
pay such taxes to the authority as required by law.
3.7.1
ADD the following to the end of subparagraph 3.7.1:
The Contractor shall procure all certificates of inspection, use, occupancy, permits and
licenses, except as noted in Specifications and pay all charges and fees, and give all
notices necessary and incidental to the due and lawful prosecution of the Work. Owner
will be responsible for Building Permit and Inspection Fees only. Certificates of
inspection, use and occupancy shall be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the
Work in sufficient time for occupation of the Project in accordance with the approved
schedule for the Work, The costs of such procurement, payment, and delivery are
included within the Contract Sum.
3.7.5
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
CONTRACTOR REGISTRA nON
Pursuant to RCW 39.06, the Contractor shall be registered or licensed as required by the
laws of the State of Washington, including but not limited to RCW 18.27.
3.7.6
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
LA W AGAINST DISCRIMINA nON
Contractor should comply with pertinent statutory provisions relating to public works of
RCW 49.60.
3.7.7
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
PREOVISIONS FOR AGED AND
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-6
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
HANDICAPPED PERSONS
Contractor should comply with pertinent statutory provisions relating to public works of
RCW 70.92.
3.7.9
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
OFFSHORE ITEMS
In compliance with RCW 39.25, furnish to the Owner a certified statement setting forth
the nature and source of Offshore Items in excess of $2,500.00 which have been utilized
under each prime contract in the performance of the Work. "Offshore Items" are those
items procured from sources beyond the territorial boundaries of the United States
including Alaska and Hawaii. This certified statement is mandatory and shall be received
before final payment is made on the contract.
3.7.10
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
CONTRACTOR'S OPERATIONS
Meet requirements of applicable Federal and State law and all safety regulations set forth
in "Safety Standards for Construction" and "General Safety Standards", published and in
effect at time of receipt of Bids. These may be obtained from Department of Labor and
Industries. Contractor Shall comply with pertinent provisions of Chapter WAC 296-155.
"Safety Standards for Construction Work" and RCW 49.17 "Washington Industrial
Safety and Health Act".
3.7.11
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
The Contractor and all subcontractors of any tier shall fully comply with all applicable
federal, state, and local laws and regulations regarding drug free workplace, including the
Drug Free workplace Act of 1988.
3.7.13
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
SMOKE FREE ENVIRONMENT
In accord with Section 6, Chapter 23, Laws of 1989, the Board of Directors has
established policy prohibiting use of tobacco products on public property.
3.9.1
ADD the following to the end of Subparagraph 3.9.1:
the Superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Owner in all respects, and Owner shall
have the right to require Contractor to dismiss from the Project any Superintendent whose
performance is not satisfactory to the Owner, and to replace such Superintendent with a
Superintendent satisfactory to the Owner.
3.9.2
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
The Superintendent shall remain on the Project whenever Subcontractors are present and
not less than eight (8) hours per day, five (5) day a week unless the job is closed down
due to a general strike, conditions beyond the control of the Contractor, termination of the
Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents, or until Final Completion. The
Superintendent shall not be changed without the Owner's approval, which shall not be
unreasonably withheld. The Superintendent shall not be employed on any other project
during the course of the Work.
3.10.1
DELETE Subparagraph 3.10.1 and substitute the following in lieu thereof:
The Contractor, immediately after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare in
consultation with the Owner and Architect and submit for the Owner's and Architect's
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-7
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.10.1.1
3.10.1.2
3.10.1.3
3.10.1.4
3.10.1.5
3.10.1.6
3.10.1.7
approval a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work, the construction schedule
shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be updated and
revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project,
shall be related to the entire Project, shall provide for expeditious and practicable
execution of the Work and shall not be modified or extended without the prior approval
of the Owner and Architect in each instance.
Payment to the Contractor will be withheld until a Progress Schedule In a form
satisfactory to the Owner and Architect has been submitted.
The Progress Schedule shall be based upon a Critical Path Analysis ("CPM") of
construction activities and sequence of operations needed for the orderly performance
and completion of all separable parts of the Work in accordance with the Contract. The
schedule shall be a Critical Path method type in the form of an arrow diagram and
activity listing. The network diagram shall show in detail and in order sequence all
significant activities their descriptions, duration, and dependencies necessary and
required to complete all Work and any separable parts thereof. The activity listing shall
show the following information for each activity on the network diagram:
a) Description;
b) Duration; (not to exceed two weeks)
c) Craft and equipment;
d) Start and finish dates;
e) Total float time and free float time; and
t) Dates that work must be done by other contractors to support the Work and the
interfaces with such other contractors, including coordination with the date of
actual completion of other contractor activities which preceded the Work under
this Contract.
g) Cost component tied to the Schedule of Values.
Milestone completions shall be clearly defined on the Progress Schedule.
The Critical Path shall be clearly indicated on the Progress Schedule.
If abbreviations are used in the Progress Schedule, a legend shall be provided to define all
abbreviations.
Within ten (l0) days after receipt by the Owner, two (2) copies of the Progress Schedule
will be returned to the Contractor. These copies will be returned with comments,
following review by the Owner and Architect. The review by the Owner and Architect of
the Contractor's schedule will be for the purpose of evaluating the Contractor's ability to
complete the work within the Contract time, and shall not constitute an approval or
acceptance of the Contractor's construction means, methods, or sequencing.
Any float time shall be deemed to be for the joint use of the Owner and the Contractor,
provided, however, that, in the event of any conflicting need for or overlapping use of
any float time, the Owner shall have priority for the use of such float time, and the
Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Time, the Progress
Schedule, or the Contract Sum, or to any additional payment of any sort by reason of the
Owner's use of any float time.
Should it become evident that the Contractor may fail to meet the scheduled dates as
shown, the Contractor shall, upon request, be required at his own expense to submit
within ten (l0) days of the request a revised Progress schedule and at his own expense to
increase his work force and working hours (e.g. second and third shifts) as required to
bring the actual completion dates of the activities onto conformance with the Progress
Schedule. Further, the Contractor shall submit a revised Progress Schedule at his own
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-8
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.10.1.8
3.10.4
3.11.1
3.12.11
3.12.12
3.18.1
expense if, in the opinion of the Architect, his sequence of work varies significantly from
that shown on the Progress Schedule, The Owner reserves the right to withhold progress
payments until such time as an approved modified Progress Schedule in a form
satisfactory to the Architect has been provided by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner and the Architect in writing of any
proposed changes in the progress schedule or the Contract Time and of any event which
could delay performance or supplying f any item if the Work and shall indicate the
expected duration of the Progress Schedule and the action being taken to correct the delay
situation. Failure to so notify in writing shall be an absolute waiver if any claims arising
in any way from such a delay. Without relieving the Contractor of any liability for
failure to perform or for any delay in performance, in the event of delays in progress of
the Work that are not excusable delays under Paragraph 8.3.1, of the General Conditions
and that might cause a delay or delays in completion of the Work as required by the
Contract. The Contractor shall utilize, with no increase in the Contract Sum and at no
additional cost to the Owner, such work forces, equipment, and overtime, and shall take
such additional steps as are necessary in order to effectively eliminate or minimize such
delays and to comply wit the Progress Schedule. Failure to do so shall be cause for
termination.
ADD the following as new Subparagraph 3.10.4:
The Contractor shall hold weekly progress meetings at the Project Site, or as such other
time and frequency as the Owner requests. Progress of the Work shall be reported in
detail with reference to construction schedules. Each interested Subcontractor shall
present a competent representative to report the conditions of its work and to receive
information.
The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Owner's and Architect's approval,
a Schedule of submittals which shall be coordinated with the Contractor's construction
schedule and allows the Architect and Owner reasonable time to review submittals.
INSERT immediately after the word "Work" in the last sentence of Subparagraph 3.11.1
the following:
Signed by the Contractor, certifying that they show complete and exact "as-built"
conditions, stating sizes, kind of materials, vital piping, conduit locations and similar
matters.
ADD the following provision as new Subparagraph 3.12.11:
The Contractor shall assemble for the Architect's approval three (3) copies in loose-leaf
binders of all operating and maintenance data form all manufacturers whose equipment is
or will be installed in the Work. The Contractor shall also prepare a checklist or schedule
showing the type of lubricant to be used at each point of application and the intervals
between lubrication for each item of equipment.
ADD the following provision as new Subparagraph 3.12.12:
The Contractor shall submit to Owner one (1) copy of all submissions made to the
Architect puissant to this Paragraph 3.12.
CHANGE this Subparagraph to read:
The Contractor shall indemnify to the extent allowed by law and hold harmless the
Owner and the Architect and their agents, consultants, and employees successors and
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-9
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
assigns from and against all claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including attorney's
fees, arising out of or resulting from any act or omission of the Contractor, any of its
Subcontractors of any tier, and anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Contractor
or Subcontractors of any tier, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party
indemnified hereunder. The Contractor agrees to being named by the Owner or the
Architect as a party to any arbitration or litigation in which the Owner or Architect
alleges indemnification or contribution from the Contractor, any of its Subcontractors,
anyone employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.
The Contractor agrees that all of its Subcontractors similarly stipulate; if they fail to do
so, the Contractor agrees to assume their liability.
The Contractor further agrees to the jurisdiction of any such arbitration or litigation.
3.18.2
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
It is the intent of this contract to require the Contractor to indemnify the Owner and the
Architect and their agents, consultants, employees, successors, and assigns to the fullest
extent permitted by RCW Chapter 4.22 as it now exists or is hereafter amended. It is
specifically intended that the Contractor's indemnity shall cover allegations of concurrent
negligence of indemnitor and indemnitee, their agents or employees; and that the duty to
so indemnify shall cover all costs of defense of such claims. The Contractor's indemnity
obligations shall not cover allegations or adjudicated determinations that the liability
arises from the sole negligence of an indemnitee. In claims against any indemnitee by an
employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by
them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation
hereunder shall not be limited by the Washington State worker's compensation law,
RCW Title 5 I . Only to the extent necessary to provide the indemnification of others
provided herein above, the signing of the contract by the Contractor shaH operate as a
waiver of the Contractor's immunity form suit under RCW Title 51. The Contractor shall
provide insurance covering such indemnity obligations subject to the terms and
conditions provided in Article I I including the naming of Owner and Architect as
additional insured upon such policy.
ARTICLE 4 - ADMINSITRA TlON OF THE CONTRACT
4.1.3
DELETE "whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection and".
4.2.2
DELETE "generally", and "in a manner...when completed" In first sentence of
Subparagraph 4.2.2.
ADD the following sentence to Subparagraph 4.2.2:
The presence of the Architect, Project Manager or the Owner at the site shall not in any
manner be construed as assurance that the Work is completed in compliance with the
Contract Documents, nor as evidence that any requirement of the Contract Documents of
any kind, including notice, has been met or waived.
4.2.3
MODIFY both the first and the second sentences of this Subparagraph to read:
"Neither the Architect, Project Manager nor the Owner will be .....
4.2.5
CHANGE this Subparagraph to read:
SUPPLEMENT AR Y CONDITIONS
00800- 10
1---
I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
Based on the Architect's observations, and an evaluation of the Contractor's application
for payment, the Architect wilI make recommendations to and otherwise assist the Owner
to determine the amounts owing to the Contractor and will issue Certificates of Payment
in such amounts.
4.2.13
ADD "and if approved by the Owner".
4.3.2
CHANGE "21 days" to "7 days"
ADD the following:
Claims not made within these seven (7) day time lines shall be waived by the Contractor.
That the Owner or Architect is aware of a potential claim by any means other than so
required herein shall not in any way prevent such waiver.
4.3.7
ADD the following Subparagraph:
The making of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Owner against
the Contractor except those arising from:
1. Unsettled liens or claims against the Owner or the Architect , or their
employees, agents, or representatives,
2. Faulty or defective Work appearing after Substantial Completion,
3. Failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract
Documents,
4. Any warranties contained in or required by the Contract Documents, or
5. Damages or costs, including attorney fees incurred by the Owner resulting from
lawsuits brought against the Owner, Architect or their agents, employees, or
representatives because of failures or actions on the part of the Contractor, his
Subcontractors, or any of their employees, agents, or representatives.
4.5.3
ADD to Subparagraph 4.5.3:
The Contractor shall carry on the Work and maintain the progress schedule during any
mediation or litigation proceedings, unless otherwise agreed by it with the Owner in
writing and the Owner shalI continue to make payments to the Contractor in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS
5.2.1
ADD the Following:
Approval of Subcontractor or Subcontractors, does not imply approval of product or
products other than originalIy specified.
5.2.3
CHANGE this Subparagraph to read:
If the Owner or Architect refuses to accept any Subcontractor or person or entity on a list
submitted by the Contractor in response to the requirements of the Contract Documents
or the Instructions to Bidders, the Contractor shall submit a substitute acceptable to the
Owner, and the Contract Sum shall be increased by no more than or decreased by no less
than the difference in original Subcontractor's bid, or, if the substitute Subcontractor did
not bid, by the actual difference in cost occasioned by such substitution.
5.2.5
Add the following new Subparagraph:
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-11
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
No subcontracting of any of the Work shall relieve the Contractor from its responsibility
for the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract or form its
responsibility for the performance of any other of its obligations under the Contract.
5.2.6
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
The Contractor shall schedule, supervise, and coordinate the operations of all
Subcontractors.
5.2.7
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
If any portion of the Work which has been subcontracted by the Contractor is not
prosecuted in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall, upon request of the
Owner, remove the Subcontractor performing such work. Such removal shall not relieve
the Contractor form its responsibility for the performance of the Work or complying with
all of the requirements of the Contract.
5.3.2
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that, at the time of final payment,
all liens have been waived or released and no liens can be asserted against the retainage
by any of its Subcontractors. The Owner may withhold payment pending acceptable
proof that all liens have been waived or released. The Contractor shall indemnify and
hold harmless the Owner for any such liens, including all expenses and attorney's fees.
5.5
ADD new Section:
PREPARATORY WORK
5.5.1
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
PREPARA TORY WORK: Before starting each section of Work, the Contractor
shall ensure that the responsible Subcontractor has carefully examined all preparatory
work that has been executed to receive his work. He shall check carefully, by whatever
means are required, to ensure that his work and adjacent related work will finish to proper
contours, planes, and levels. He shall promptly notify the Contractor who shall notify the
Architect in writing of any defects or imperfections in preparatory work which will, in
any way, affect satisfactory completion of the Work. Absence of such notification will
be construed as an acceptance of preparatory work and later claims of defects therein will
not be recognized.
5.5.2
Under no conditions shall a section of Work proceed prior to preparatory work having
been completed, cured, dried, and otherwise made satisfactory to receive such related
work. Responsibility for timely installation of all materials and equipment included
within the Work rests solely with the Contractor, who shall maintain coordination control
at all times.
ARTICLE 6 - WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
6.2.4
DELETE the word "wrongfully" in Subparagraph 6.2.4.
ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.3.3
CHANGE this Subparagraph to read:
Adjustments to the Contract Sum shall be determined on the basis of one of the following
methods:
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-12
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1. mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by
sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;
2. unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;
3. cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mututally
acceptable fixed or percentage fee.
4. as provided in Subparagraph 7.5; or
5. on a time-and-material basis as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6.
7.3.4
CHANGE this Subparagraph to read:
Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed
with the change in the Work involved. As soon as possible, and no later than within
seven (7) days of receipt, the Contractor shall advise the Architect in writing of the
Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the cost or the method, if any, provided in
the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the
Contract Sum or Contract Time. The Contractor's notice shall reasonably specify the
reasons for it's disagreement and the amount or other terms that it proposes. WITHOUT
SUCH TIMELY WRITTEN NOTICE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
CONCLUSIVELY BE DEEMED TO HA VE ACDEPTED THE OWNER'S
ADJUSTMENT. The Contractor's disagreement shall in no way relieve the Contractor
of its obligation to comply promptly with any written notice issued by the Owner or
Architect. The adjustment shall then be determined by the Architect on the basis of
reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the
change, in strict accordance with this paragraph and other applicable provisions of
Contract Documents.
7.3.6
CHANGE this Subparagraph to read:
The Contractor shall promptly proceed with the work involved in the Construction
Change Directive or Change Order upon written notice from the Owner. The cost of all
extra work, or additional work under the Contract shall be determined by the Architect on
the basis of the Contractor's reasonable expenditure and savings attributable to the
change in the Work, in strict accordance with this paragraph and other applicable parts of
the Contract. The Contractor shall keep and preserve, in such form as the Architect may
prescribe, an itemized accounting, together with supporting data. In order to facilitate
checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their
property can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by complete itemization of
costs, including labor materials and subcontract costs. Labor and materials shall be
itemized in the manner described below. When major cost items are subcontracts, they
shall be itemized also. The total cost shall be limited to the reasonable value, as
determined by the Architect, or the following.
1. Direct labor costs: This is defined as the estimated labor costs determined by
either the estimated number of craft hours and the hourly cost necessary to
perform the change in the Work, or the unit labor costs applied to the material
quantities, provided said unit labor costs are developed from the above craft man
hour cost, which ever is applicable, according to industry practice. The hourly
cost shall be based upon the following.
a. Basic Wages: Current minimum prevailing hourly wage, including
vacation pay, for all laborers and foremen performing and/or' directly
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-13
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
supervising the changed work on the site. These rates are established
by the following: The State of Washington Department of Labor and
Industries and/or regional labor union agreement, whichever is
applicable.
b. Fringe Benefits: Fringe benefits established by the State of Washington
Department of Labor and Industries or contributed to labor trust funds
as itemized fringe benefits, whichever is applicable.
c. Worker's Insurance: Direct contributions to the State of Washington as
industrial insurance; medical aid; and supplemental pension by class
and rates established by the State of Washington Department of Labor
and Industries.
d. Federal Insurance: Direct contributions required by the Federal
Insurance Compensation Act (FICA); Federal Unemployment Tax Act
(FUTA); and State Unemployment Compensation Act (SUCA).
2. Direct material costs: This is defined as an itemization of the established
quantity of materials necessary to perform the change in the work and the cost
therefore. These costs shall be by the unit costs applied to the quantity and
extended. The unit cost shall be based upon the net cost after all offered or
available discounts or rebates, freight costs, express charges, or special delivery
costs, when applicable. No lump sum costs will be allowed except when
approved in advance by the Architect.
3. Construction equipment usage costs; This is defined as an itemization of the
estimated length of time construction equipment will be used on Change Order
Work at the site. The rental costs applied thereto will be the rates established by
the following, whichever is applicable.
a. The current rental rates established by the agreement between the
Associated General Contractors and the Washington State Department
of Highways.
b. The current rental rates established by the State of Washington Utilities
and Transpiration Commission of trucks used on Highways.
c. The current rental rates established by the National Electrical
Contract's Association for equipment used on electrical work.
d. The current rental rates established by the Mechanical Contractors
Association for equipment used on mechanical work.
e. If equipment is required for which a rental rate is not established by any
of the above, an agreed rental rate shall be established for that
equipment, which rate and use must be approved by the Architect prior
to performing the Work.
The rates in effect at the time of the Work are the maximum rates
allowable for equipment of modem design and in good working
conditions and include full compensation for furnishing all fuel, oil,
lubrication, repairs, maintenance, and insurance. Equipment not of
modem design and/or not in good working condition will have lower
rates.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-14
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
4. Cost of change insurance or bond premium:
a. Contractor's Liability Insurance: The cost of changes in the
Contractor's Liability insurance arising from the change may be added
as a cost.
b. Public works bond: The cost of additional premium for the Contractor's
bond arising directly from the changed work may be added to the cost.
5. Overhead and Profit: Overhead shall include the following: bond premiums,
supervision, superintendence, wages of timekeepers, watchmen and clerks, small
tools, incidentals, general office expense, and all other expenses, not included in
cost. The allowance for overhead and profit combined, including impact costs,
included in the total cost to the Owner of any Construction Change Directive or
Change Order or any claim for additional work or extra payment of any kind on
this Project shall be strictly limited in all cases, including delay to the following
schedule:
a. For the Contractor, for any materials or work performed by the
Contractor's own forces, ten percent (10%) of the cost.
b. For the Contractor, for materials or work performed by his
Subcontractor, ten percent (10%) of the cost.
c. For each Subcontractor or lower tier Subcontractor involved, for any
materials or work performed by its own forces, ten percent (10%) of the
cost.
d. For each Subcontractor, for materials for work performed by his
Subcontractors of any lower tier, five percent (5%) of the amount due
the Sub-subcontractor.
e. The cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be
determined in accordance with Paragraph 7.3.7.
7.3.8
ADD the following to this Subparagraph:
any adjustment in the Contract Time arising from a Change or a Claim shall be limited to
the change in the actual critical path of the Progress Schedule directly caused thereby.
7.3.8.1
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
In the event the Owner and Contractor do not agree upon the adjustment in contract
compensation or for contract time, the Owner may, at its option, direct the Contractor to
proceed with the Work. The Contractor shall perform the Work in question in
accordance with the proposed Construction Change Directive, and the Owner and the
Contractor shall continue to negotiate the contract adjustment. The ultimate adjustment
shall not exceed the larger amount under dispute, be it the Contractor's or the Owner's
stated figure. In response to the Owner's order to proceed, the Contractor shall either
accept the Owner's value for the work or, within sever (7) days, notify the Owner in
writing of his disagreement and set forth in detail the reason for disagreement and the
amount or other terms that he proposes. Without such timely written notice, the
Contractor shall conclusively be deemed to have accepted the Owner's value. The
Contractor's disagreement shall in no way relieve the Contractor of its obligation to
comply promptly with any written notice issued by the Owner or Architect.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-15
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
ARTICLE 8. - TIME
8.1.3
CHANGE this Subparagraph to read:
The date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof is the date
certified by the Architect and agreed to by the Owner as stipulated in paragraph 9.8 of the
General Conditions after notification by the Contractor to the Architect that the Work is
substantially complete and obtaining from the Contractor an occupancy permit issued by
the local Building Department, when the construction of the Work is sufficiently
complete with all work and items indicated in the Contract Documents in place and
operational, all in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner may occupy
the Work or designate portion thereof for the use for which it is intended. The Architect
and Owner shall be allowed up to seven (7) days for review and notification to Contractor
as acceptance. Such acceptance, including preparation of the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, shall establish the Date of Substantial Completion as stipulated in Paragraph
9.8. The fact that the Owner may occupy the Work or designated portion thereof on or
after the date established for Substantial Completion of the Work does not indicate that
the Work is substantially completed, nor does such occupation toll any liquidated
damages requirement.
8.2.4
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
The Owner will incur serious and substantial special, incidental and consequential
damages if Substantial or Final Completion of the Work does not occur within the
Contract Time; however, it would be difficult if not impossible to determine the amount
of such damages. Consequently, a provision for liquidated damages is included in the
Contact. The Owner's right to liquidated damages is not affected by partial completion,
Substantial or Final Completion, occupancy, or beneficial occupancy.
8.2.5
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
Contractor shall be responsible for and pay liquidated damages in the amo I~ $50 .00
per day for each day after contract Time that Substantial Completion is ~~~~aine , as
determined by the Architect.
v~
f I O"D/.p Ii" .1
8.2.6
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
The provisions in the Contract of liquidated damages are intended to be in lieu of the
liability of the contractor for special, incidental and consequential damages (such as costs
of capital and loss of profits, use, and revenue) sustained by the Owner but shall not
relieve or release the Contractor from liability for any and all damage or damages
suffered by the Owner due to other breaches of the Contract or suffered by separate
contractors.
8.2.7
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
Contractor has reviewed the liquidated damages figures under both Subparagraphs 8.2.5
and 8.3.5 and believes them to be reasonable, and hereby waives any disagreement unless
articulated in writing prior to bidding, and a change is thereby made herein.
8.3
DELA YS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
8.3.1
DELETE 8.3.1 and substitute the following new Subparagraph:
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-16
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
8.3.1.2
8.3.1.3
8.3.1.3.1
8.3.1.3.2
8.3.1.3 .3
Except as specifically provided under Subparagraph 7.1.1 (Changes in the Work),
Contractor shall not be entitled to payment or compensation of any kind from the Owner
for direct, indirect, or impact damages including but not limited to costs of acceleration,
arising because of reasonable hindrance or delay from any cause whatsoever, whether
such hindrance of delay by foreseeable or unforeseeable or avoidable or unavoidable
provided, however, that the provision shall not preclude recovery by Contractor for
damages for unreasonable delays or hindrances caused by the acts or omissions of the
Owner. Except as provided in this subparagraph, the Contractor's sole remedy for delays
shall be an extension to time. The Contractor is excluded from the recovery of damages
for delay from the Owner where such delay has not actually been caused solely by the
Owner and/or where the Owner's action or inaction was not the actual substantial cause
of the delay. Actions of the Architect shall not be deemed actions of the Owner in this
regard. If the delay has been caused by anyone other than the Owner, the Contractor may
not seek damages from the Owner but rather may seek damages directly from the party
responsible for the delay. The Owner shall not be added as a party to any such
proceeding, whether in arbitration or litigation. The Contract creates a right for the
Contractor to proceed against, or to be proceeded against by, any other Contractor for the
purposes of resolving responsibility and damages for delay.
The Contract Time shall be adjusted only for Changes in the Work (pursuant to
Paragraph 7.1.1), and Excusable Delays (pursuant to Subparagraph 8.3.' .3). In the event
the Contractor requests an extension of the Contract Time, he shall furnish such
justification and supporting evidence as the Owner may deem necessary for
determination as to whether the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time under the
provisions of this Contract. The Owner, after receipt of such justification and supporting
evidence, shall make his findings of fact and decision thereon and shall advise the
Contractor in writing thereof. If the Owner finds that the Contractor is entitled to any
extension of the Contract Time, the Owner's determination as to the total number of days
extension shall be based upon the currently approved schedule and on all data relevant to
the extension. Such data will be included in the next monthly updating of the schedule.
The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that actual delays (due to said changes,
suspension of Work or excusable delays) in activities which, according to the schedule,
do not affect the Contract Time or Specific Dates, will not be the basis for an extension of
the Contract Time or Specific Dates.
Subject to other provisions of this Contract, Contractor may be entitled to an extension of
the Contract Time (but no increase in the Contract Sum) for delays arising from
unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the
Contractor of his Subcontractors as foHows:
Labor strikes (including strikes affecting transportation), that do, in fact, directly and
critically affect the progress of the Work; however, an extension of Contract Time on
account of an individual labor strike shall not exceed the number of calendar days of said
strike;
Acts of God, tornado, fire, hurricane, blizzard, earthquake, typhoon, or flood that damage
completed work or stored materials, provided that an act of neglect by the Contractor did
not contribute to such damage;
Abnormal inclement weather; however:
1. Contractor agrees that he shall not be entitled to a time extension for normal
inclement weather which can be expected at the Project locale due to
precipitation or temperature, based upon actual data from the U.W. Department
SUPPLEMENT AR Y CONDITIONS
00800-17
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
of Commerce, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) for
the locale of the Project.
2. Contractor agrees that the measure of abnormal inclement weather due to
precipitation or temperature during the period covered by this contract shall be
the number of days in excess of those shown in the NOAA weather data, in
which precipitation exceeded .10 inch (or in the case of snow or ice pellets, in
inch or more), or in which the highest temperature was 32 degrees F. or below.
3. No extension of time will be made for abnormal inclement weather after the
principal portions of the Work are enclosed except for site work which critically
affects the Contract Time or Specific Dates. For the purpose of this Paragraph,
the term "enclosed" is defined to mean when the Work is sufficiently closed in
(exterior walls up and roof in place) so as to permit any structure, or major
portion thereof which is part of the Work, to be adequately heated so as to allow
the various trades to perform their work. The Architect shall determine when
the structure is 'enclosed" and shall issue, upon the request of the Contractor, a
letter certifying the date the Work became enclosed for the purposes thereof.
4. If the total calendar days lot due to inclement weather, from the start of the
Work at the Project site by the Contractor until the principal portions of the
Work are enclosed, exceeds the total number of days to be expected for the same
period, a time extension, if granted, shall only be the number of calendar days
needed to equal the excess number of calendar days lost due to such abnormal
inclement weather.
8.3.4
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
The Contractor is excluded from the recovery of damages for delay from the Owner
where such delay has not actually been caused solely by the Owner. If the delay has been
caused by anyone other than the Owner, the Contractor may not seek damages from the
Owner but rather may seek damages directly from the party responsible for the delay.
The Owner shall not be added as a party to any such proceeding, whether in arbitration or
litigation. The Contract creates a right for the Contractor to proceed against or to be
proceeded against by any other Contractor for the purposes of resolving responsibility
and damages for delay.
8.3.5
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
In the event the Contractor is entitled to damages from the Owner for delay not involving
a Construction Change Directive, extra or additional costs pursuant to Subparagraph
7.3.6, it is agreed that the Contractor's damages for each day of delay shall in no event
exceed the highest daily liqUidated-da~ges rate applicable to the Owner
elsewhere in this Contract, ~agrap 8.2.4, including those additional chool da
damages listed therein r.e., $500.00 pe day). The Contractor shall in no be
entitled to damages for s of ef . ncy, home office overhead, expectant underrun,
trade stacking, extended overhead, profit upon damages for delay, impact damages, or
similar damages.
8.3.6
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
If no schedule or agreement is made stating the dates upon which action as set forth in
Subparagraph 4.4.1 shall be taken, then no claim for delay shall be allowed on account of
failure to take action until fifteen (15) days after demand is made for a response, and then
no unless such claim is reasonable.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-18
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
8.3.7
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
A copy of any claim for delay shall be delivered to the Owner, and the Contractor shall
immediately take all steps reasonably possible to lessen the adverse impact for such delay
on Owner.
ARTICLE 9. - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.1.2
ADD the following provision as new Subparagraph 9.1.2:
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Contract Documents, the
Owner may withhold any payment to the Contractor hereunder if and for so long as the
Contractor fails to perform any of its obligations hereunder or otherwise is in default
under any of the Contract Documents; provided, however, that nay such holdback shall
be limited to an amount sufficient in the reasonable opinion of the Owner to cure any
such default or failure of performance by the Contract.
9.3.1
DELETE "At least ten (10) days before the date established for each progress payment:
and substitute "Each month, in a timely fashion,".
9.3.4
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
At the time of submitting his monthly estimate, the Contractor shall submit a written
certification that he Work is on or behind schedule. If behind schedule, he shall state the
number of days, the cause of delay and what steps he proposes to take to get back on
schedule.
9.3.5
ADD the following new Subparagraphs:
Prevailing Wages: Before the first application for payment, Contractors and
Subcontractors shall file with the Owner and with Department of Labor and Industries a
Statement ofIntent to Pay Prevailing Wages (S.F. No. 9882) including fringe benefits; to
be followed at the conclusion of the Contract, before release of the retained percentage,
with the submission of an Affidavit of Wages paid (S.F. No. 9843) for certification by the
Director, Department of Labor and Industries, in accordance with RCW 39.12.040.
9.3.6
The Contractor shall confirm that two certified copies of wage rate approvals be sent to
the business office of the Owner at the address noted elsewhere in the Project manual.
Final payment cannot be released by the Owner until the Affidavit is received. Each
voucher claim submitted by the Contractor for payment shall state that prevailing wages
have been paid in accordance with pre-filed statement of intent with the Department of
Labor and Industries.
9.3.7
Specified retainage on the Contract will be withheld until receipt by the Owner or
certification by the Director that the prevailing wage requirements of the law have been
satisfied.
9.5
DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION:
9.5.1
ADD the following items to Subparagraph 9.5.1:
9.5.1.8
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
Failure to present affidavit pertaining to wages paid as required by the Contract
Documents.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-19
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
9.5.1.9
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
Delay by Contractor.
9.5.1.10
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
Liquidated damages.
9.5.1.11
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
Failure to submit updated schedule with payment request as required by the Contract
Documents.
9.5.1.12
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
Liens filed, or reason to believe it is probable a lien will be filed for any portion of the
Work.
9.5.1.13
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
Civil penalties for non-resident employees under RCW 39.16.030.
9.5.1.14
ADD the following new Subparagraph: Failure of the Contractor to comply with the
scheduling provision of Section 3.10 and with Division I.
9.6.1.
DELETE Subparagraph 9.6.1 and substitute the following:
The Architect's Certificate of Payment shall be processed and forwarded to the Owner
within ten (10) days after the Architect's receipt of the Contractor's Application for
Payment. After receipt of the Architect's Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make
payment to the Contractor of the amount specified in the Certificate for Payment (which
shall provide for all applicable retentions) pursuant to Owner's normal process for
payments. Such payment by the Owner shall not constitute approval or acceptance of
any items of cost in the Application for Payment. No partial payment made hereunder
shall be or be construed to be final acceptance or approval of that portion of the Work to
which such partial payment relates or relieve the Contractor of any of its obligations
hereunder with respect thereto.
The Owner shall be entitled to withhold payment according to Subparagraphs 9.1.2 and
9.6.1.1 through .14 even though the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment.
9.6.1.1
ADD the following new Subparagraph:
In accordance with RCW 60.28.0 I 0 as amended, a sum equal to five percent (5%) of all
amounts, of each contractor payment shall be retained.
After award of a contract for public improvements, or work for which retained
percentages are required to be reserved under the provisions of RCW 60.28.010,
Contractor shall exercise in writing one of the options listed below:
a. Retained percentage will be retained in a fund by the public body until
forty five (45) days per RCW 60.28.010 following final acceptance of
said improvement of work as completed; or
b. Placed in escrow with a bank or trust company until forty-five (45)
days per RCW 60.28.010 following final acceptance of said
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-20
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
improvement or work as completed. Escrow Agent will not make any
payment from a retained percentage fund or release any retained
percentage escrow account to any person, until instructions to do so
have been received from the Owner.
9.6.2
ADD the following sentence to the end of Subparagraph 9.6.2:
If the Contractor does not received payment for any cause which is its fault and not the
fault of a particular Subcontractor, the Contractor shall pay that Subcontractor on
demand, made at any time after which such payment to the Contractor would have been
made, for its work to the extent completed, less the retained percentage.
9.6.6
STRIKE "not in accordance with the Contract Documents"
9.10
FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
9.1 0.2
DELETE and replace with the following:
Neither final payment nor the remaining retained percentage shall be come due until the
Work is free and clear of any and all liens as required by Subparagraph 9.5.6 and the
Contractor submits to the Owner (I) an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and
equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or his
property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2)
consent of surety, if any, to final payment, and (3) if required by the Architect, other data
establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such aas receipts, releases
and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such forma s may be
designated by the Architect. If any Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver
required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to
indemnify the Owner against any loss. If any such lien or claim remains unsatisfied after
all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all moneys that the
Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien or claim, including all costs and
attorney's fees. The Owner may withhold from final payment any sum that the Owner
has reason to believe may be needed to satisfy any lien, claim or threat of lien arising out
of the Work. Payment of the retained percentage shall be in accordance with and subject
to the conditions as set forth in RCW CH.60.28. Owner must have in hand prior to
payment of certificate regarding taxes paid from the Washington State Department of
Revenue. Retainage may not be released until Contractor has obtained from the
Department of Labor and Industries an approved "Affidavit of Wages Paid" (RCW
39.12.040).
9.10.3
DELETE and replace with the following:
If Owner, after a substantial portion of the Work has been completed, finds that an
unreasonable delay will occur in the completion of the remaining portion of the contract
for any reason not the result of a breach thereof, it may, if the Contractor agrees, delete
from the Contract the remaining work and accept as final the improvement at the state of
completion then attained and may make payment tin proportion to the amount of work
accomplished. The rights of the parties and the conditions under which such action is
taken shall be governed by the provisions of RCW 60.28.010(5) as the same now exists
or is hereafter amended.
ARTICLE 10. - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.2.1.4
ADD the following:
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-21
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
At all times until Final Acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall protect from
damage, deterioration, theft, vandalism, and malicious mischief all materials, equipment,
and other items incorporated or to be incorporated or consumed in the performance of the
Work and all work in process and completed Work.
The Contractor shall bear the risk of any loss or destruction of or injury or damage to any
materials, equipment or other items incorporated or to be incorporated or consumed or
used in the Work or the performance of the Contract until final payment under the
Contract.
ARTICLE 11. - INSURANCE
Paragraphs 11.1 through 11.3 .11 are D ELECTED and substituted therefore is the
following:
11.1
CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
11. 1.1
The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect the Contractor,
the Owner and their agents, representatives and employees from claims set forth below
which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the contract,
whether such operations be by the Contractor, or by any subcontractor or by anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of the, or by anyone for whose acts any of them
may be liable:
1. Claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability benefit, and
similar employee benefit acts with workmen's compensation and employer's
liability insurance in an amount not less than those necessary to meet the
statutory requirements of the State of Washington.
2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of
any person other than the Contractor's employees.
3. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of
any person other than the Contractor's employees.
4. Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which
are sustained (1) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly
related 0 the employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by any oterh
person.
5. Claims for damages, other than to the work itself, because of injury to or
destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and
6. Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's
obligations under this contract.
7. Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's
obligations under this contract.
Limits of liability for Commercial General Liability and automobile Liability shall be not
less than $1 million combined single limits per occurrence, $2 million annual aggregate.
Coverages shall include, but not be limited to: Blanket Contractual Liability, Products,
Completed Operations, Broad Form Property Damage, Explosion, Collapse and
Underground (XCU) if applicable, and Employer's Liability. Except for worker's
compensation insurance, the Contractor shall provide an endorsement to the Owner
listing the Owner as an additional insured in the above listed policies of insurance.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-22
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
I 1. 1.2
I 1. 1.3
I 1. 1.4
11.2
11.2.1
1 1. 1.2
11.2.3
11.2.4
The insurance required by subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be primary and noncontributing to
any insurance possessed or procured by the Owner, and limits of liability shall not be less
than those set forth herein.
The insurance required by subparagraph 11.1.1 shall contain a clause stating that
coverage shall apply separately to each insured against whom claims are made or suit is
brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer's liability.
Certified copies of insurance policies and endorsements acceptable to the Owner shall be
filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the work. These policies shall contain a
provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or materially
changed until at least thirty (30) days prior written notice has been given to the Owner.
PROPERTY INSURANCE
The Contractor shall purchase and at all times maintain such insurance as will protect the
Contractor, subcontractors, Owner and the Owner's employees and agents from loss or
damage to work or property in course of construction, including all machinery, materials
and supplies on the premises or in transit thereto and intended to become a part of the
finished work, including materials stored off-site, until acceptance by the Owner. This
insurance shall be in the form of a Builder's Risk all risk property insurance policy or
equivalent and shall provide coverage for full replacement cost. Contractor shall cause
such policy or policies of insurance required under this subparagraph to be endorsed so as
to provide that the insurer or insurers waive any right of subrogation against the Owner.
Any deducible provisions in such insurance shall not exceed $10,000.00 and shall be the
sole responsibility of the Contractor.
Any loss insured under subparagraph 11.2.1 is to be adjusted with the Owner and made
payable to the Owner as trustee for the insured, as their interest may appear, subject to the
requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. The contractor shall pay each
subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by the Contractor, and by
appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, shall require each
subcontractor to make payments to his sub-subcontractors in similar manner.
The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other for damages caused by fire
or other perils to the extent covered by insurance obtained pursuant to this paragraph 11.2
or any other property insurance applicable to the work, except such rights as they may
have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as trustee. The Contractor
shall require, by appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity,
similar waiver in favor of the Owner and the Contractor by subcontractors and sub-
subcontractors. With respect to the waiver rights or recover, the term Owner shall be
deemed to include, to the extent covered by property insurance applicable thereto, his
consultants, employees and agents, and representative including the Architect and his
consultants and employees and agents. The Contractor waives as against any separate
Contractor described in Article 6 all rights for damages caused by fire or other perils in
the same manner as is provided above as against the Owner. The Owner shall require, by
appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, similar waiver in favor
of the Contractor and his subcontractors and sub-subcontractors.
The Owner as trustee shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers
unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five (5) days after
occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power, and if such objection is make,
the matter shall be decided by a court of competent jurisdiction or as the parties in
interest otherwise agree. The Owner as trustee shall, in that case, make settlement with
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-23
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
11.2.5
11.2.6
11.4
11.4.1
11.4.1.1
the insurers in accordance with the directions of such court or arbitrators. If distribution
is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution.
If the Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the work prior to
substantial completion thereof, such occupancy shall not commence prior to a time
mutually agreed to by the Owner and Contractor and to which the insurance company or
companies providing the property insurance have consented by endorsement to the policy
or policies. This insurance shall not be canceled or lapsed on account of such partial
occupancy. Consent of the Contractor and to the insurance company or companies is
such occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.
In the event Contractor neglects, refuses, or fails to provide the insurance required under
the contract documents, or if such insurance is canceled for any reason, the Owner shall
have the right but not he duty to procure the same, and the cost thereof shall be deducted
from monies then due or thereafter to be come due to the Contractor.
PROPERTVINSURANCE
Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or
companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is
located, property insurance written on a builder's rish "all-risk" or equivalent policy form
in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract
modifications comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement
cost basis. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are
beneficiaries of such instance, until final payment as been made as provided in Paragraph
9. 10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has a insurable interest in the
property requried by this Paragraph 11.4 to be covered, which is later. This insurance
shall include interest of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-
subcontractors in the Project. Each loss may be subject to a deductible of $10,000.
Losses up to the deductible amount shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
There may be some differences between this property overage and the builder's risk
insurance availabe in the insurance market; therefore, the Contractor shall provide an
"installation floater" or similar property coverage for materials not yet installed, whether
stored on-site or off-site or in transit, and the Contractor shall obtain property coverage
for contractor owned equipment and tools.
Property instance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include,
without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage)and
physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism ,
malicious mischief, collapse, windstorm, earthquake, flood, and debris removal including
demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall
cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses
required as a result of such insured loss.
12.2.2
ARTICLE 12. - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
DELETE and substitute the following:
If, within one year after the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or within such
longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable
special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be
defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct
it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to do so. This obligation
SUPPLEMENT AR V CONDITIONS
00800-24
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
shall survive Termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly
after discovery of the condition.
Cracks or imperfections that may occur, for any reason within a one-year guarantee
period, in plastered or gypsum waIlboard surfaces, whether painted or not shall be
repaired and the surfaces repainted at no cost to the Owner and within the terms of the
General Contract.
AIl corrective work performed by the Contractor in remedying defective work shall be
subject to the same guarantee requirements of the original Work for a period of no less
than one year from the date of completion of the corrective work, irrespective of any
Statute of Limitations.
As directed by Architect, replace entirely, at no additional cost to the Owner, any work
requiring repeated service during correction period.
12.2.6
ADD the foIlowing new Subparagraph:
Contractor and his Roofing and Exterior Sheet Metal Subcontractors, jointly and
severaIly, shall warrant roofing of all types instaIled, built-up base flashing, exterior sheet
metal work, preformed metal roofing, plus all other work which is a component part of or
penetrating or projecting through the roofing to be watertight and weather tight against
ordinary wear and usage for period of (2) years from and after the date of Final
Completion. This warranty shaIl be in addition to any other Manufacturer and/or
instaIlation warranty available to the Owner and shaIl be in addition to the duty otherwise
required for correcting defective work.
ARTICLE 13. - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.3.1
ADD the foIlowing sentence:
The date of written notice shaIl be the earlier of the date of personal delivery or the date
of postmark. Notice may also be made by facsimile transmission. In such case, notice
will be deemed received when the transmission is made. The party making such
facsimile transmission shaIl also forward a copy of such notice by regular mail.
13.6.1
DELETE Subparagraph 13.6.1 and substitute in lieu thereof the foIlowing:
Interest on payments dues and unpaid under the Contact Documents shaIl bear interest as
specified by RCW 39.76.
ARTICLE 14. - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
14.1.1.
CHANGE "30 days" to "90 days" in the first line.
14.2.1.1
STRIKE "persistently or repeatedly".
14.2.2
STRIKE "upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such
action".
14.4.1
ADD the following:
The Owner may, at its option, terminate the Contract as to all, or from time to time as to
any portion, of the Work not then performed at any time by written notice thereof
(sometimes referred to below as "Notice of Termination") to the Contractor, whether or
SUPPLEMENT AR Y CONDITIONS
00800-25
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
not the Contractor is in breach or default. Upon receipt of any Notice of Termination, the
Contractor shall, unless otherwise directly by the Owner:
a. discontinue performance of the Work on the date and to the extent
specified in the Notice of Termination;
b. place or enter into no further agreements with any Subcontractor for
material, equipment, services or facilities, except as may be necessary
for completion of such portion of the Work as in not terminated;
c. in the manner and at the times and to the extent directed by the Owner,
either terminate or assign to the Owner the Contractor's right, title, and
interest under the agreements with any Subcontractors to the extent
relating to Work terminated by the Notice of Termination.
d. transfer title and deliver to the Owner in the manner, at the times and to
the extent, if any, directed by the Owner, (1) the materials, equipment,
Work in process and completed Work and other items produced as a
part of, or acquired in connection with, the performance of the Work
terminated by the Notice of Termination, and (2) the completed or
partially complete plans, drawings, information and other property
which, if the Contract had been completed, would have been required
to be furnished to the Owner;
e. settle, subject to the prior written approval of Owner, all outstanding
liabilities and all claims arising out of any termination directed by the
Owner of agreements with Subcontractors.
f. use its best efforts to minimize its cost and expenses due to such
termination.
g. use its best efforts to sell, to the extent and at the prices subject to the
prior written approval of the Owner, any materials, equipment, Work in
process, completed Work, and other items produced as a part of, or
acquired in connection with, the performance of the Work terminated
by the Notice of Termination, to the extent not delivered to the Owner
pursuant to item (d) above, provided, that the Contractor may acquire
such materials, Work in process, completed Work, and other items to
the extent and at such prices subject to the prior written approval of the
Owner, and provided further that the proceeds of any such sale or
payment to be made by the Contractor to the Owner or paid by the
Contractor to the Owner is such manner as the Owner may direct;
h. complete timely performance of such part of the Work as has not been
terminate by the Notice of Termination; and
1. take such action as may be necessary, or as the Owner may direct, for
the protection and preservation of the property related to the Contract
which is in the possession of the Contractor (whether or not at the
Project site) and in which the Owner has or may acquire an interest.
14.4.2 REPLACE with the following:
After the receipt of Notice of Termination, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the
Contractor's termination claim for amount claimed pursuant to Paragraph 14.4.3, below in the
form and with the certification prescribed by the Owner. Such claim shall be submitted promptly
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-26
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
but in no event later than six (6) months after the effective date of the Termination. If the
Contractor fails to submit its termination claim within such six (6) month period, the Owner may
determine on the basis of information available to it the amount, if any, due the Contractor by
reason of the Termination, and such determination shall be final. After the Owner has made a
determination under the Paragraph 14.4.2, the Owner shall payor credit to the Contractor the
amount so determined, which payment or credit shall be deemed to satisfy all claims of the
Contractor against the Owner by reason of such termination.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-27
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Project consists of construction of a two-story addition at the southeast comer of
the existing two-story Senior Services Community Center building. Minor interior remodeling will occur
at upper level toilet rooms. All construction and finishes to match existing
1. Project Location: 328 East 7th Street, Port Angeles, Washington.
1.3 CONTRACT
A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.
1.4 TIME OF COMPLETION & LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
A.
B. For each calendar day after the date fixed for completion that the work remains uncompleted, the
Contractor shall pay the Owner the sum of Five Hundred dollars ($500.00) as fixed, agreed, liquidated
damages, but not as a penalty.
C. The Contractor does hereby authorize the Owner to deduct such liquidated damages from amount due, or
to become due, the Contractor. The Contractor further agrees that any such deduction shall not in any
degree release him from further obligation and liabilities in regard to the fulfillment of the entire contract.
D. It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this contract and of the
specifications wherein a definite and certain length of time is fixed for the performance of any act
whatsoever; and where under the contract an additional time is allowed for the completion of any work, the
new time limit fixed by such extension shall be of the essence of this contract. Provided, that the contractor
shall not be charged with liquidated damage or any excess cost when the delay in completion of the work is
due:
1. To any preference, priority of allocation order duly issued by the government.
2. To unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor,
including but not restricted to acts of God, or of the public enemy, acts of the Owner, acts of
SUMMARY
01100 - 1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
another Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Owner, fires, floods, epidemics,
quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually sever weather; and
3. To any delays of Subcontractor shall, within seven (7) days from the beginning of such delay,
notify the Owner per the General Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
SUMMARY
o 11 00 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Service & Community Center Addition
SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract
modifications.
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
A.
Request for Information (RFI) forms may be issued by the Contractor or the Architect. The Contractor
shall be responsible for maintaining a sequential numbering record of all RFI's.
B.
Contractor Initiated Request for Information: The Contractor will issue a detailed description of
information requested. If necessary, the description will include sketches, dimensions, photographs, or
other materials to help clarify the request being made.
I. Request for information form (copy enclosed) is prepared by the Contractor, and transmitted to the
Architect. The Architect will provide response, and Owner will accept or reject. The Architect
will transmit RFI to Contractor. The Contractor must either proceed upon receipt of response ifno
cost impact, or submit a statement of cost and schedule impact within five (5) days of response
date.
2. RFIs and responses shall be numbered consecutively and sent to appropriate parties.
3. Responses shall be marked on record drawings and specifications.
C.
Architect Initiated Request for Information: The Architect will issue a detailed description of
information requested. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised drawings and
specifications.
1. Request for Information form is prepared by Architect and transmitted to the Contractor. The
Contractor will provide response and Owner will accept or reject.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving
adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AlA Document G71O, "Architect's
Supplemental Instructions", or other form approved by Architect/Owner.
PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Owner will provide a written request and the Architect will
issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract
Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings
and Specifications.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01250-1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Service & Community Center Addition
I. Proposal Requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation
estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the
change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
d. On Owner's approval of proposal request work may proceed prior to issuance of change
order.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract,
Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect.
I. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work.
Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change
on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of
purchases and credits to be made. Ifrequested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change,
including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity
relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
5. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change
requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
C.
Proposal Request Form: Use format at end of this section.
1.6
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A.
Change Orders serve to formalize proposal request for invoicing. Several proposal requests may be
combined for one Change Order. The Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and
Contractor on AlA Document G701, or other form approved by Architect/Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
Note: Copies of Request for Information form, and Proposal Request Form, and AlA G701, are enclosed for the
Contractors' reference.
END OF SECTION 01250
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01250-2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
REQUEST FOR INFORMA TION FORM
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
Contractor:
RFI No.:
Address:
Date:
ITEM:
Reference Drawing or Specification:
Description of request:
Prepared By:
Date:
Suggested Resolution:
IMPACT ON:
Contract Sum (fiN):
Contract Time (fIN): _
Response:
Prepared By:
Date:
Owners Response:
Rejected: [] Accepted: [ ] Other: [ ]
This response in not an authorization to proceed with work involving additional costs and/or time.
Notification must be given in accordance with the contract documents if any response results in a change to
the contract sum or time.
Copies to:
Attachments:
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION FORM
RFI-I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
WORK CHANGES PROPOSAL REQUEST
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
Contractor:
COP No.:
Address:
Date:
Reference Drawing or Specification:
Please furnish your proposal (on provided "A" & "B") and include a cost breakdown for performing the
change or changes to the contract outlined below and/or detailed on the attachments referred to:
Description of change:
Reason for Change:
Prepared By:
Date:
We propose to perform all changes in the above description for a total (check one).
Addition: [] Deduction: [ ]
No Change: [ ]
Dollars: ($
)
To the contract sum of:
And a change of contract time by
days.
Washington State sales tax not included) In accordance to Article 7 of the general condition of the contract.
The foregoing amount covers all direct and indirect costs related to this change and to the effect of this
change on the remainder of the project. All other provisions of the contract remain in full force and effect.
The contractor agrees to be bound to this quotation for 60 days after this date.
Contractor:
Date:
We have carefully examined the foregoing proposal, negotiated with the contractor where necessary and
find it to be reasonable.
Architect:
Date:
The Owner responds to the foregoing proposal below. If the proposal is accepted below, this instrument
when fully signed constitutes the conditions upon which a change order will be issued.
Owners Response: Rejected: [] Accepted: [ ] Other: [ ]
City of Port Angeles Representative:
Date:
Copies to:
Attachments:
WORK CHANGE PROPOSAL REQUEST
-1
11
l
i
.~~
.11
. ".i
'~
..l
~l
]
]
2000 Edition - Electronic Format
AlA Document G701- 2000
Change Order
PROJECT:
(Name and address)
. CHANGE ORDER NUMBER:
DATE:
ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER:
CONTRACT DATE:
CONTRACT FOR:
TO CONTRACTOR:
(Name and address)
THE CONTRACT IS CHANGED AS FOLLOWS:
(lndude, where appHcable, any undisputed amount attJibutable to previously executed Construction Change Directives.)
The ongmal (Cohtract Sum) (Guaranteed Maxunum Pnce) was $
The net change by previously authorized Change Orders $
The (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Price) prior to this Change Order was $
The (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Price) will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by.
this Change Order in the amount of $
The new (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Price) including this Change Order will be $
The Contract Time will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by ( ) days.
The date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is
NOTE.: This Change Order does not include changes in the Contract Sum, Contract Time 'or
Guaranteed Maximum Price which have been authorized by Construction Change Directive for
which the cost or time are in dispute as described in Subparagraph 7.3.8 of AIA bocument A201.
Not valid until siRned bv the Architect, Contractor and Owner.
']
1
AR CH ITE CT (Typed Jlame)
CONTRACTOR(Typedname)
OWNER(Typedname)
(SigJlature)
(Signature)
(SigJlature)
-I.
BY
BY
BY
1
DATE
. DATE
DATE
j
@ 2000 The Amencan Institute ot Architects. Reproduction ot the material herem or substantial quotation
of its provisions without written permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United States and
will subject the violator to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates u.s. copyright
laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with
permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the
date of expiration as noted below. User Document: g70lmast.aia - 10/28/2003. AlA License Number
1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
I
. OWNER D
ARCHITECT D
CONTRACTOR 0
FIE~D D
OTHER 0
AUTHENTICATION OF THIS
ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AlA
DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING
.AlA DOCUMENT 0401.
......~..
.....1 .....
....... - ..~
.".....
-
@ 2000 AIA@
AlA DOCUMENT (;701-2000
CHANGE ORDER
The American Institute of
Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1
RELA TED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
I. Division I Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling
changes to the Contract.
2. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements
governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals
Schedule.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to
various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.
1.4
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and
schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
b. Submittals Schedule.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days
before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the
Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location. Addition to Senior Services & Community Center for City of
Port Angeles.
b. Name of Architect.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290-1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
c. Contractor's name and address.
d. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following
for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Name of subcontractor.
c. Name of supplier.
d. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
e. Dollar value.
I) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total
I 00 percent.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of
Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of
contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored,
but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of
insurance or bonded warehousing if required.
6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include
total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-
place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as
general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for
Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the
Contract Sum.
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by
Architect and paid for by Owner.
I. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and
final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between
Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the
period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Forms: Use Washington State Office of Public Instruction Invoice Voucher
(Contractor) Application for Payment on Contract (sample enclosed) as form for Applications for
Payment.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290-2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to
sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without
action.
I. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use
updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of
construction period covered by application.
E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect
by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar
attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens
from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous
application.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage, on each
item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.
4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of mechanic's lien
for construction period covered by the application.
a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity
involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled
to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers oflien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide
with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary ifnot final).
4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
5. Copies of building permits.
6. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the
Work.
7. Report of preconstruction conference.
8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
9. Performance and payment bonds.
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work
claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement
showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for
Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290-3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,
fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AlA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." (copy enclosed)
5. AlA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." (copy enclosed)
6. AlA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." (copy enclosed)
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
PART 4 - RETAINAGE OPTION
4.1 RCW 60.28 as amended by chapter 223, Laws of 1992 session allows each prime contractor on a public
works contract the following options concerning the amount reserved as retainage from the moneys
earned by the Contractor. Coordinate with Supplementary Conditions 9.6.1.
4.2 The City of Port Angeles shall require each prime Contractor to complete the Retainage Percentage form
(copy enclosed) for this public works project. Please indicate which option you whish and return this
form to the Architect and City of Port Angeles.
END OF SECTION 01290
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290-4
I II
III
4
..L ~;~
w t).t)
CJ f:S: ~
J lJ ~t~
1 j ITIrn
o .,
;
J
]
~
_I
C,)
C)
~
~
.J
g
z
o
......
E-<
~
>-1
A..
A..
-.:r::
1
>-
.1
o
J
i=
1
11.
J
]
z
1
-" ~
2 ~
1 0
..- 0
~ ~
b
~
~
A..
o
E-<
Q
o
.;!
~
p..
~
t)
~
!iJ
t)
~
<
<
>
P::
o
~
t)
~
~
z
o
t)
~
o
~
P-.
en
o
Z
~
t)
e:!
o
~
p..
w
~
o
E-<
t)
~
~.
o
t)
;>.,
.D
~ .;
'" "Cl ~
.rc~a"O
bOCOco"Cl~
13~~gr::
~ ~ ~ ~.~
o..c: '" '-.E
..2 d..c:: e.~
'" co!l co co
-... E 3 ~..c:
.B~o'E:~
~A..ijeo
E.8:=~iJ
8c'::A..i::
. 0 (lj ...1-0 4)
lll+:lo5<EE
05 8 ft '" ;>.,
..... .- !l v oj
O"ar::1OA
'tn. Pc 11) ~ t=
~~ES~
III .!!! g li ~
o5058u~
ci >..... tI'l t':S
.....D<>~o5
OJ "0 !l .~ "0
05 ~ c .i;a
~~8l5..
~ 8 ..c: t>
.- '" <> ~
t::~o5:.a~
8oo5:;to
... E:::.!> ... III
~1ll;.><Eo5
foS8~E
i::1>aoo
o::::"EE:::<I:l
u ~ 0'" 13
~ -0 g tS .~
Soa~B8
.~ a~ g e
G.) .~ v ..l::I 21
~~]g5
~ t: P.u E
co <E E co ;>.,
i5 .S 8 05 it
P::
o
P-.
~
t)
~
~
Z
o
t)
t-
Z(j
W!l
:2:15
>-u
<(,5
a..o5
a::: .~
c
O.~
u..-g
Z~
O~-ci
._ v
t- ,.--5
<( ;.> '"
~~
o .o.!!!
-~.
-l08
a.. .c c-
a.. '" 0
<( ~ ~
cfa
en v ~
_ E g
a::: ~ 0
o p.~
L-.8~
'-0.
o-gtl
<(EJl
",en
0:: .- c
t- g.3
Z OJ ~
o c
o :g,'g
o~8
~
'"
o
....
.0
.0.....
r:: 0
~;>.,
o oj
U"O
'"
:s
o
E
o
...
<E
'"
.0
S
Pl
o
~
o
u
u;
~
E 's,
o ><
:;t co
'" s::
"0..0
a ~ 'gj
"Cl .0 .-
co ~ E
....,eA..E
o ..... ~ 0
co ii: au
1ti..o-+..&~
ViJ5Z::E
>..
~
~&'!l(,<)(,<)
~ ""
c:4
-tlo
......f-< ...
s 0...... ~ ~
cl ~ 12 0 ,~ ~
~~~f30 E:::;;:;-!l oj
lZl co f-< lZl s:: "Cl 0 '" V"l
f-<"E<dCjo Bt--~ ~
uoo 0 ~t1"O;;:;-c
5~f3ffi~ ~g~G8
t=: a::E~::l UwCl) ~
500>-18 '8+'Og~
r, ;>., en E':l '-' ~ ~ 0 ~ P-. 'a
"',Df-<4 00 EjO Ejtl
~ ~~8w~ I~ I~~
~.ct=:~f-<~ U Uo
o 0 Z f-< ~ f-< '-' ,-,(-<
P:ltlooO~.; ..ci
OZUf-< p:;
""";M,-<)-.i v)
...
o
oj -0
1d Q) ... m
;;o513~
o5'O~8
-i::::l....:.alU
a 11 .S 05
(I),. tI)""d
r:: v '" a
.S1 05 "0
~.9~:f
~ .... ~ c
co oj lib III
}lo5oE
o t a 5
B ~ "'~:
-- ~ co Jo--C
~ o.t:: t)
s:: ... ~ oj
o ~ ... .l:l
c.o5 gr::.
00;;>00
'3-:;:ou~
'" 0 co
'''t;:;o505
.0 .- 1> f-<
.t::,-oSP::
!l v a:; .~ W
s::o.o::>,u
fl) rJ "tj l1>
e Ill. C .0 f-<
g ;<;::. <d. a Z
0-5 r::"O~
o -<.g :5 0
-0 . III ~. g ::E
!lo5t:<d~
c .<E.E co
or::..., ",05
U.~."'.- .....
o<<itfi:O
...s::;: <> bO 0 ....
""::::-o:::,.r::
o5P.lll;;> co
.~g,~",~
::>'4>oo5td
8.05 J2 '8 6-
. a gf~ .0;
:E Ofii ~:.::: ~
8 .c.t:: ~.-:=
u ~~ 0'" 'E
"'. S .., co co
.$ 8 ~ oS .!!!
00
00
00
O~O
II~
f~~~~
""~
~""
.",
~
.g
~
~2 ~
w 08
o P-.t;:; t1
~ ~~ ~
;;:;-~""<~ ...)
O..-UOfil"
G ~ ~ g; 'R B 25
..... en !-< f-< s-
OenV"lP::of-<::CG'
>-<Wt>~<l::ZCl)
~~~~~~~~
-0 ~ ~ ~ .8 >: 0 '"
coO....J~ '"
U ....J;>'-"I'1<f-<~
.S "" !I-"I f-<z (-< W C"l
'@WOp:; ZUIll
~~~~~~j~
o ~<!3~
~ ....JA..UQ:l
-0
r-.:
000\
""
.!:l~
'S~
<: -
<:> ~
., u
'" -
... <:
<-~ g
:::"1::
:::: \J
\J '"
-.0::
.!:l-
.~.~
..... ;l:
~ E:
=:: ~
~'?
\J <:>
... u
s:: <:>
;:t ...
.<:> 'l:l
E: ~
\J s::
'" \J
~~
~ ~
. <l:; ~
s.~
!€l.-;
'l:l '"
1lr;j
~a
...-
'" ...
u \J
.. ;:t
<: .5
;:t ..
<:> <:
~(l
~J!
s:: ..
<:> s::
'- <:>
~'l:l
s:: s:: ..
\J \J f-<
.....s::U
~ ,g. eJ
.o::g!E
g::::U
:::: 2:~
;::s.~<
o
~
fi:
f2
~
U
~
o
~
<
~
~
...
co
. ~
~'dO
~Ill;>"
~.o
a.s
g,g
~ S
bll",
.fa ~
..a .~
<> >
- '"
'" ...
(5 p..
f-< .S
.5::;
Sa
.Q';!:
l::v
~la
:g-a ~
~e .1j.
~~E
'~..e o.
oou.
~ 8."".
~ a:S ..
~.i5, ~
~8 5:
~.i i
~i:: ~
=<88
o~J-t
..<::p.0
E-c~~
. 8 ~
:Eao
.~ ~.Q,)
o~ oS
~!:i"-<
S::'- 0
'O~~
r::.c -So
.~~ .C
o~>-
OJ a !a
~I':o
.-eB ~
og:a
",.l:l 0
~ :E g .:!
~ f-<U Po
V
1d
o
o
o
o
(,<)
o
o 0
o 0
o ~
....
.g
o
~
'"
:s
"Cl
'"
>
o
...
P. lZl
g- .....:l
'@ E:S
'0 0
f-< E-<
~
"Cl
...
o
v
be
a
..c:
U
>-
.0
tI.l
~
~
U
~
N
'"
N
'"
J.
0'._
~ ~
u .0
o .C
g"~
~.:i
:5 .Q)
~ii.
:::.,E
i;e
z"-
ul~
:;(u
:al~
'" C
~~
~~
;;<
~ ~tn
~~
~ E
is .~
'" :.0
~p
10 ~
.0
;
is ~
5S
2~
~~
< I
~~
~
o
-
C
Q)
.E
.:1
u
o
..0
..<
<<
."0
.Gl
.-
.. .Q)
~-c.
:!l E
19 0
u
~ :as
, tn
z C
E1;;
fd.~
N co
~ e.
;>..
5;.c
w_
~C
~Q)
'" .E
o :I
... U
Z 0
0"0
go!!!
tL;;
~-
w.o
U C
~ 0
<;
Z III
0"0
~~
~>
~ C
<ftj
.....
N.c
B 0
~ ~
~ E
a en
g :;
~:3
o
o
o
o
o
:tliloS 1.JUGUMlilVl JiA.) JMPUlUAJVl LUiAL GUNS.tXjW:;N(;E); GUNSLlL1AnUN Wl1li AN,Al1uJdvJ;Y loS WCUURAUl;1) Wl:tfi. RESLJJ;U 1V ns
COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF TEiIS ELEC1RONICALLY DRAFTED AlA DOcUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AM
DOCUMENT D40/,
11
I '-1
J
41
J
'1
,J
'J
J
J
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF
PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS
AlA .pOCUMENT G706 - ELECTRONICFORMAT
TO OWNER:
(Name and address)
PROJECT:
(Name and address)
OWNER
ARCHITECT
CONTRACTOR
SURETY
OTHER
ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO.:
CONTRACT FOR:
CONTRACT DATED:
STAT.E Of:
COUNTY OF:
The undersigned hereby certifies that, except as listed below, payment has been made in full and all obligations have otherwise been
satisfied for all materials and equipment furnished, for all work, labor, and services performed, and for all known indebtedness and
claims' against the Contractor for damages arising hi any manner in connection with the performance of the Contract referenced above
for whi~ the'Owner ot Owner's property might in any way be held responsible or encumbered.'
EXCEPTIONS:
@ 1994 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. AlA DOCUMENT G706 -
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS - 1994 EDITION - AIA@ - WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.
copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and can be
reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: g706mast.aia -
10/2212003. AlA License Number 1001907, which expires on 2/29/2004.
:,J
.J
..J
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ATIACHED HERETO:
.1. . Consent of Surety to Final Payment. Whenever Surety is
.involved, Consent of Surety is required. AlA Document
G707,. c~nsent of Surety, ma.rEr used for th~rpose.
Indicate attachment: U yes U no
The foUowing supporting documents should be attached
hereto ifrequired by the Owner:
1. Contractor's Release or Waiver of Liens, conditional
upon receipt of final payment.
, I
,.I
.J'
2. Separate Releases or Waivers of Liens from
, Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers, to
the extent required by the Owner, accompanied by a list
there9f. '
I
,~J
3. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens (AlA
Document G706A).
l
J
J
J
J
CONTRACTOR:
(Name and address)
BY:
(Signature of authorized represe/llative)
(Printed name and title)
Subscribed and sworn to before me on this date:
Notary Public:
My Commission Expires:
Electronic format G706-1994
1
JJ
-]
-~
]
CONTRACTOR1S AFFIDAVIT OF
RELEASE OF LIENS
A1ADOCUMENT G706A -ELECTRONIC FORMAT
OWNER
ARCHITECT
CONTRACTOR
SURElY
OTHER
o
o
o
o
D
'JHIS JJUCUMENl HAS IMPUKIANI LEliAL CUNSE<.)UENC~; CUN::iW.'lA'llUN WllH AN AIIU.KNE'1 IS .ENCULlliAliEJJ WUH KESPECl 10 ITS
COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICAllY DRAFTED AlA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AlA
DOCUMENT D4ol.
to OWNER:
(Name and address)
ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO.:
.~~
PROJECT:
(Name and address)
CONTRACT FOR:
CONTRACT DATED:
._~
J1
STATE OF:
COUNTY OF:
The undersigned hereby certifies that to the best of the undersigned's knowledge, information and belief, except as listed below, the
Releases or Waivers of Lien attached hereto include the Contractor, all Subcontractors, all suppliers of materials and equipment, and all
performers of Work, labor or services who have or may have liens or encumbrances or the right to assert liens or encumbrances against
any property of the Owner arising in any manner out of the performance of the Contract referenced above.
EXCEPTIONS:
.J1
J
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ATTACHED HERETO:
CONTRACTOR:
(Name and address)
1 1. Contractor's Release or Waiver of Liens, conditional
. J upon receipt of [mal payment.
BY:
{Signature of authorized representative}
J
2. Separate Releases or Waivers of Liens from
Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers, to
the extent required by the Owner, accompanied by a list
thereof.
.1
{Pnnted name and title}
J
Subscribed and sworn to before me on this date:
.1
J
Notary Public:
My Commission Expires:
J
J
(Q 1994 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 10006-5292. AlA DOCUMENT G706A -
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS - 1994 EDITION - AIA@ - WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and
will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in
accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: g706amst.aia - 10/21/2003. AlA License
Number 1001907, which expires on 2/29/1004.
Electronic Format G706A, 1994
1
I
..1
.I
11
--n
CONSENT OF SURETY
TO FINAL PAYMENT
AlA DOCUMENT G707 - ELECTRONIC FORMAT
OWNER
ARCIDTECT
CONlRACTOR
SURE1Y
OTHER
o
o
o
o
o
II
i '--n
-11
1HJ.!> J.)UGUM.JiN.1 .tiA.!> lMPUR1AN1 LJ;(1AL GUNS1::JjL1i;NCB; GUN.!>UL1A1JUN Wl1it,Aiv ATJUHNU J.!> .6NCULmA(iJ;J.) W11it .RJ:;SP1:;G1 1U 11'.)
COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ElECTRONICALLY DR.AFTED,'A1A DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AM
DOCUNmNTD4m '
TO OWNER:
(Name and address)
ARCHTECT'S PROJECT NO.:
PROJECT:
(Name and address)
CONTRACT FOR:
CONTRACTDA TED:'
.~
In accordance With the provlSlons ot the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as mdlcated above, the
(Insert name and address of Surety)
'-~
'-"~
'~
: ~
J
, SURETY,
on bond of
(Insert name and address of Contractor)
, CONTRACTOR,
hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that [mal payment to the Contractor shall not relieve the Surety of
any of its obligations to
(Insert name and address of Owner)
, OWNER,
as set forth in said Surety's bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand on this date:
(Insert in writing the month followed by the numeric date and year.)
(Surety)
'J
f
J
1
(Signature of authorized representative)
Attest:
(Seal):
(Printed name and title)
@ 1994 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. AlA DOCUMENT G707 -
CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT - 1994 EDITION - AIA@ - WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will
subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AlA and can be reproduced in
accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: g707mast.aia -- 10/2212003. AlA License
Number 1001907, which expires on 2/29n004.
Electronic Format G707 - 1994
1
I
I : I
/Ul.
u
\!
r-l
;.,
,..,
'1
]
"(
, "1
t
j
I
..1.
1
J
j
I
I
Office of Superintendent of Public Instruction
Old Capitol Building, PO Box 47200
Olympia, WA 98504-7200
RETAINAG E'- PERCENTAGE
on Public Works Contracts
School District
Project Number
Contractor
RCW 60.28 as amended by Chapter 101, Laws of 1994 Regular Session allows each pr;ime contractor on a
public' works contract the following options concerning the amount reserved as retainage from moneys earned
by the contractor. .
'School district officials shall require each prime contractor to complete the following form for the
above public works p~oject STATE FUNDS WILL NOT BE DISTRIBUTED UNTIL THIS FORM IS ON,
FILE WITH THE SUPERINTENDENT OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION.
Contractor's Option
. i
D
D
Retained in a non-interest bearing fund by the public body until forty-five days following
the final acceptance of said improvement or work as completed. .
Deposited by the public body in an interest bearing account or escrow account in a bank, _
mutual savings bank, or savings and loan association designated by the contractor (Form
D-162), not subject to withdrawal until after the final acceptance of said improvement or
work as, completed, or until agreed to by both parties;.,PROVIDED, that interest on such
account shall be paid to the contra~or.
The contractor may provide a bond in place of retainage, in an amount equal to 5 percent
of the contract plus change orders. . The minimum requirements for the bohd.are: Must
be signed by'.a surety registered with t.he Washington State Insurance Commissioner and
is on the currently authorized insurance list published by the Washington State Insurance
Commissioner~ additional requirements as established by district board policy' may be
applied. Release of said bond will occur only after documents listed in WAC 180-29-165
and release letters from Department of Revenue, Employment Security, and Labor and
Industries are..on file with the Superintendent of Public Instruction.
D
SIGNATURE
DATE
TITlE
NAME OF RRM
ADDRESS
FORM SPI 0-163 (Rev. 6/96)
.1.1
'].
--n -
]J
/r
..J'
"J]
J]
-n
,..u
J]
"'-~
'l.
J
..~
.J
J
..J
.J
J
II
Bond Number
~latel:3OarO or t:Oucabon
Office of Superintendent' of Public .Instruction
Old Capitol 8uilding. PO Box 47200
Olympia, WA 98504-7200
RETAINAGE BOND
',,'.;.. "
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that
a corporation existing under and by virtue of the laws of. the State of
. ,
and authorized to do business in the State of Wash~n9tOli as Principal, and
'. . a ~orPoration organized and existing under the laVls of the State of
and. ?uthorized to trans~ct business jn the State of Washington as Surety,
are jointly and sever~lly. held and bound unto
School.District No._ hereinafter
called Agency and are similarly held and bound unto the beneficiaries of the trust fund created by RCWSO.28; in
the penal stirn of
Dollars ($ --':,
which isS' percent of the Principal's bid on Contract No.
WHEREAS, on the -'-- d~y.of
contract with the
,19
, the said Principal her~in executed a_
Schoo.! District No.---..J for:
WHEREAS, said contract and RCW 60.28 required the Agency to withhold from the principal the sum of 5 percent
from monies earned on estimates during the progress of the construction, hereinafter referred to as earned re-
tained funds. .
AND NOW,WHEREAS, Principal has requested that the Agency not retain fund$ as allowed under RCW 60.28.
NOW THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that the surety is held and bound unto the beneficiaries
of the trust fund created by RCW 60.28 in the penal sum of 5 percent qf the final contract cost which shall include
any iilcreases'due to change orders, increases. in quantities of work or the addition of any new item of work. If the
Principal shall use the earned retaine.d funds, wtlich will not be retained, for the trust fund purposes of RCW 60.28,
then this obligation shall be null and void; otl}erwise, it shall re'main in full force and effect until release is autho-
rized in writing by the Agency. .
FORM SPI 0-164 (Rev. 6/96)
Page 1 of2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART I - GENERAL
I.l
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative provIsIOns for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
I. General project coordination procedures.
2. Coordination Drawings.
3. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
4. Project meetings.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting the
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Division I Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation
and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout.
1.3
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to
ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations,
included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and
operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation
of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own
installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at
meetings.
I. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is
required.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01310-1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with
other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly
progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates
maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is
required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
2. Indicate required installation sequences.
3. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and Division 16 Section
"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination Drawing requirements for
mechanical and electrical installations.
B. Staff Names: Within 10 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify
individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home
and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned
as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary
telephone.
1.5
ADMINISTRA TIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A.
General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as
required for proper performance of the Work.
1.6
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required,
of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and
times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting
minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a
time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 10 days after execution of the Agreement.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01310-2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review
responsibilities and personnel assignments.
I. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, and their consultants; Contractor and its
superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall
attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Critical work sequencing.
c. Designation of responsible personnel.
d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
e. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
f. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
g. Submittal procedures.
h. Preparation of Record Documents.
i. Use of the premises.
j. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
k. Parking availability.
I. Office, work, and storage areas.
m. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
n. First aid.
o. Security.
p. Progress cleaning.
C. Pre installation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction
activity that requires coordination with other construction.
I. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected
by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that
have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect and Owner of scheduled
meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular
activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases.
e. Deliveries.
f. Submittals.
g. Review of mockups.
h. Possible conflicts.
i. Compatibility problems.
j. Time schedules.
k. Weather limitations.
I. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
m. Warranty requirements.
n. Compatibility of materials.
o. Acceptability of substrates.
p. Temporary facilities and controls.
q. Space and access limitations.
r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
s. Testing and inspecting requirements.
t. Required performance results.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINA nON
01310-3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
u. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements.
4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate
whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene
the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Owner's Representative will conduct progress meetings, transcribe and distribute
minutes at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
I. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,
supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination,
or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the
conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other
items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to
status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine
whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to
Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be
expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule
revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Off-site fabrication.
5) Temporary facilities and controls.
6) Work hours.
7) Progress cleaning.
8) Quality and work standards.
9) Change Orders.
10) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Reporting: Owner's representative will transcribe and distribute minutes of the meeting to each
party present and to parties who should have been present. A brief summary, in narrative form, of
progress since the previous meeting and report will be included.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised
schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01310
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01310-4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities,
support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B.
Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Sewers and drainage.
2. Water service and distribution.
3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities.
4. Heating and cooling facilities.
5. Ventilation.
6. Electric power service.
7. Lighting.
8. Telephone service.
C. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Environmental protection.
2. Stormwater control.
3. Site enclosure fence
4. Security enclosure and lockup.
5. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
6. Temporary enclosures.
7. Fire protection.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
2. Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in
those Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete,
insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with
permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01500 - 1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
].4
1.5
1.6
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall
be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without
cost, including, but not limited to, the following:
I. Owner's construction forces.
2. Occupants of Project.
3. Architect.
4. Testing agencies.
5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Water Service: Owner will pay water service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for water used
by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site.
c.
Electric Power Service: Owner will pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or
otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards: Comply with ANSI AIO.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.
I. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities
are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.
2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFP A 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary
utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of
temporary service to use of permanent service.
1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use
as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all
parties engaged in the Work:
] . Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat.
2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01500-2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
C.
D.
E.
2.2
A.
B.
MA TERIALS
A.
General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be
used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B.
Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch 0.I48-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing;
minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-
inch- OD comer and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails.
Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less.
Water: Potable.
EQUIPMENT
General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated
or a combination of extinguishers ofNFPA-recommended classes for exposures.
1. Comply with NFP A 10 and NFP A 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by
location and class of fire exposure.
C. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion
type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.
D. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Tap-dispenser, including paper cup supply.
E. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide self-contained,
Electric heaters with individual space thermostatic control. No fuel-fired heaters will be allowed inside
enclosed building.
1. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed.
F. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V
plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot
light.
G. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring
circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01500 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do
not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent
facilities.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing
service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching,
compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations.
I. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted,
if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available,
provide trucked-in services.
B. Water Service: Temporary water service will be available at the site.
I. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site.
C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with
regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and
facilities.
I. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable
materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for
disposal of used material.
2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy.
3. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for
personnel who handle materials that require wash up. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply
cleaning compounds appropriate for each type of material handled. Comply with State and
County regulations.
4. Locate toilets and drinking-water fixtures so personnel need not walk more than two stories 200
feet horizontally to facilities.
D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for
curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of
low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful
effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
I. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F in permanently enclosed portions of building for
normal construction activities, and 65 deg F for finishing activities and areas where finished Work
has been installed.
E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for
curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of
high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed
installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient
condition required and minimize energy consumption.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01500-4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
F. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system
of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters,
transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main
distribution switchgear.
G. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment.
I. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single
lengths wiII not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe
length-voltage ratio.
2. Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V.
3. Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metaIlic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage. Provide
rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic areas.
H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations and traffic conditions.
I. InstaII and operate temporary lighting that fulfilIs security and protection requirements without
operating entire system.
2. InstaII exterior-yard site lighting that wiII provide adequate ilIumination for construction
operations, traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed.
I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common-use
facilities used by aII personnel engaged in construction activities.
I. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.
b. Ambulance service.
c. Contractor's home office.
d. Architect's office.
e. Owner's office.
f. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
3.3
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INST ALLA TION
A.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in
ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air,
waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. A void using tools and
equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that
will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site.
B.
Storm water Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and
sub grade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.
C.
Site Enclosure Fence: Maintain security fence with lockable entrance gates. Install in a manner that will
prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.
I. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and other
construction operations.
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel.
Provide Owner with one set of keys.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01500-5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas
of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and
similar violations of security.
E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting
structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform
personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including
flashing red or amber lights.
F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and
completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide
temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
I. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated
temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing
requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
2. Vertical Openings: Close openings of25 sq. ft. or less with plywood or similar materials.
3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-
bearing, wood-framed construction.
4. Install tarpaulins securely using fire-retardant-treated wood framing and other materials.
5. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. in area, use fire-retardant-treated
material for framing and main sheathing.
G. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and
maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and
controllable fire losses. Comply with NFP A 24 I.
I. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from
space being served, with sign mounted above.
a. Field Offices: Class A stored-pressure water-type extinguishers.
b. Other Locations: Class ABC dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers
ofNFPA-recommended classes for exposures.
c. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose;
provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.
2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection
facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-
exposure areas.
4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of
fire ignition.
5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation
of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and
use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.
6. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for
personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
3.4
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit
availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01500-6
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused
by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
I. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and
similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid
possibility of damage.
2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from
damage during excavation operations.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not
change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until
Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it
has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion.
Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of
interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace
construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
I. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner
reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction
period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division I Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 0 I 500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01500-7
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART I - GENERAL
l.l
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for
use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products;
special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.
2. Division I Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
3. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout.
4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from
previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system,"
and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model
number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is
current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility,
except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated
otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or
where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function,
dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that
equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those
required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to
establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical
properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other
named manufacturers.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01600 - I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
D.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
E.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to
extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.
1.4
SUB MITT ALS
A.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and
Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.IA
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as
applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts
of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be
necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the
Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight,
size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners.
g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance with requirements indicated.
h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution
with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If
specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time,
include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability
or delays in delivery.
j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, ifany, in the Contract Sum.
k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements In the
Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
\. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become
necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation
for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify
Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request,
or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution
within time allocated.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements In Division I Section
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01600 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for
use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously
selected products were also options.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and
loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of
construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are
flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed
container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,
unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that
products are undamaged and properly protected.
5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure
above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation,
and weather-protection requirements for storage.
9. Protect stored products from damage.
B.
Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by
Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
1.7
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties
do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready
for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly
executed.
2. Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document using
appropriate form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01600 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.1
PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are
undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a
complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified,
provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar
situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched IS
Architect's.
6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements In the Specifications establish
"salient characteristics" of products.
B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:
1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single product
and manufacturer, provide the product named.
a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or
"Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the manufacturer or from the
source named that complies with requirements.
a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of
names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements.
a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers"
introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that
complies with requirements.
a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Products"
introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed or
another product that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable
Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available
Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the
manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with
provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
7. Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that size,
profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system,
provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable product or system by
another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Product Substitutions" Article.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01600 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
8. Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis-of-
Design Product[s]" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers' names,
provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named
manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other
characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in "Comparable
Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated.
9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample,
select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Architect's
sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with
other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents on
"substitutions" for selection of a matching product.
10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from
manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer)
that complies with other specified requirements.
a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from
manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.
b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns,
textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from
manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
11. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in Division 1
for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for processing such
selections.
2.2
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to
Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
B.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions
are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action,
except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or
other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's
additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation
services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated
results.
4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01600 - 5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.3
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, In addition to other
required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product:
I. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revIsions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated
results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names
and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01600 - 6
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
To:
Project:
Specified Item:
Section
Page
Paragraph
Description
The undersigned requests
Consideration ofthe following:
(Manufacture)
(Product)
PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION
Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test
data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified.
Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents which proposed substitution will
require for its proper installation.
The undersigned states that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct:
I. The proposed substitution does no affect dimensions shown on Drawings.
2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering
design, detailing and construction costs caused by the requested substitution.
3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction
schedule, or specified warranty requirements.
4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution.
The undersigned further states that the function, appearance and quality of the Proposed Substitution are
equivalent or superior to the Specified item.
Submitted by:
Signature
For use by Design Consultant:
[ ] Accepted [ ] Accepted as noted
Firm
[ ] Not Accepted [] Received too late
Address
By:
Date
Date:
Telephone
Remarks:
Attachments [
END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
SRF-I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 0 I 700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but
not limited to, the following:
I. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. General installation of products.
4. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
5. Progress cleaning.
6. Starting and adjusting.
7. Protection of installed construction.
8. Correction of the Work.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field
engineering with other construction activities.
2. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record
Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final
cleaning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and
location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.
I. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence
and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01700 - I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.2
3.3
I. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary
sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving
Project site.
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present
where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be
installed.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Architect that is necessary to adjust, move, or
relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or
affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
C.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other
construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
D.
Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on
Drawings.
E.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed
description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract
Documents.
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to layout the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in
relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect
promptly.
B.
General: Engage a professional engineer to layout the Work using accepted surveying practices.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01700 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.4
3.5
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and
elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required
dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by
authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and layout site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil
placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and layout control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work.
Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and
piers from two or more locations. Key layout to existing building.
E.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels.
Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each
survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by
Architect.
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property comers.
B.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points
before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during
construction operations.
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of
Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report
the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding.
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements
on the original survey control points.
C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for
type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary
reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its
original condition.
INST ALLA TION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as
indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01700 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease
of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom c1earance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain
conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in
excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in
place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights
directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, inc1uding thermal expansion and contraction.
G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange
joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, c1eaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6
OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A.
Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's
construction forces.
1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's
portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable.
Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction
progress.
2. Preinstallation Conferences: Inc1ude Owner's construction forces at pre installation conferences
covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation
conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's
construction.
3.7
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, inc1uding common areas. Coordinate progress c1eaning
for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of
materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFP A 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01700 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is
expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately ITom other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper
execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work
area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of
manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended.
If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to
health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
H.
Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste
materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
I.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials
already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or
deterioration at Substantial Completion.
J.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability
without damaging effects.
K.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure
during the construction period.
3.8
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units,
replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper
operation.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01700 - 5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-
assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1
Section "Quality Requirements."
3.9
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.10
CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply
with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with
matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without
visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot
be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 01700
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01700 - 6
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project Record Documents.
3. Operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Warranties.
5. Instruction of Owner's personnel.
6. Final cleaning.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for
Substantial and Final Completion.
2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting Final Completion
construction photographs and negatives.
3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site.
4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for
products of those Sections.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion,
complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list,
and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services
and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final damage
or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar fmal record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner.
Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel
of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
9. Submit test/adjustlbalance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction
tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect
will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items,
either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected
before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
1.4
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting fmal inspection for determining date of Final Completion,
complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list
shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and
systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect
will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will
prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must
be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified m previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected
by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary,
areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record
Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's and
Owner's reference during normal working hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown
originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is
Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily
identified and recorded later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before
enclosing concealed installations.
d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual
physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show
cross-reference on Contract Drawings.
2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from
original Drawings.
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and
similar identification where applicable.
5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRA WING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable
paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract
modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that
indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment
furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data, where applicable.
D. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to indicate the
actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Product Data.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's
written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Record Specifications, where applicable.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
E.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification
Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the
Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
1.7
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of
each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance
data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:
I. Operation Data:
a. Emergency instructions and procedures.
b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
c. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations.
d. Description of controls and sequence of operations.
e. Piping diagrams.
2. Maintenance Data:
a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
b. Name, address, and telephone number ofInstaller or supplier.
c. Maintenance procedures.
d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.
e. Maintenance record forms.
f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
g. Copies of maintenance service agreements.
h. Copies of warranties and bonds.
B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data
in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents,
with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine
with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject
matter of contents.
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work
where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 10 days of completion of designated
portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by
separate agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project
Manual.
I. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as
necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-I/2-by-II-inch paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to
identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation,
including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number ofInstaller.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MA TERlALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the
surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or
that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DEMONSTRA TION AND TRAINING
A.
Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and
equipment not part of a system.
I. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.
2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation,
provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
3. Schedule training with Owner's Representative with at least seven days advance notice.
4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and
course content.
B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each
system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each
training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following:
I. System design and operational philosophy.
2. Review of documentation.
3. Operations.
4. Adjustments.
5. Troubleshooting.
6. Maintenance.
7. Repair.
3.2
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide fmal cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local
laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or
unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign
substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign
deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.
e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of
stains, films, and similar foreign substances. A void disturbing natural weathering of
exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if
visible soil or stains remain.
i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove
glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or
broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking
care not to scratch surfaces.
j. Remove labels that are not permanent.
k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace
finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show
evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical
nameplates.
I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar
equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting
from water exposure.
o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of
diffusers, registers, and grills.
p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.
q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace
burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy
starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new
fixtures.
r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not bum waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess
materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage
systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 6
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
I. Remove existing concrete paving.
2. Removing existing concrete planters.
3. Removing above-grade site improvements.
4. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division I Section "Field Engineering" for verifying utility locations and for recording field
measurements.
2. Division I Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for temporary utilities,
temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and
environmental protection measures during site operations.
3. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall
become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Record drawings according to Division I Section "Contract Closeout."
I. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and
mechanical conditions.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I
Section "Project Meetings."
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
SITE CLEARING
02230 - I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
A Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities during site-clearing operations.
I. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission
from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing and coordinate with City.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
PREP ARA TION
A.
Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.
B.
Provide erosion-control measures as needed to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water
runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
C.
Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
D.
Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
UTILITIES
A.
Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Schedule interruptions with Owner.
C.
Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A.
Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new
construction.
B.
Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
SITE CLEARING
02230 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.4
DISPOSAL
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste
materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
B.
Excavated spoils, free of construction debris, paving, gravel, stumps and roots may be transported to low
spot on site, approximately ~ mile north of project location. All deposited spoils are to be bladed to level
appearance. All other excavated spoils to be removed from site.
END OF SECTION 02230
SITE CLEARING
02230 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."
2. Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems" for drainage of footings, slabs-an-grade, and
walls.
3. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course over vapor retarder.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support
sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated sub grade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water.
F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
1. Additional Excavation: Excavation elevations other than noted on plans. Additional excavation
and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the
Work.
2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in either
length or width.
EARTHWORK 02300 - I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below sub grade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions
without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by
Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retammg walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground
surface.
1. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the sub grade and base course for asphalt paving, or layer placed
between the sub grade and a concrete pavement or walk.
J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
K. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services
within buildings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from
excavations.
B.
Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a
combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris,
waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C.
Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and
PT, or a combination of these group symbols.
1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum
moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
E. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural
or crushed sand; WSDOT 9-03.10, gravel base.
F. Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or
crushed sand; WSDOT 9.03.10. gravel base.
G. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; WSDOT 9.03.10. gravel base.
H. Bedding: WSDOT 9-03.16 for flexible pipe. WSDOT 9-03.15 for rigid pipe.
1. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel;
ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-112- inch sieve and 0 to 5
percent passing a No.8 sieve.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
J. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand;
ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a I-inch sieve and 0 to 5
percent passing a No.4 sieve.
K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement,
lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective
insulating materials as necessary.
C.
Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-
bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.2
DEWATERING
A.
Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades,
and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B.
Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in
excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from
excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
3.3
EXCA V A TION, GENERAL
A.
Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and
subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions.
1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock,
replace with satisfactory soil materials.
3.4 EXCA VATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch Extend
excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete form work, for
installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing
concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive
other work.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
APPROVALOFSUBGRADE
A.
Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B.
If Soils Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions
for changes in the Work.
C.
Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess
yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.
D.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction
activities, as directed by Architect.
UNAUTHORIZED EXCA V A TION
A.
Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill
may be used when approved by Architect.
1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect.
BACKFILL
A.
Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
I. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and
perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
FILL
A.
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material
will bond with existing material.
B.
Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
I. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
MOISTURE CONTROL
A.
Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to
within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.10
3.11
3.12
I. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds
optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A.
Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by
heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-
operated tampers.
B.
Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly
along the full length of each structure.
C.
Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM D 1557:
1. Under steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing sub grade and each
layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below sub grade and compact each layer of
backfill or fill material at 92 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact
each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent.
GRADING
A.
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with
compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
I. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C.
Grading inside Building Lines: Finish sub grade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a lO-foot
straightedge.
SUB SURF ACE DRAINAGE
A.
Drainage Piping: Drainage pipe is specified in Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems."
B.
Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within
12 inches of final subgrade. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of drainage fabric, overlapping
sides and ends at least 6 inches.
C.
Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade and as follows:
1. Place base course material over subbase.
EARTHWORK 02300 - 5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.13
3.14
2. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross
sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to
ASTM 01557.
3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single
layer.
5. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal
layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted.
D. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows:
I. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM 0 1557.
2. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer.
3. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers,
with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to
perform field quality-control testing.
B.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test sub grades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.
c.
Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify
design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based
on a visual comparison of sub grade with tested sub grade when approved by Architect.
D.
Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM 0 1556, ASTM 0 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and
frequencies:
1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least
one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three
tests.
2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet or
less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.
E.
When testing agency reports that sub grades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction
specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and
retest until specified compaction is obtained.
PROTECTION
A.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
B.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces
become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations
or weather conditions.
EARTHWORK
02300 - 6
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and
recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with
additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and
eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.15
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MA TERlALS
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil, waste material, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off
Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
02300 - 7
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 02620 - FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes sub drainage systems for the following:
1. Foundations.
DEFINITIONS
PP: Polypropylene plastic.
PS: Polystyrene plastic.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
Subdrainage: Drainage system that collects and removes subsurface or seepage water.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Perforated-wall pipe and fittings.
2. Geotextile filter fabrics.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to the "Piping Applications" Article in Part 3 for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS
A.
Provide perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, ASTM D 2729, complete with fittings, couplings, and
accessories required for a complete installation.
SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS
A.
Comply with ASTM C ] ] 73, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining
underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and cOITosion-
resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
02620 - 1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1. Sleeve Materials:
a. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PYC.
b. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PYC or other material compatible with pIpe
materials being joined.
2. Unshielded Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and corrosion-
resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
3. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length,
corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant metal tension band and tightening
mechanism on each end.
2.4
CLEANOUTS
A.
PYC Cleanouts: ASTM D 3034, PYC c1eanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub.
2.5
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Backfill, drainage course, impervious fill, and satisfactory soil materials are specified m Division 2
Section "Earthwork."
2.6
GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS
A.
Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from 110 to
330 gpm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM D 4491.
1. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament or woven, monofilament or
multifilament.
2. Style(s): Flat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where sub drainage systems are to be installed.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
02620 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
EARTHWORK
A.
Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
PIPING APPLICA nONS
A.
Underground Subdrainage Piping:
1. Perforated PYC sewer pipe and fittings.
B. Underslab Subdrainage Piping:
1. Perforated PYC sewer pipe and fittings.
C. Header Piping:
1. PYC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.
CLEANOUT APPLICA nONS
A.
In Underground Sub drainage Piping:
I. At Grade in Earth: PYC c1eanouts.
FOUNDA nON DRAINAGE INST ALLA nON
A.
Place impervious fill material on sub grade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footing forms have
been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches deep
and 12 inches wide.
B.
Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.
C.
Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, to
compacted depth of not less than 4 inches.
D.
Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation subdrainage.
E.
Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform
tests.
F.
After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches on side away from footing
and above top of pipe to within 12 inches of finish grade.
G.
Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.
H.
Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at least 4
inches.
FOUNDA nON DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
02620 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.6
3.7
3.8
1.
Place initial backfill material over compacted drainage course. Place material in loose-depth layers not
exceeding 6 inches. Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to finish elevations and slope away
from building.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken
continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and
couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated.
1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of
0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of
0.5 percent.
3. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down.
B.
Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being
connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.
C.
Install PVC piping according to ASTM D 232 l.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3034 with elastomeric seal gaskets according to
ASTM D 2321.
B.
Join perforated PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2729, with loose bell-and-spigotjoints.
c.
Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special couplings
made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit materials and dimensions of
both pipes.
CLEANOUT INST ALLA TION
A.
Cleanouts for Subdrainage:
1. Install c1eanouts from piping to grade. Locate c1eanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes
in direction. Install fittings so c1eanouts open in direction of flow in piping.
2. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) [PVe] pipe and fittings for piping branch
fittings and riser extensions to c1eanout. Set c1eanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete
anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches in depth. Set top of c1eanout plug 1 inch (25 mm) above grade.
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
02620 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.10
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow
before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are
satisfactory.
3.1 ]
CLEANING
A.
Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses.
Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of
uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 02620
FOUNDA TION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
02620 - 5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:
1. Walkways.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course.
2. Division 2 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants" for joint sealants within concrete pavement and at
isolation joints of concrete pavement with adjacent construction.
3. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic
cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag,
and silica fume.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B.
Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of
materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
C.
Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies
with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials and aggregates.
2. Fiber reinforcement.
3. Admixtures.
4. Curing compounds.
5. Applied finish materials.
6. Bonding agent or adhesive.
7. J oint fillers.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same
manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.
B.
ACT Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
FORMS
A.
Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to
provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet or less.
B.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer throughout
the Project.
B.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
C. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag cement.
D. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type IP portland pozzolan cement.
E. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type I (PM) pozzolan-modified portland cement.
F. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595M, Type I (SM) slag-modified portland cement.
G. Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, from a single source, with coarse aggregate as follows:
1. Class: 4S.
2. Class: 4M.
3. Class: IN.
4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal.
5. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.
6. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.
7. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalIing.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.4
2.5
ADMIXTURES
General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble
chloride ions by mass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry.
B.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C.
Water: Potable.
D.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh
concrete.
E.
Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid-Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
F.
Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.
G.
White Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B.
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Ioint-Filler Strips: ASTM 0 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B.
Expansion- and Isolation-Ioint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
C. Expansion- and Isolation-Ioint-Filler Strips: ASTM 0 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or
ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
D. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
E. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and
bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows:
1. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened
concrete.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751-3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.6
2.7
2.8
A.
CONCRETE MIXES
A.
Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and strength of
normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.
B.
Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the followi9g properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. J
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.
4. Slump Limit: 3 inches.
a. Slump Limit for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: Not more
than 8 inches after adding admixture to plant- or site-verified, 2- to 3-inch slump.
C.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland
cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals.
D.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement
having an air content of2.5 to 4.5 percent.
E.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement
having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent:
1. Air Content: 6.0 percent for 3/4-inch maximum aggregate.
CONCRETE MIXES
A.
Provide 5-sack mix conforming to City of Port Angeles specifications for sidewalks.
CONCRETE MIXING
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94.
1. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification
name and number, date, mix type, quality, and amount of water added.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction.
Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready
to receive pavement.
B.
Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required
lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain
in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
B.
Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete without
damage.
3.3
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces
perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations
where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless pavement terminates at
isolation joints.
1. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially
hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch
basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
3. Terminate joint filler less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant
is indicated.
4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated.
5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip
joint-filler sections together.
6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary
preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.
D. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of
dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
E. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated.
Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge
of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.
a. Radius: 3/8 inch.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or
diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear,
abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.
F.
Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an
edging tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate
tool marks on concrete surfaces.
1. Radius: 3/8 inch.
3.4
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751-5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel,
and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not
place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place
concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.
D. Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting,
and placing concrete.
E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag
concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
F. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or
tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to recommendations In
AC1309R.
I. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal
vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only
square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent
dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.
G. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using bull floats
or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water
appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or
spreading dry-shake surface treatments.
H. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised mix design
and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to required thickness,
lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement.
1. Compact subbase and prepare sub grade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver
machine during operations.
I. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until
pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.
J. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical
damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
I. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and
aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and
not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
K. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI305R and as follows
when hot-weather conditions exist:
I. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90
deg F. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751-6
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.5
3.6
equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool
concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms and subgrades just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform
without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
CONCRETE FINISHING
A.
General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations IS
prohibited.
B.
Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or
by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down
high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.
I. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished concrete, perpendicular
to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.
2. Medium-to-Fine- Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete
surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
3. Medium-to-Coarse- Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished
concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-
weather protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions
cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply
according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying
concrete, but before float finishing.
c.
Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.
D.
Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound,
or a combination of these as follows:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and
edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for
curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches,
and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing
period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according
to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours
after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 -7
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.7
PA VEMENT TOLERANCES
A.
Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 1/4 inch.
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.
3. Surface: Gap below lO-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch.
4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: I inch.
5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch.
6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch.
7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of dowel
1/4 inch per 12 inches.
8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.
9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
3.8
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet
requirements in this Section.
B.
Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective
areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to
pavement with epoxy adhesive.
C.
Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When
construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and
spillage of materials as they occur.
D.
Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete
pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION 02751
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751-8
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including form work, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix
design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and walks.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B.
Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials,
project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
C.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according
to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules,
stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special
reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products
complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's
Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.
CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 548.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician,
Grade I, according to ACI CP-I or an equivalent certification program.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same
manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer.
E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to A WS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--
Reinforcing Steel."
F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated:
I. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth
concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS I, and as
follows:
a. High-density overlay, Class 1, or better.
b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge sealed.
c. Structural I, B-B, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.
d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
C. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties
designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on
removal.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of the exposed
concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than I inch in diameter in concrete
surface.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or
waterproofing.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 (SI), Grade 40, deformed and ASTM A 706, Grade 60.
B.
Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSl's "Manual
of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater
compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSl
Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C ISO, Type IIII.
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows:
1. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M.
2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 1/2 inch
3. Combined Aggregate Gradation: WeB graded from coarsest to finest with not more than 18
percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less than 8 percent
may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 sieve, and less than 8 percent may be retained on
sieves finer than No. 50.
C.
Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.
ADMIXTURES
A.
General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble
chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and
cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh
concrete.
B.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
c.
Water: Potable.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-
expanding cork.
B.
Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A hardness
of80 per ASTM D 2240.
C.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
D.
Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and
bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows:
1. Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
2. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened
concrete.
3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened
concrete.
CONCRETE MIXES
A.
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or
field test data bases, as follows:
1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.
B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the
laboratory trial mix basis.
C. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 2500 psi.
2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches.
D. Slabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 2500 psi.
2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd..
3. Maximum Slump: 4 inches.
E. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete required to have low water
permeability.
F.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F ABRICA TING REINFORCEMENT
A.
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
CONCRETE MIXING
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish
batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2
hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to
60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
FORMWORK
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain form work, according to ACI 30 I, to support vertical, lateral,
static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can
support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
c.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. Class A, 1/8 inch.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush
or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined
surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to I vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets,
recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and
slopes in fmished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off
templates or compacting-type screeds.
G.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of form work is
inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly titted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of
concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
H.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in
the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
I.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other
debris just before placing concrete.
J.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain
proper alignment.
K.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
before placing reinforcement.
EMBEDDED ITEMS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.3
3.4
3.5
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required.
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A.
General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not
support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24
hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard. enough to not be damaged by form-removal
operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.
B.
Leave form work, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of
concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:
1. 28-day design compressive strength.
2. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field- or laboratory-
cured test specimens according to ACI 301.
3. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or
disturbing shores.
C.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise
damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release
agent.
D.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and
secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved
by Architect.
SHORES AND RESHORES
A.
Comply with ACI 318, ACI 30 I, and recommendations in ACI 347R for design, installation, and removal
of shoring and reshoring.
B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide
adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with CRSl's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing
reinforcing bars.
1. Shop- or field-weld reinforcement according to A WS 01.4, where indicated.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 6
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.6
3.7
E.
Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap
edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to
prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
I. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction
joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip
placements of floors and slabs.
2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms, or bulkhead forms with
keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in
girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and
at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near
comers, and in concealed locations where possible.
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially
hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into
areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete
thickness, as follows:
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-an-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions
with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as
indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete
surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished
concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are
indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required,
lace or clip sections together.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is
complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by
Architect.
c.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on
concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed
continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 7
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined
construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures
for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at
uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators
to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators
into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of
vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and
other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate.
E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface
plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do
not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical
damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and
aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and
not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen
subgrade or on sub grade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
G. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI305R and as follows,
when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of
placement.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient
air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3.8
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an
orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective
areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch in height.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering
material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or
painting.
2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 8
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.9
3.10
3.11
B. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete:
I. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and
rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do
not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.
C.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent
to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.
Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless
otherwise indicated.
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A.
General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.IR for screeding, restraightening, and finishing
operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Trowel Finish: After applying float fmish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or
power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and
uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through
applied coatings or floor coverings.
I. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be
covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint,
or another thin film-fmish coating system
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to
ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local
values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local
values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.
c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local
values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs.
d. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and levelness, F(L) 35; with minimum local
values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 24.
3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled
freestanding lO-foot- long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the
surface, does not exceed the following:
a. 1/8 inch.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of
other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction.
Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work.
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
Comply with ACI306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-
weather protection during curing.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 9
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.12
3.13
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations.
Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or
darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and
other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If
removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following
methods:
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces,
including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the
following methods:
1. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for
curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches,
and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair
any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor
coverings.
E.
Slab protection: Following curing above, maintain waterproof sheeting covering over slab until roof
structure is in place to prevent slab saturation due to inclement weather.
JOINT FILLING
A.
Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until construction
traffic has permanently ceased.
B.
Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint
clean and dry.
CONCRETE SURF ACE REPAIRS
A.
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace
concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-
half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.
c.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spaIIs, air
bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other
discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
I. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch
in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts
perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with
bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. FiII form-
tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 10
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard
portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area
at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching.
Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural
performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify
surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain
for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalIs, popouts, honeycombs,
rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or
completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by
cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into
adjacent concrete.
4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by
cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and
expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces
in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same
materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and
finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
5. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove
top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles.
Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before
bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep
patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching
mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.
END OF SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300 - 1 I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Framing with engineered wood products.
2. Wood blocking and nailers.
3 . Wood furring
4. Sheathing.
5. Subflooring and underlayment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses."
2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view
and not specified in another Section.
3. Thermoplastic membrane roofing for flashing wood curbs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
2. WCLffi - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
3. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated
material.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood
product through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-
inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that
show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
C. Wood Structural Panels:
1. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
3. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness
indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.2
2.3
2.4
4. Comply with "Code Plus" provIsions in AP A Form No. E30K, "AP A
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial."
5. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: A WPA C2 (lumber) and A WPA C9 (plywood),
except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from
liquid water may be treated according to A WP A C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
1. Preservative Chemicals:
a. Copper azole, Type A (CBA-A).
B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and
15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with
requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members In
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
DIMENSION LUMBER
A.
General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber
Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.
B.
Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No.2 grade and the following
species:
1. Douglas Fir
C.
Exterior and Load-Bearing Walls: See structural drawings for requirements.
TIMBER
A.
For timber of 5-inch nominal size and thicker, provide material complying with the
requirements listed in the structural drawings.
1. Additional Restriction: Free of heart centers.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the
following:
1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
2. Blocking.
3. Cants.
4. Nailers.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No.2 grade lumber with 19
percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:
1. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWP A.
2. Northern species; NLGA.
3. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
C. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.6 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Open Web Joists: Prefabricated units complying with NER-14B-148; depths and performance
ratings not less than those indicated.
1. Web Material: 1" or 1 118" diameter tubular steel members varying In gauge and
diameter according to requirements. 45,000 PSI minimum yield.
2. Top and bottom chords: 1.5"x4.75" machine stress rated lumber.
B. Rim Boards: Performance-rated product complying with AP A PRR-40 1.
1. Material: all-veneer panels or structural composite lumber.
2. Thickness and Grade: 1-1/8-inch rim board.
3. Trademark: Factory mark with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and
compliance with AP A standard.
2.7 SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 48/24.
2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: 16 inches.
2. Thickness: Not less than 15/32 inch.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 4
r-
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
C. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 48/24.
2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch.
D. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure I sheathing.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 40/20
2. Thickness: Not less than 19/32 inch.
2.8 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high
relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME BI8.6.1.
E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads
and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
F. Lag Bolts: ASME BI8.2.1..
G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated, flat washers.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zmc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Building Paper: Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type r (No. 15
asphalt felt), unperforated.
B. Building Wrap: Air-retarder sheeting made from polyolefins; cross-laminated films, woven
strands, or spun-bonded fibers; coated or uncoated; with or without perforations; and complying
with ASTM E 1677, Type I.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1. Thickness: Not less than 3 mils.
2. Permeance: Not less than 10 perms.
3. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less per ASTM E 84.
4. Allowable Exposure Time: Not less than three months.
C. Building Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building wrap
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
D. Sheathing Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing
and recommended by sheathing manufacturer for use with type of sheathing required.
E. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill
sealer; I-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
F. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B.
Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
c.
Apply field treatment complying with A WP A M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
and plywood.
D.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
3. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the Standard Building Code.
E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as
required.
F. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and
fill holes with wood filler.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 6
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.2
3.3
WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INST ALLA TION
A.
Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
B.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry
work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement.
WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance of finish work.
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level and at ceiling, with wood blocking or
noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 2-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16
inches o.c.
3.4 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
3.5
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Do not splice structural members between supports.
D. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominal- dimension lumber on edge are required,
fasten together with 2 rows of20d nails spaced not less than 32 inches O.C. Locate one row near
top edge and other near bottom edge.
1. For continuous members, locate end joints over supports.
WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Arrange studs so wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition
and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of
2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used
for non-load-bearing partitions. Anchor or nail plates to supporting construction, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Construct comers and intersections with three or more studs. Provide blocking and framing as
indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 7
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
1. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches
high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions.
C. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at
ceiling line of top story. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide
closely fitted wood blocks of 2-inch nominal- thick lumber of same width as framing members.
D. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness
equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs.
1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs with headers not less than 4-
inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for
openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in
width, and not less than lO-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width.
2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 72 inches and less in
width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated.
TIMBER FRAMING INST ALLA TION
A.
Install timber with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches of bearing on supports.
Provide continuous members, unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports if not
continuous.
B.
Where beams or girders are framed into pockets of exterior concrete or masonry walls, provide
I/2-inch air space at sides and ends of wood members.
c.
Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated.
D.
Treat ends of timber beams and posts exposed to weather by dipping In water-repellent
preservative for 15 minutes.
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and
applications indicated.
1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide.
BUILDING PAPER APPLICATION
A.
Apply building paper horizontally with 2-inch overlap and 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing
with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap.
BUILDING WRAP APPLICATION
A.
Cover wall sheathing with building wrap as indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061 00 - 8
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap.
3. Seal seams, edges, and penetrations with tape.
4. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
3.10 SHEATHING TAPE APPLICATION
A. Apply sheathing tape to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing.
Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing.
END OF SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 9
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART I - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
I. Exterior standing and running trim.
2. Exterior fiber-cement lap siding.
3. Interior standing and running trim.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for framing, furring, blocking, and other carpentry work
not exposed to view.
2. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop-fabricated interior woodwork
interior woodwork not specified in this Section.
3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
I. WCLlB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
2. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
SUBMITTAL
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and
other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
B.
Deliver interior fmish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for
installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where
environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1.7
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HV AC system is operating and
maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
B.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements
and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty for Siding: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that fails in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, deformation or
deterioration beyond normal weathering.
I. Warranty Period for Siding (Excluding Finish): 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
A.
2.3
2.4
MA TERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade,
species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece[, or omit grade stamp and
provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency].
EXTERIOR SIDING AND SOFFIT
Siding: Primed, fiber-cement lap siding with 8" exposure. (Match existing).
EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A.
Trim for Painted Applications: Pre-Primed S.P.F. lumber with surfaced (smooth) face.
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A.
Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Grade A finish, kiln-dried, Fir finished
lumber (S4S), selected for compatible grain and color.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.5
FABRJCATION
A.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative humidity
conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
B.
Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished work:
I. Exterior standing and running trim wider than 5 inches.
2. Interior standing and running trim.
C. Ease edges ofIumber less than I inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber I inch
or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
PREP ARA TION
A.
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B.
Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas
for a minimum of24 hours, unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Prime lumber for exterior applications to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to required
lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting."
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or
too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
I. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims
where necessary for alignment.
I. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry
with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal
installation.
4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for
mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A.
Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of
lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in
adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at comers to produce tight-
fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment.
I. Match color and grain pattern across joints.
2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or
warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather.
SIDING INSTALLATION
A.
Horizontal Siding: Apply starter strip along bottom edge of sheathing or sill. Install first course of siding
with lower edge at least lI8 inch below starter strip and subsequent courses lapped I inch over course
below. Nail at each stud. Do not allow nails to penetrate more than one thickness of siding.
B.
Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings and as recommended by siding manufacturer.
C.
Finish: Apply finish within two weeks of installation.
D.
Install siding to comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements.
ADJUSTING
A.
Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be
repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
CLEANING
A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 07115 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes hot-applied asphalt dampproofing applied to the following surfaces:
1. Exterior, below-grade surfaces of concrete foundation walls.
2. Steel Door Frames
B.
Related Sections include:
1. Division 3 Section "Cast in Place Concrete".
2. Division 8 "Steel Doors and Frames".
SUB MITT ALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of application,
primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.
B.
Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source from a
single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit asphalt dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces.
Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has thoroughly cured.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
A.
Odor Elimination: For interior and concealed-in-wall uses, provide dampproofing material warranted by
manufacturer to be substantially odor free after drying for 24 hours under normal conditions.
BITUMINOUS DAMP PROOFING
07115 - 1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.2
B.
Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturers meeting the requirements of this Section are approved.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended
by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINA TION
A.
Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness
and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Begin dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been
completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREP ARA TION
A.
Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained,
spotted, or coated with dampproofmg. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep
holes and drains.
B.
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond
breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.
APPLICA TION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated
or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.
1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or required to achieve coverages
indicated.
2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats.
B. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces building interior
whether indicated or not.
1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a minimum
of 6 inches over outside face of footing.
2. Extend 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to
view when Project is completed.
3. Install flashings and comer protection stripping at internal and external comers, changes in plane,
construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an 8-inch- wide strip
of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofmg coat required for
embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required.
4. Continue dampproofmg through intersecting walls by keeping vertical mortar joints at intersection
temporarily open or by delaying construction of intersecting walls until dampproofing is applied.
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
07115 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.
END OF SECTION 07115
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
07115-3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade.
2. Concealed building insulation.
3. Vapor retarders.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall for framed wall, partition and ceiling assemblies.
2. Division 15 for Pipe and Duct Insulation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source.
B. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response
characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by
UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other
sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for
handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - I
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
2.2
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
1. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation:
CertainTeed Corp., Owens-Coming Fiberglass Corp., approved equal.
INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.
1. Provide R-values or thicknesses as indicated in the Specifications or on Drawings (R-value shall
govern over thickness shown).
a. Concrete Slab Insulation: R-lO Rigid.
b. Rigid Insulation at exterior concrete walls 1 WI thick, R-l O.
c. Mineral Fiber BlanketlBats: R-2I Walls, R-38 Roof.
B. Unfaced Mineral Fiber BlanketlBatt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining mineral
fibers of types described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I
(blankets without membrane facing): and as follows:
1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
2. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136 test.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values
of25 and 50, respectively.
AUXILIARY INSULA TING MATERIALS
Polyethelene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397 6 mils with laboratory-tested vapor transmission rating of
.03 perms.
Mechanical Anchors: Type and size indicated or, of not indicated, as recommended by insulation
manufacturer for type of application and condition of substrate.
Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints between units and
filling voids in work.
Protection Board: Premolded, semi-rigid asphalt/fiber composition board, \1.." thick, formed under heat
and pressure, standard sizes.
Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed rigid fiberboard or plastic sheet designed and sized to fit between
roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaced and vented eaves.
Insulation Holder Assemblies and vapor barrier for ceiling insulation: Provide holder assemblies as
manufactured by T-foil Enterprises, Auburn, WA or approved equal. Provide Type TC 8125. Holder
assemblies shall be of length to allow 4" min.-6" max. distance between top of insulation ad underside of
roof sheathing. Assembly shall meet the following requirements.
I. Flame Spread: 25 or less, Class 1.
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2. Permeance (ASTM E 96): To comply with UBC and local codes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to
ice and snow.
C.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D.
Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate
location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates
piping.
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical
anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Set vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation
spaces, except for frrestopping.
I. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
INSTALLATION OF V APOR RETARDERS
A.
General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure
in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover
miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
B.
Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor
retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space
fasteners 16 inches o.c.
c.
Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by
vapor-retarder manufacturer.
D.
Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with
vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.
E.
Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover
with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical
abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse
and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
07210 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
Section 07400 Metal Roofing
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preformed metal roof panels.
2. Accessories, including underlayment materials, fasteners, sealant, sealant tape,
closures and flashing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07600-Flashing and Sheet Metal
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's written technical information and installation instructions
which demonstrate that materials to be installed with Contract Documents.
B. Product Samples: Submit samples for color selection.
1. Submit manufacturer's standard profile sample, color chips and published
information as applies.
C. Submit letter of compliance and conformance from the manufacturer.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Must be a nationally recognized manufacturer in good standing with the
National Roofing Contractor's Association.
B. Installer: Must be a certified applicator of the approved product and system with a
minimum of ten (10) years of experience installing the products specified.
C. Regulatory agency Requirements: Comply with Building Code requirements if more
restrictive than those specified herein.
D. Testing and Certification: Wind Up-Lift- UL580, Class 90; Construction #130, UL
Building Materials Directory.
E. Reference Standard: Flashing and gutters per recommendations of Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual, latest edition.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty guaranteeing to correct failures in product
which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or otherwise limiting
any other rights to correction which the Owner may have under the Contract
Documents.
1. Warrant the finish performance against crack, check, peel or flake, changing
color or chalking for twenty (20) years from date of substantial completion.
Metal Roofing 07400-1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
Section 07400 Metal Roofing
B. Contractor's Guarantee: The General Contractor and Metal Panel Sub-Contractor
shall jointly and unconditionally guarantee in writing the water-tightness of the total
assembly for a period of three (3) years from the date of substantial completion. This
warranty constitutes a guarantee that the Contractor will furnish all labor and
materials which may be necessary for repairs during this period. The only exceptions
to this guarantee are damages caused by the Owner or others, and by fire, smoke,
lightning and hail.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store the products to prevent excessive exposure and damage by other
trades. Protect from direct element exposure during storage. Elevate one end of
panels to drain any accumulated moisture.
B. Product shall be shipped with factory applied strippable plastic.
C. Handle products carefully so as to minimize damage from hoisting, handling and
installation. Metal product and cartons/crafting shall not be used as a storage or work
platform.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Examine the conditions and substrates in which metal roofing is to be installed. Substrate
shall be installed level, flat and true to avoid panel stresses.
B. Field measurements shall be taken prior to fabrication of panels.
C. Proceed with roofing installation only after satisfactory conditions are met.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Approved Manufacturer:
1. Metal roofing as manufactured by Champion Metal of Washington, Inc.
2. Approved equal.
B. Roof panel designation: (specifications are based on Champion's Steel Snap-Loc)
1. Base Metal:
a. Material: Steel
b. Manufacturing Standard: ASTM A-653-94, Grade D or E.
c. Thickness: 26 gauge.
d. Minimum Yield Strength: Min. 50,000 psi for Grade E.
e. Protective Coating: Galvanized G90 coating: Min. 1.25 oz. Of pure zinc per
square foot.
2. Configuration:
a. Coverage of 12 inches with 1" standing seam.
b. Panel Length: Full length, from ridge to eaves and from wall to eaves.
c. Panels shall not include accent ribs.
3. Exterior Finish:
a. Paint System: Two coat baked-on Polyester. Exterior finish includes 1 mil.
total finish thickness.
Metal Roofing 07400-1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
Section 07400 Metal Roofing
b. Color: To match existing, review with Architect.
c. Salt Spray resistance - ASTM 8 - 117; humidity Resistance - ASTM D-2247
and ASTM D-714; Abrasion Resistance - ASTM D - 968, Formability
Test - ASTM D - 1737.
4. Interior Finish: Shall consist of a 0.5 mil. total finish thickness.
C. Fasteners:
1. As per manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Sealant:
1. Use sealant with primer or sealant per manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Profile Closures:
1. Use material to match gauge and finish of roofing panel.
2. Use neoprene or polyethylene foam, die-cast or formed to panel configuration.
F. Flashing: Provide all Rake, Corner, Ridge, Valley and all other miscellaneous trims
and flashings required for a complete installation.
1. Use material of same gauge and finish.
2. Dissimilar materials will not be allowed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Review substrate to receive metal panels for obstructions, loose sheathing, or voids
in sheathing. Repair or replace unacceptable work which may affect proper roofing
material installation.
B. Install roofing panels per manufacturer recommendations.
C. Caulk, seal and fasten so as to provide a complete weather-tight installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Remove projections and debris from substrate before starting installation. Lay
sheet metal over minor voids and attach to substrate.
2. Secure all vent stacks, curbs and other penetrations to substrate before starting
panel installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install roofing panels per manufacturer's specifications and NRCA's "The NRCA .
Steep Roofing Manual".
2. Layout work with horizontal and vertical chalk lines.
B. Flashing: Materials and fabrication specified in 07600.
Metal Roofing 07400-1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
Section 07400 Metal Roofing
1. Install flashing and edge protection, to conform with installation details and
instructions of 'The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual" and to provide a weathertight
installation:
2. Step Flashing at Vertical Walls: Install for entire length of intersection of roof
surface and vertical wall.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove construction debris from roof surfaces and surrounding areas on a daily
basis.
8. Touch-up areas as required or directed with manufacturer's standard touch-up paint.
Follow instructions for application.
C. Clean out gutters and downspouts of ALL debris whether organic or construction
related.
D. At completion, leave project free from stains, scraps, scrapes and scratches.
E. Final inspection will be at the discretion of the Owner's representative.
END OF SECTION 07400
Metal Roofing
07400-1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes sealants for the following applications:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:
a. Perimeter joints between siding materials and frames of doors and windows.
b. Joints between siding materials and trims.
c. Other joints as indicated.
2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows.
c. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
d. Other joints as indicated.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board
partitions to reduce sound transmission.
3. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of
acoustical ceilings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals
without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B.
Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multicomponent materials.
B.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following
conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant
manufacturer.
2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant
manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
3. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less
than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable
of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each type
in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this
characteristic.
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3,
including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.
B.
Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Elastomeric
Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion
under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the
joint width existing at the time of instalIation and remain in compliance with other requirements of
ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.
JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.5
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control
sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin.
MISCELLANEOUS MA TERlALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates
and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants
with joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent
to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINA nON
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant
performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREP ARA nON
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading,
or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning
operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces
include the following:
a. Concrete.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates,
or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
a.
b.
Metal.
Glass.
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.3
c. Porcelain enamel.
8.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based
on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint
sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow
spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces
that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
INST ALLA nON OF JOrNT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace
them with dry materials.
D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are
installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Non sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 58 in ASTM C 1193, where indicated.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess depth and at
locations indicated.
a.
Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooledjoints.
JOrNT SEALANTS
07920 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints
occur.
3.5
PROTECTION
B.
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired
areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
3.6
ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
C.
Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant ES-#: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated,
provide products complying with the following:
1. Products: Available products include the following:
a. 756 H.P.; Dow Coming.
b. Silglaze II; GE Silicones.
c. 895; Pecora Corporation.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in
compression for a total of 100 percent movement.
5. Users] Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M and o.
a. Use 0 Joint Substrates: [Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum coated with a
high-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, granite, limestone, marble, ceramic tile,
and wood.]
END OF SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Steel doors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Naming Products)" for door hardware and
weather stripping.
2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass in glazed openings in doors and frames.
3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting factory-primed doors.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are
minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base
metal of metallic-coated steel sheets.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material
description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and
finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details.
3. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
4. Coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
C.
Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors
and frames.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Door Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
STEEL DOORS
08110 - 1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver doors cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide
additional protection to prevent damage to finish.
B.
Inspect doors on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor
damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect.
Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed.
C.
Store doors at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Avoid
using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging
becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum l/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to
permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
MATERIALS
A.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1011N 101IM, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
B.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/AlO08M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 1008/A1008M,
Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
C.
Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating;
mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness where used
for face sheets.
DOORS
A.
General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated.
B.
Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing
ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250A for physical-endurance level:
I. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
C.
Vision Lite Systems: Manufacturer's standard kits consisting of glass lite moldings to accommodate glass
thickness and size of vision lite indicated.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate steel door units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and
free from defects including warp and buckle. Fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.
B.
Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate doors, panels,
and frames from ASTM A525, G60 electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of
doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.053-inch- thick, electrolytic zinc-
coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges.
STEEL DOORS
08110 -2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
C. Core Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials that produce a door
complying with SOl standards:
1. Rigid mineral-fiber board.
D. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than
1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.
E. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFP A 80.
F. Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Beveled edge, unless square edge is indicated.
G. Tolerances: Comply with SOl 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or
hot-rolled steel sheet.
I. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed
screws and bolts.
J. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled,
provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or
ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value of 0.41 Btu/sq. ft. x h
x deg F or better.
K. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door
hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements
in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A 115 Series specifications for door preparation for hardware.
L. Reinforce doors to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware
may be done at Project site.
M. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.
N. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.032-inch- thick steel sheet.
1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for
glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in
doors.
O. Astragals: As required by NFP A 80 to provide fire ratings indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INST ALLA TION
A.
General: Install steel doors, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as
specified.
STEEL DOORS
08110 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
B.
Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within
clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and
ANSIIDHI AI15.1G.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and
frames.
END OF SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS
08110 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer, faces.
2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.
3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, and trim for
openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other
pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for the
following:
1. Faces of Factory-Finished Doors: Show the full range of colors available for stained finishes.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each
material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples
showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work.
2. Comer sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edgings representing
typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish
sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.
3. Frames for lite openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211 - 1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1.4
I.5
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA LS.I-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
c.
Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I
Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons] [cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of
doors in plastic sheeting.
C.
Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HV AC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HV AC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and
relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.
I. 7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in
which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have
warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section, or show telegraphing of core
construction in face veneers exceeding 0.0 I inch in a 3-inch span.
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion:
a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Five years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
Doors for Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A and A faces.
2. Species and Cut: Birch, plain sliced.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
4. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate room or area
of building.
5. Transom Match: End match.
6. Stiles: Same species as faces
2.2
SOLID-CORE DOORS
A.
Interior Veneer-Faced Doors:
I. Core: Particleboard.
2. Construction: Seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed
before veneering.
3. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.
2.3
LIGHT FRAMES
A.
Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors:
1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces
2. Profile: Lipped tapered beads.
2.4
F ABRICA nON
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with
requirements in NFP A 80 for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-
WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHl A115-W series
standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced
standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.
1. Lite Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2.5
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory fmishing.
B.
Finish doors at factory.
C.
Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211-3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
D. Transparent Finish:
1. Finish: NWWDA I.S.I-A System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
2. Staining: None required.
3. Effect: SemifilIed finish.
4. Sheen: Semigloss.
3.1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
B.
3.2
A.
B.
e.
D.
3.3
A.
B.
A.
Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and SWIng
characteristics and have been instalIed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
Proceed with instalIation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INST ALLA TION
Hardware: For instalIation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
Manufacturer's Written Instructions: InstalI doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions,
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project
site.
ADJUSTING
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be
repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refmishing.
END OF SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
GLAZING
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in
other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Glazed entrances.
4. Interior borrowed lites.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing
publications.
B.
Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.
c.
Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and
cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking,
and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
D.
Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and
cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the
obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B.
Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass
thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size
openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat
treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
08800 - 1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according
to the following requirements:
a. Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from
basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7,
"Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.4.2, "Analytic
Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings.
b. Specified Design Snow Loads: As indicated, but not less than snow loads applicable to
Project, required by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures": Section 7, "Snow Loads."
c. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not
more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
I) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.
d. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: 1 lite per 1000 for lites set more than 15
degrees off vertical and under wind and snow action.
1) Load Duration: 30 days.
e. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all four edges,
provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50
times the short side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.
1) For insulating glass.
f. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm.
g. Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for each tint
color indicated throughout Project.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following
maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and
glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar
heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range); 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based
on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.
2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick and a nominal 1/2-
inch- wide interspace.
3. Center-of-Glass V-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer
program, expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F.
4. Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298
WINDOW 4.1 computer program.
5. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
GLAZING
08800 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1.6
B. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a
schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
E. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating
glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility
with glass and other glazing materials.
F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the following products comply with
requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products:
1. Tinted float glass.
2. Coated float glass.
3. Insulating glass.
4. Glazing sealants.
G.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of
successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified
under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or
Level 3 (Master Glaziers).
B.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of
successful in-service performance.
C.
Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer.
D.
Source Limitations for Tinted Glass: Obtain tinted, heat-absorbing, and light-reducing float glass from
one primary-glass manufacturer for each tint color indicated.
E.
Source Limitations for Coated Glass: Obtain coated glass from one manufacturer for each type of coating
and each type and class of float glass indicated.
F.
Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating-glass units from one manufacturer using the
same type of glass and other components for each type of unit indicated.
G. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each
product and installation method indicated.
H. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a
qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.
GLAZING 08800 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
2. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency accredited according to the
NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
1. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in
"Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a
36-month period.
1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
J. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and
ANSI Z97.1.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of
Safety Glazing Certification Councilor another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
K. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and
organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide."
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-l, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR-A7,
"Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines," and SIGMA TB-3001,
"Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
1. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one
component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and testing agency:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.
2. Associated Laboratories, Inc.
3. National Accreditation and Management Institute.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent
damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating-
glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature
conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel
substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
GLAZING 08800 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1.9
1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Coated-Glass Products: Written warranty, made out to Owner and
signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated-glass units that
deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within
specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed
by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating-glass units that
deteriorate as defmed in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within
specified warranty period indicated below.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
GLAZING
PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS
A.
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated
in schedules at the end of Part 3.
WIRED GLASS
A.
Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q8
(glazing); 6.4 mm thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below:
1. Polished Wired Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), and as follows:
a. Mesh m 1 (diamond).
b. Mesh m2 (square).
INSULATING GLASS
A.
Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated
interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this
Article and in the Insulating-Glass Schedule at the end ofpart 3.
1.
Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist
thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass
design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully
tempered) where safety glass is indicated.
08800 - 5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
B. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated in the Insulating-Glass
Schedule at the end of Part 3 are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured
perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.
C. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:
I. Manufacturer's standard sealants.
2. Polyisobutylene and polysulfide.
3. Polyisobutylene and silicone.
4. Polyisobutylene and hot-melt butyl.
5. Polyisobutylene and polyurethane.
D. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
E. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying with the
following requirements:
I. Aluminum with mill or clear-anodized fmish.
2. Aluminum with black color-anodized fmish.
3. Aluminum with bronze color-anodized finish.
4. Aluminum with powdered metal paint fmish in color selected by Architect.
5. Galvanized steel.
6. Stainless steel.
7. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
8. Comer Construction: Manufacturer's standard comer construction.
2.4
ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
I. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other
materials they wiI\ contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing
channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting
glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of
installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Match Architect's samples.
4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
5. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for
this characteristic.
B.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant in the Glazing Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3,
including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.
2.5
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard,
requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a
proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
GLAZING
08800 - 6
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.6
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by
glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open-cell material), of size and density to
control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A.
Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with
edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements.
B.
Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square
edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces.
C.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
GLAZING
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at
comers.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREP ARA TION
A.
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove
coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing
materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing
publications.
B.
Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge
and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by
Project conditions during installation.
08800 - 7
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.4
3.5
GLAZING
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project
site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other
imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction
sealant-substrate testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications,
unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable
for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows:
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install
correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are
used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with
system performance requirements.
2. Provide lI8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With
glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing
channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced
glazing publications.
I.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A.
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and
glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel
and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in
position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant
to glass and channel surfaces.
c.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and
clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations,
including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent
intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,
or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.
08800 - 8
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.6
3.7
3.8
GLAZING
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E.
Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by
glass manufacturer.
MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS SCHEDULE
A.
Uncoated Clear Float Glass: Where glass as designated below is indicated, provide Type I (transparent
glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) glass lites complying with the following:
1. Uncoated Clear Annealed Float Glass FG-[#]: Annealed or Kind HS (heat strengthened),
Condition A (uncoated surfaces) where heat strengthening is required to resist thermal stresses
induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with performance
requirements.
INSULATING-GLASS SCHEDULE
A.
Insulating Glass IG-[#]: Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide uncoated insulating-glass
units complying with the following:
1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: As indicated.
2. Interspace Content: Argon.
3. Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass.
4. Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat) float glass.
a. Class 1 (clear).
B. Low-E Insulating Glass IG-[#]: Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide low-emissivity
insulating-glass units complying with the following:
1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: As indicated.
2. Interspace Content: Argon.
3. Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class I (clear) float glass.
4. Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat) float glass
a. Class 1 (clear).
5. Low-Emissivity Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.
6. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
GLAZING SEALANT SCHEDULE
A.
Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant GS-[#]: Where glazing sealants of this
designation are indicated, provide products complying with the following:
1.
2.
3.
Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
Class: 25.
Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
08800 - 9
1--
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
END OF SECTION 08800
GLAZING
08800 - 10
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum wallboard.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section Rough Carpentry for wood framing and furring, and gypsum sheathing applied
over wood framing.
2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in gypsum
board assemblies.
3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for painting ofGWB walls.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies
not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of
manufacturer or supplier.
B.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels
flat to prevent sagging.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's
written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A.
Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
correspond with support system indicated.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.
I. Regular Type:
a. Thickness: As indicated.
b. Long Edges: Tapered.
c. Location: As indicated.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
I. Material: Galvanized or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Comerbead: Use at outside comers, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.
c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where indicated.
d. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B.
Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with
other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
I. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use
setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim
flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
TEXTURE FINISHES
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work
include, but are not limited to the following:
1. G.P. Gypsum Corp., GypRoc Ceiling TexturelPolystyrene
2. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Perfect Spray
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.5
2.6
3. United States Gypsum Co.; Sheetrock ceiling spray texture, QT Polystyrene
4. United States Gypsum Co.; Sheetrock waIl and ceiling spray texture (aggregated).
B.
Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
C.
Aggregate Finish: Level 4 finish, Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for
spray application.
1. Texture: Light orange peel (light splatter) for all painted surfaces.
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter
joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies
according to ASTM E 90.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to
0.112 inch thick.
C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by
combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
E. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
3.1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
3.2
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in
anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREP ARA TION
A.
Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead
structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been
installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop
their full strength.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.3
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
B.
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
C.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed
after panels have been installed on one side.
D.
Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not
less than one framing member.
E.
Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
F.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or
gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges
or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control
joints at comers of framed openings.
G.
Attach gypsum panels to studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported)
edges of stud first.
H.
Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
1.
Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and
headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide control joints to
counteract wood shrinkage.
J.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
K.
Cover both faces of partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.),
except in chases braced internally.
I. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,
coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and
decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members;
allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.
L. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors.
Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with V-bead edge trim where
edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with
acoustical sealant.
M. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended in writing by manufacturer, install
gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal comer construction.
N. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at
openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both
faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's
written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through
gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.3
3.4
3.5
O. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing
standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications.
PANEL APPLICATION METHODS
A.
Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent
possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels as indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated
assembly, and minimize endjoints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or
required by frre-resistance-rated assembly.
c. Stagger joints at least 16" in double-layer assemblies, unless otherwise indicated or
required by code.
B.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for
panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener
heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for
locations indicated:
1. Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and
trim flanges.
2. Provide Level 4 finish. Light Orange peel texture.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
E.
Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect and Contractor
will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed
with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected.
I. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project, will be
ready for above-ceiling observation.
2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board ceilings:
a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation.
b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems.
c. Installation of air-duct systems.
d. Installation of air devices.
e. Installation of mechanical system control-air tubing.
f. Installation of ceiling support framing.
END OF SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09260 - 6
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical ceiling panels and suspension systems for ceilings in areas as indicated
in drawings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AC: Articulation Class.
B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.
C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Coordinate Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-
mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access
panels, and special moldings.
4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared
on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- long Samples of
each type, finish, and color.
E. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511-1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following
requirements:
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-burning
characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class C materials as determined by testing
identical products per ASTM E 84:
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
C. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of
earthquake motions according to the following:
1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with
ASTM E 580.
2. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations
for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--Seismic Zones 0-2."
3. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines
for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies--Seismic Zones 3 & 4."
4. UBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel
Ceilings. "
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original,
unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected
against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination,
and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture
content.
c.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for
its intended use.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HV AC equipment, fire-suppression
system, and partition assemblies.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1.9 EXTRA MA TERlALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that
comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light
reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test
specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.
1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern
designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide
products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements
indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
2.2
MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING: APC-1
A.
Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows:
1. Pattern: D - fine fissured for all rooms as shown on drawings unless noted otherwise.
B. Color: White
C. LR: Not less than 0.84.
D. NRC: Not less than 0.55.
E. CAC: Not less than 35.
F. AC: Not less than 170.
G. Edge Detail: Square.
H. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
1. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension
systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable
requirements in ASTM C 635.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511-3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's
standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for
Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table I, "Direct
Hung," unless otherwise indicated.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 64IM, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.I35-inch-
diameter wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings
attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other
Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREP ARA TION
A.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite
edges of each ceiling. A void using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown
on reflected ceiling plans.
INST ALLA TION, GENERAL
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with UBC Standard 25-2 and seismic requirements
indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system
members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent
devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of
three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other
devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail
due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
6. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers,
unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns.
Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to
permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-
place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and
edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.
I. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension system runners and moldings.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension
system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor
finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired
to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 095 I I
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095 I I - 5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 09680 - CARPET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1. Tufted carpet.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories", "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient
wall base and accessories installed with carpet.
SUBMITI ALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical
characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of
substrate required.
B.
Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample
with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and
in schedules.
1. Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample.
C. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the
following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures
and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation
Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.
B. Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements for product quality
in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Other manufacturers' products comparable in
quality to named products and complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1
Section "Substitutions."
CARPET 09680 - 1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
I.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
General: Comply with CRlI04, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
General: Comply with CRlI04, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when
occupied for its intended use.
C.
Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with
adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D.
Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet
before installing these items.
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that
does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not
include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs,
and delamination.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MA TERlALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less
than 10 sq. yd.
2.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CARPET
CARPET
A.
A vailable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Collins & Aikman
CPT-I
a.
b.
09680 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.2
3.1
3.2
CARPET
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation
provided by or recommended by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions
indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by
the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
c.
Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for
taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.
D.
Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect
exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.
EXAMINATION
E.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture
content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance.
Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements
specified.
F.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that
may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing
bond and moisture tests recommended by the following:
a. Carpet manufacturer.
2. Subfloor fmishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
G.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREP ARA TION
A. General: Comply with CRII04, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet
installation.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
09680 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended
in writing by the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
B. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning,
examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRr 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down Installation."
B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet;
maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed
position.
1. Bevel adjoining border edges at seams with hand shears.
2. Level adjoining border edges.
C.
Do not bridge building expansionjoints with carpet.
H.
Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including
cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by
carpet manufacturer.
1.
Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges,
alcoves, and similar openings.
J.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
K.
Instal! pattern paral!el to wal!s and borders.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Perform the fol!owing operations immediately after instal!ing carpet:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by
carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yams that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRr 104, Section 15, "Protection ofIndoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures
during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing
by carpet manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09680
CARPET
09680 - 4
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
SECTION 09912 - PAINTING PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and
surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop
priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be
painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or
surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect
will select from standard colors and finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color
coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical
equipment that do not have a factory-applied final fmish.
C. Do not paint prefmished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a. Architectural woodwork.
b. Acoustical wall panels.
c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
d. Light fixtures.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:
a. Furred areas.
b. Ceiling plenums.
c. Utility tunnels.
d. Pipe spaces.
e. Duct shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Bronze and brass.
c. Stainless Steel
d. Chromium Plate.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
PAINTING (pROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 1
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1.3
1.4
1.5
a. Valve and damper operators.
b. Linkages.
c. Sensing devices.
d. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D.
Related Sections include the foHowing:
1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel.
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames.
4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum board.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-
degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-
degree meter.
3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at
a 60-degree meter.
SUB MITT ALS
A.
Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-
reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and
instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.
1. After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
C.
Qualification Data: For Applicator.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in
material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications
with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer
as the finish coats.
PAINTING (pROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 2
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating
and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved
sample Submittals.
1. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each type of coating and substrate.
a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft..
b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent
lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and
texture on each surface.
a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating
systems of a similar nature.
3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient
temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and
residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are
between 50 and 90 deg F.
B.
Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are
between 45 and 95 deg F.
C.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at
temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed
and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying
periods.
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 3
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities
described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing
contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with extra paint materials in quantities indicated below:
a. Exterior, Flat Acrylic Paint: 1 gal. of each color applied.
b. Exterior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 1 gal. of each color applied.
c. Interior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: I gal. of each color applied.
2. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 1 gal., as appropriate, of each material and color
applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUFACTURERS
A.
A vailable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
B.
Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers'
names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).
2. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints).
3. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams).
4. Or approved equal by Architect, prior to bidding.
PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-
material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or
materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of
equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates
of performance for proposed substitutions.
B.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
EXTERIOR PRIMERS
A. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex primer for
exterior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Alkyd Masonry Sealer No. 077: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 2.7 mils.
PAINTING (pROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 4
1-
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-603 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Primer:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.
3. Sherwin-Williams; A-I00 Latex Exterior Wood Primer B42W41: Applied at a dry film thickness
of not less than 1.4 mils.
4. Or approved equal by architect, prior to bidding.
B. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 2.0 mils.
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial
Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.
3. Sherwin-Williams; primer not required over this substrate.
4. or approved equal by Architect prior to bidding.
2.4
INTERIOR PRIMERS
A.
Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.0 mil.
3. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.
4. or approved equal by Architect prior to bidding.
B. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: Factory-formulated
alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Underbody and Primer Sealer No. 245:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-855 SpeedHide Latex Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 1.0 mil.
3. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Classic Interior Primer B28WI0l Series: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.
4. or approved equal by Architect prior to bidding
C. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 2.0 mils.
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior PrimerIFinish DTM Industrial
Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.
3. Sherwin-Williams; primer not required over this substrate.
4. or apprived equal by Architect prior to bidding
2.5
EXTERIOR FINISH COATS
A.
Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for exterior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint No. 171: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 5
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-600 Series SpeedHide Exterior House Paint Flat Latex: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.3 mils.
3. Sherwin-Williams; A-IOO Exterior Latex Flat House & Trim Paint A6 Series: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils.
4. or approved equal by Architect prior to bidding
B. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for
exterior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils.
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex
Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.
3. Sherwin-Williams; A-IOO Latex Gloss A8 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than
1.3 mils.
4. Or approved equal by Architect, prior to bidding.
2.6 INTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior
application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.
2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.0 mil.
3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31 W200 Series: Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils.
4. Or approved equal by Architect, prior to bidding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for
paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4.
1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a
particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of
the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish
materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates
primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
PAINTING (pROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
099]2 - 6
r
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and
similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because
of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers
skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could
impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not
fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral-
fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,
grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers
have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If
surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and bum, correct this
condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is
free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated
from coil stock by mechanical methods.
D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain
material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
E.
Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of
same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient
differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3
APPLICA TlON
A.
General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques
best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to
formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 7
r
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles,
convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend
coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only.
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers
or grilles.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.
8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior.
10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
8. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method.
Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If
sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written
instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats
until paint film is of uniform fmish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that
edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to
that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces
until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate
thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or
lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for
surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer
for material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire
system as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed
in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Uninsulated metal piping.
2. Uninsulated plastic piping.
3. Pipe hangers and supports.
4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied fmal finishes.
5. Visible portions ofinterna\ surfaces ofmeta\ ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets.
6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket material.
7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912-8
ru-
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
3.4
3.5
3.6
G. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with
pores filled.
H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to
material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat
primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to
ensure a finish coat with no bum-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
1. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque
surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
J. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster.
Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or
other surface imperfections.
1. Provide satin finish for final coats.
K.
Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of
rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.
L.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or
repaint work not complying with requirements.
CLEANING
A.
Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from Project site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by
washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct
damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations,
remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
Comply with procedures specified in PDCA PI.
EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
Mineral-Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels and lap siding: Provide the following finish systems over
exterior, mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panels:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint.
PAINTING (pROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 9
r
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
2.
e with requirements, provide the following:
B. Exterior Fascia & Trim: rovide the following finish systems over exterior, factory prime fascia and
trim:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over factory primer.
2. Products: Subject to c 'ance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Paint
1) Pittsburgh Paints
2)
C. Zinc-Coated Metal: Pr . e the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated metal surfaces:
1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
2. Products: Subjec 0 compliance with requirements, provide the following
a. Paint -5:
1) Manufac rer: Pittsburgh Paints
2) Color:
3.7
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:
1. Satin Finish Acrylic-Enamel: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior satin acrylic enamel.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
Pittsburgh Paints
B. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated metal surfaces:
1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
2. Paint P-2:
a.
b.
C. Interior Wood and Hardboard Trim (painted): Provide the following paint systems over new interior
wood surfaces:
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912 - 10
r
Lindberg & Smith Architects
Senior Services & Community Center Addition
1.
Semi-gloss acrylic-enamel finish: Two finish coats over a wood undercoater.
a. Finish coats:
Products: EJUb.e compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Ma rer: .ttsburgh paints.
b. Col:
END OF SECTION 09912
2.
PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS)
09912-11
Also available with 3 or 4 lamps
Cross Section - 2' x 4', 2-Lamp, Lay-In
I- 10'1; ~l
I2~ La U;U a
-:L ~~
I-
24.
~
)1
I
1. I ~
/ I 0 0 0 \
/ -4 J. ..
. I 7/,. Dia. K.O.
I. 48. ..
T
24. [ 0" 7'tD1a.K.O. ~x3.Rec.HDle ~D)
1 I
/- 48. )1
Ceiling Compatibility
. Type G
For lay-in installation In exposed grid
ceilings. Maximum tee widths of 1. and
maximum tee heights of 1-1/2'" allowed.
~~
~ ~-...--
Type F
Overlapping trim conceals edges of ceD.
ing opening. Wing hanger suspension
induded.
~ ~
~ ~
Type M
"Fil-in' style extruded trim aligns with
modular tile joints. Fodure is supported
from concealed suspension, includes
~~ adjustable wing hangers.
~ -. L::::l ~
Complete ordering information on back. ~imensions and specifications subject to change without notICe.
4PS24-2
Specification Grade
Non-Air Troffer
2' x 4', 2 Lamps
Type: :f (X,U€E. A
Job Description:
Features
. 4-1/2" deep troffer eliminates lens shadowing.
. Contoured housing maximizes photometric performance
with uniform lens brightness.
. Mitered corners on door present a clean uninterrupted
appearance.
. Unique stepped ballast cover prevents any shadow being
seen through the lens.
. Rolled edge housing on all four sides makes the fixture
safer and easier to handle.
· T-slot steel hinges insure a snug door fit and positive
retention when opening.
. Heavy duty door frame enhances appearance from
. eye level.
· Snug door fit eliminates light leaks.
Housing
Fixture is constructed of die formed and embossed code gauge
steel. Endcaps ,are hinged and riveted to the housing for added
rigidity. Designed for installation in all ceilings as shown below.
Specify exact ceiling type. Integral tee bar clips are located in
the endcap.
Ballast & Electrical
All luminaires are completely wired with class "P", thermally
protected, resetting, HPF, CBM, LE ballast, sound rated A
. Larnpholders are medium bi-pin with po.sitive retentioll-aAd
edge-wipe contacts. Fumished with an acc-essplate.
Finish . 7
All metal parts processed with a multi-stage phosphat~ding
treatment and finished with a high reflectance bake~:FNhite
enamel. For a post painted housing fipjsh suffix ~og number
with PAF. ",------. .
Shielding
Standard lens is a 100% clear prismatic acrylic pattem 12. For
other available lenses consult lens option sheet or contact your
Columbia representative. Standard flush door is formed steel
with mitered comers. Doors are retained by carn action latches
and are easily removed without tools and hinge from either
side. Regressed steel, flush or regressed aluminum doors with
mitered comers are also available.
Labels
All fixtures carry a U.L listing and bear U.L recessed fixture
labels. Approved by Canadian Standards Association.
T1
3808 North Sullivan Rd.. Spokane, WA 99216. (509) 924-7000
C.'umbia
C;:OMPACT
,1,1 P L "
FLUORESCENT
JOB
TYPE 1=, k~
6
ROUND
RECESSED
DOWNLIGHT.
PAN SIZE: 12.00 x 16.25
PAN SIZE w/SCA: 12.00 x 16.25
VOLTAGE
o
I
5.249
(133.32mm)
CEILING CUT OUT: 6.50
CEILING CUT OUT: 9.125
CATALOG NUMBER
SERIES WATTAGE 4-PIN 2-PIN
PH60 2130 G24q-1 GX23
PH60 2180 G24q-2 G24d-2
PH60 2260 G24q-3 G24d-3
PH60 132T-EB GX24q-3 N/A
-PH60 142T-EB GX24q-4 N/A
OPTIONS & ADDERS
SUFFIX
-',
._-~)
Straw Reflectar -STR
Champagne Gold Reflector -CG
Gold Reflector -. -GD
Wheat Reflector -WT
Umber Reflector -UM
Pewter Reflector -PW
Satin.Glow Reflector -SG
PL Emergency Ballery Pack -EM
Fuse -F
Bar Hanqers (2) -BH
Slope Ceiling Adapter (Specify Degree) -SCA
50 I-ncrements *10-450 (DEG_l
Malle White Trim -MWT
Micro-Baffle -MB
Accent Cone (Special Color - Consult Factory) -AC
Electronic Dimminq Ballast -DIM
Electronic Ballast -EB
C73 w/AC or MB (Please specify) -C73/
-FF w/AC ar MB (Please specify) -F F /
CGS w/ AC ar MB (PI ease spec ify) -CGS/
Wall Wash (not available with AC or MB) -WW
lum inous Disk -LD
· Self-flanged aluminum reflector with'
semi-specular/low iridescent (CS) finish.
· Three piece socket assembly with twin sockets.
· 120/277 volt. (Specify when ordering.)
· Pan/plaster mounting-frame: galvanized steel
construction.
· Adjustable mounting brackets (bar hangers
optional) .
· Prewired at factory for easy field installation.
· Wet location under covered ceiling.
· Lamp by others.
· Easy access 14-ga. galvanized steel junction
box with (2) snap-on covers.
· UL/cUL listed for through branch circuit wiring'.
· Single lamp available.
~f"
~,ty
FIXTURE SUBMITTED/APPROVED
in~inity lighting · carthage mo · www.infinitylighting.com · 417-359-3333 · fax: 417-359-3330
recessed fluorescent pa~e 3
FEATURES:
· Clear acrylic prismatic diffuser. Hinges from" either side. Flat
bottom "and vertical sides. .
. Linear side prisms control visual brightness and direct light
onto adjacent ceiling area.
. Injection molded decorative glow ends on diffuser baskets.
. Heavy gauge steel housing, die embossed for maximum
rigidity.
· Heat sink embossments and levelling projections allow
direct mounting of HPF fixtures on combustible low
density celhilose fiberboard ceilings.
~ 4r ~
l' l'
I..
l'
A B
Bl!P
~ I
24'~ C .GroundScr_ B l'
871 0 &
~ oB B A
J 5'
l'
~
~
<Ill
Q!il
S18 Stem Hanger
~
WC2-2
WC4-2
WC8-2
PRODIGY
TWO LAMP WRAPAROUND
Type: f\.~1 ufZ.E C.
Job Description:
SPECIFICATIONS:
Ballasts
Energy efficient ballasts are thermally protected, automatic
resetting, Class P, high power factor, CBM, sound rated A. 20
watt ballasts are trigger start, Class P, U.L listed.
Finish
All parts pre-painted with high gloss baked white enamel,
minimum reflectance 86%, applied over iron phosphate
pre-treatment for maximum adhesion and rust resistance.
Shielding
100% clear prismatic acrylic.
Labels
All fixtures carry the U.L. label and HPF fixtures are listed for
qirect mounting on a combustible low density cellulose
fiberboard ceiling. (CSA approval available. Use Suffix "CSA").
"..' Cross Section
~~~. ~. ~+ f
I ~ ~ --- -- 15""2'"
2CO,.., . . 2
2'51 ' ! , End
11 '-- ---;::- . ~ ....t
I 1.- 9'E~d -~I I
~10'ShieJding with Glow End ~
A - 5/16'" Diameter Mounting Holes
B - 7/8'" Diameter Knockout
C - 1-1/8'" x 2'" aButterfly" Knockouts
4' Fixtures
6' ~ foe 48' * 48' *36~
In n n n
I I I I
8' Fixtures
6' ~ l-- 9S'
In
I I
~ I c 9S' ~ Ie 84' ---+I
n n n
I I I
Recommended
Stem Hanging Arrangements
85
3808 North Sullivan Rd. . Spokane, WA 99216 . (509) 924-7000
C.~umbia
EM ERG ENe Y / E X I TJ ~::E)(
VOLTAGE rzD
,..---
..
,.
LED
EXIT SIGN
-- l
( ) 1
7.5"
j
~._."."
I . 12' ~I j2.r1
CATALOG NUMBER
SERIES
EXIT-R-AC-WHT
EXIT-R-EM-WHT
EXIT-G-AC-WHT
EXIT-G-EM-WHT
\
)
OPTIONS & ADDERS
SUFFIX
Black Housing
Wire Guard
Polycorb Shield
Solido
BLK
WG
PC Shield
Solido
DESCRIPTION
SUFFIX
White
Red
WHT
R
G
AC
EM
Green
AC Operation
Battery Backup
· Fully automatic operation.
· Completely self-contained.
· Compact, low profile design.
· Single/double face standard.
· Universal mounting canopy for top or side
installation
· Energy consumption of less than 4 watts for red
LED and less than 2 watts for green LED.
· Test switch.
· 25-year LED lamp life.
· Automatic, low voltage disconnect (LYD).
· Universal 120/277 YAC operation.
· High impact, Y-O flame retardant, thermoplastic
housing.
· AC and emergency units available.
· Ni-cad battery on emergency (EM) units
provides 90 minutes of emergency operation.
· Charge rate/power LED indicator.
· Listed for damp location.
· UL/ETL'listed.
· Environmentally-coated, fully automatic, solid-
state charger on emergency (EM) units only.
· Replaceable directional indicators (Chevrons).
FIXTURE SUBMITTED/APPROVED
~f"
~,!Y
infinity lighting · carthage mo · www.infiriitylighting.com · 417-359-3333 · fax: 417-359-3330
JP46248 11/01 emerQencv/exit caae 3
L..
TECHNICAL
Permit
Address
Project description r f Se r o r S-ek-v cis
Cohirnu n i Cen$e
Date the permit was finaled
Number of technical pages I I
Sob Na, c i L loot 19 l
Sud u kraX Deis 1 n
s ih-k Sy94-ern
Calc5_
nap Engtagarting :ciao
CONSULTING ENGINEERS /CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL
Structural Desian Calculations
of
Skylight System
Port Angeles Senior Services and Community Center
Port Angeles, Washington
for
SKYLIGHT SYSTEMS. INC.
C/O MR. BILL JOY
P O. BOX 842
GRAHAM, WA 98338
JANUARY 1994
R.E. Job No. 94001
JRB
1519 West Valley Highway North /Suite 101
Post Office Box 836 /Auburn WA 98071
SCOPE OF WORK
DESIGN LOADS
RUPERT ENGINEERING, INC.
1519 W Valley Highway N Ste 101
P 0 Box 836
AUBURN WASHINGTON 98071
TEL (206) 833 -7776
FAX (206) 939 -2168
Structural analysis of the skylight system at the PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES AND
COMMUNITY CENTER in Port Angeles, Washington per the 1991 UBC requirements and provide
structural design recommendations with respect to lateral and vertical loadings.
See sheet 1 of 1 of the attached shop drawings dated 11/4/93 by Skylight Systems, Inc. for general
configurations and details.
SITE LOCATION AND EXPOSURE CONDITIONS
The proposed structure is to be located in the city of Port Angeles, Washington.
The site has been considered to be generally open around the structure, therefore, a site exposure
coefficient "C" per 1991 UBC section 2311 applies.
Wnd 90 mph; Exp. C
Seismic Zone III
Snow Live 25 PSF
Dead load 7 PSF
SPECIFICATIONS AND ASSUMPTIONS
The steel and wood support structures (designed by others) have been assumed to adequately
support all loads imposed upon it by the aluminum skylight system.
The skylight contrator shall assume responsibility for all erection procedures.
Aluminum All extrusions 6063 -T6 alloy
Fasteners TEKS screws
Bolts ASTM A193 stainless steel
JOB 7 J QO
SHEET NO. OF
CALCULATED BY 12Q DATE
CHECKED BY DATE
SCALE
f 1 n 6E yL /4//ii GOG3 TC
Cdr
RUPERT ENGINEERING, INC.
1519 W Valley Highway N Ste 101
P 0 Box 836
AUBURN WASHINGTON 98071
TEL (206) 833 -7776
FAX (206) 939 -2168
44:o0 a z -3
fir( /703 4
z
DL oa1
(,Joy. (7 it 2r% bPF
6,)SA)0., m (25 r z Sz ,O,
(.J F.:.rc 6 7 ft'i
6 7 s 335-"'r
'(Z„ 33s� 376 4 iQLT gP O1.1 S° Sf CIA-Pre-r- Gro
E (it 2.r) G0 nn.Pur C Ap.11a
21
5597
r r o P 7 Z E l k- c
Fti I S o '-s
o .c_
V,r- /se,
de,., 2 z 1/4
Fv v /dt.„ 2
o z'
o 7 N s7
JOB
z y e
6 y¢4
SHEET NO.
i o le-
2
P A 3o r s
F 13
CALCULATED BY
CHECKED BY
SCALE
6 z
�7r
R•1
OF
DATE 9 4
DATE
-i
2+k- -r s e
2S D C.. R" d K-J
RUPERT ENGINEERING, INC.
1519 W Valley Highway N Ste 101
P 0 Box 836
AUBURN WASHINGTON 98071
TEL (206) 833 -7776
FAX (206) 939 -2168
J� /7 ,OL w Q ir' 1 >)e iUor Cjov�i�nl
GJ� V C 7 trf X 23 �.�•e
6.J�. N.• L (z z 7
r•.-'L t 47 3 r'l 9. 7
t 7Y�
12-x+ t
'(Z, rea--
Cef
IA
JOB
SHEET NO.
CALCULATED BY
CHECKED BY
SCALE
47 Pp/
6 j Mt /1.;7 /4vG
9400i
3
2fi
3749 Pi' uP
0 1,µQ /A. Pcd c Loco .k arc r/� 0 715 4 ra ,2E ✓S
R er GoNP.-1ELTlo� r�Frtc-, A-t.0
/e.77 fj'
�v �s r) 46 4
c 1
GJ re net-
OF
DATE
DATE
S
91
SJ f 35 `74/0
J
2 y`� /I
A«M
RUPERT ENGINEERING, INC.
1519 W Valley Highway N Ste 101
P 0 Box 836
AUBURN WASHINGTON 98071
TEL (206) 833 -7776
FAX (206) 939 -2168
p- /4- G•J000 2c°+� 0/17°4 1
SOB 00
SHEET NO 4 n
CALCULATED BY /4
CHECKED CHECKED BY
SCALE
wlao
(,..J /TNlJ,P~AC_ /Z4 A ir /z H a /3 k Z Se )i /A)
39 It
c /No, cE c' /o.2 z X/ 4/9 44-
Gam-' z
24-2-") l L)
P4- Lc.a C/ PS' )L Qdo
z1
6Goj 1
F6
S 5" 5 0-- 774 Jo 2g -ATE-2
c/o cc�` Lr .07
f 6 /6 /‹r'
oy¢ z O z) r
PA-t.L°w f,e4 fires, 3 74.
OF
DATE
DATE
/9¢
Rupert Engineering
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES CENTER
SKYLIGHT SYSTEM (R E #94001)
Units Option US Standard
AISC Code Checks 9th Edition ASD
Shear Deformation No
P -Delta Effects No
Redesign No
Edge Forces No
A S I F 1 333
A
1 1 2
RISA -2D (R) Version 3 03
Job 940()/
Page
Date 19¢
Node Boundary Conditions
No X -Coord Y -Coord X -dof Y -dof Rotation Temp
(ft) (ft) (in, K /in) (in, K /in) (r, K -ft /r) (F)
1 0 00 0 00 R R 0 OC
2 5 00 2 50 R 0 OC
Material Elastic Poisson's Thermal Weight Yield Stres:
Label Modulus Ratio Coefficient Density (Fy)
(Ksi) (F) (K /ft3) (Ksi)--
A 10100 00 0 30000 0 65000 0 490 36 000
Section Database Matl Area Moment of As y/y
Label Shape Set Inertia Coef
(in (in'4)
A 1 24 1 703 1 20
I J I Releases J End Offsets
No Node Node Section x y z x y z Sec Sway I J Lengtt
(in) (in) (ft)
1 1- 2 A 5 5'
I J Unbraced Lengths K Factors Bending Coefs
No Node Node Lb -in Lb -out Lc In Out Cm Cb
(ft) (ft) (ft)
Rupert Engineering
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES CENTER
SKYLIGHT SYSTEM (R E #94001)
BLC
No
Memb I J
1 DID
2 SNOW
3 WIND UPLIFT
Member Distributed Loads,BLC 1 DL
Start
No Node Node Dir Magnitude
(K/ft,F)
1 1- 2 V 0 015
Member Distributed Loads,BLC 2 SNOW
Memb I J
No Node Node Dir
1 1 2 V
Memb I J
No Node Node Dir
1 1 2
Load Combination
No Description
1 DL SNOW
2 DL WIND UPLIFT
V
Dynamic Analysis Data
Number of modes (frequencies)
Basic Load Case for masses
BLC mass direction of action
Acceleration of Gravity
RISA -2D (R) Version 3 03
Basic Load Case
Description
Start
Magnitude
(K /ft, F)
0 052
Start
Magnitude
(K /ft,F)
0 047
1 -1 2 -1
1 66
End
Magnitude
(K/ft,F)
0 015
End
Magnitude
(K/ft,F)
0 052
Member Distributed Loads,BLC 3 WIND UPLIFT
End
Magnitude
(K/ft,F)
0 047
Self Wt BLC BLC BLC BLC BLC
Dir Fac Fac Fac Fac Fac Fac DYNA S V
3 1
3
None
X only
32 20 ft /sec *2
Job 9400/
Page 4
Date iJ 9¢
Load Totals
Nodal Point Dist
1
1
1
Start End
Location Location
(ft) (ft)
0 000 5 590
Start End
Location Location
(ft) (ft)
0 000 5 590
Start End
Location Location
(ft) (ft)
0 000 5 590
W E
Rupert Engineering
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES CENTER
SKYLIGHT SYSTEM (R E #94001)
Load Combination is 1 DL SNOW
Nodal Displacements
Node
1
2
Load Combination is 1 DL SNOW
Reactions
Node Global X Global Y Moment
(K) (K) (K ft)
1 0 33300 0 33300 0 00000
2 -0 33300 0 00000 0 00000
Totals 0 00000 0 33300 0 00000
Load Combination is 1 DL SNOW
Member End Forces
Nodes I -End J -End
No I J Axial Shear Moment Axial Shear Moment
(K) (K) (K ft) (K) (K) (K-ft)--
1 1- 2 0 45 0 15 0 00 -0 30 0 15 0 00
Load Combination is 1 DL SNOW
AISC Code Checks
Nodes
No I J Maximum 0
RISA -2D (R) Version 3 03
Global X Global Y Rotation
'(in) (in) (rad)
-0 00000 -0 00000 -0 00331
0 00000 -0 00445 0 00319
1 1- 2 Not Calculated
Job 94
Page 7
Date //.91c-
Member Quarter Points
1/4 1/2 3/4 L Shear
Rupert Engineering
PORT ANGELES SENIOR SERVICES CENTER
SKYLIGHT SYSTEM (R E #94001)
Load Combination is 2 DL WIND UPLIFT
Nodal Displacements
Node
1
2
Global X
lin)
0 00000
-0 00000
RISA -2D (R) Version 3 03
Load Combination is 2 DL WIND UPLIFT
Reactions
Nodes
No I J Maximum 0
Node Global X Global Y Moment
(K) (K) (K -ft)
1 -0 18782 -0 18757 0 00000
2 0 18782 0 00000 0 00000
Totals 0 00000 -0 18757 0 00000
Load Combination is 2 DL WIND UPLIFT
Member End Forces
Load Combination is 2 DL WIND UPLIFT
AISC Code Checks
Global Y
(in)
0 00000
0 00251
Nodes I -End J -End
No I J Axial Shear Moment Axial Shear Moment
(K) (K) (K ft) (K) (K) (K-ft)--
1 1- 2 -0 25 -0 08 0 00 0 17 -0 08 -0 00
1 1- 2 Not Calculated
Job 74
Page 3
Date i /qL
Rotation
(rad)
0 00186
-0 00180
Member Quarter Points
1/4 1/2 3/4 L Shear
MEMBER DETAILED ANALYSIS
Load Comb 1 DL SNOW
Memb 1 1 2
Property A
Shape
Length
Max Shear 0 15 K
Location U 00 ft
Min Shear -0 15 E
Location 5 59 ft
Max Moment U UU K -f t
Location 5 59 ft
Min Moment -0 21 K -f t
Location 2 00 ft
Max +Def 1 0 0000 in
Location 0 00 ft
Max -Def 1 -0 0701 in
Location 2 85 ft
Max Unck No Calc
5 59 ft Moment
Unity Check Not Calculated
Shear
Deflected
Shape